PM MHMSG502 B3e - L12328a01 PDF

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Applicable Model
MH-403 SH-403
MH-503, 503/U SH-503
MH-633, 633/U SH-633
MH-1003 SH5000
HVM630 SH8000
AFM2400 NH5000
ULTIMILL H3000 NH4000
Applicable NC Unit
MSG-501
MSG-502
Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

manuals supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment
manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they contain.
Keep the manuals carefully so that they will not be lost.
PM-MHMSG502-B3E
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice due to
improvements to the machine or in order to improve the manual.
Consequently, please bear in mind that there may be slight discrepancies
between the contents of the manual and the actual machine. Changes to
the instruction manual are made in revised editions which are
distinguished from each other by updating the instruction manual number.
• Should you discover any discrepancies between the contents of the
manual and the actual machine, or if any part of the manual is unclear,
please contact Mori Seiki and clarify these points before using the
machine. Mori Seiki will not be liable for any damages occurring as a
direct or indirect consequence of using the machine without clarifying
these points.
• All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction manual in any form, in
whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of Mori Seiki.
The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

equipment) has been manufactured in accordance with the laws
and standards that prevail in the relevant country or region.
Consequently it cannot be exported, sold, or relocated, to a
destination in a country with different laws or standards.
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the
government of the exporting country.
Check with the government agency for authorization.
990730
Machine Information
Description of machine: Machining center
Model name:
Machine serial No.:
Manufacturing date:
Representative:
Business hours: 8:30 - 17:30

CONTENTS
SIGNAL WORD DEFINITION
FOR SAFE OPERATION
FOREWORD
BEFORE READING THIS PROGRAMMING

MANUAL
A: BEFORE PROGRAMMING
B: G FUNCTIONS
C: M FUNCTIONS
D: HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
E: CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
F: T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
G: D AND H FUNCTIONS
H: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

(OPTION)
I: B FUNCTIONS
J: A FUNCTIONS
K: EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
INDEX
SIGNAL WORD DEFINITION
A variety of symbols are used to indicate different types of warning information and advice.
Learn the meanings of these symbols and carefully read the explanation to ensure safe operation
while using this manual.
<Symbols related with warning>
The warning information is classified into three categories, DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION.
The following symbols are used to indicate the level of danger.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.
The information described in the DANGER frame must be strictly
observed.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
The information described in the WARNING frame must be strictly
observed.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury or damages to the machine.
The information described following the caution symbol must be strictly observed.
<Other symbols>
COMMAND The format identified by this symbol gives information for programming.
Indicates the items that must be taken into consideration.

NOTE
Indicates useful guidance relating to operations.
Indicates the page number or manual to be referred to.

The number in ( ) indicates the section number.
Indicates the procedure used for displaying the required screen.
Indicates the example of operations.

Ex.
FOR SAFE OPERATION -1-
FOR SAFE OPERATION
This machine is intended for use by persons who have a basic knowledge of machine tools,
including cutting theory, tooling and fixtures. Mori Seiki cannot accept responsibility for accidents
that occur as a result of operation, maintenance, or programming of the machine by personnel
who lack this basic knowledge or sufficient training.
Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users. Mori Seiki cannot predict the
spindle speed, feedrate, depth of cut, etc., that will be required in each case and it is therefore the
user's responsibility to determine the appropriate settings.
Each machine is shipped with a variety of built-in safety devices. However, careless handling of
the machine can cause serious accidents. To prevent the occurrence of such accidents, all
programmers and other personnel that deal with the machine must carefully read the manuals
supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment manufacturers, before
attempting to operate, maintain, or program the machine.
Because there are so many "things that cannot be done" and "things that must not be done" when
using the machine, it is impossible to cover all of them in the Instruction Manual. Assume that
something is impossible unless the manual specifically states that it can be done.
The following manuals are supplied with your machining center:
I. Safety Guidelines prepared by Mori Seiki
II. Instruction Manual prepared by Mori Seiki
• MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• OPERATION MANUAL
• PROGRAMMING MANUAL
III. NC unit Operation and Maintenance Manuals prepared by the NC unit manufacturer
IV. Instruction Manuals prepared by equipment manufacturers
In addition to the instruction manual, ladder diagrams and parameter tables are also supplied with
the machine to help with electrical maintenance, and there is an electrical circuit diagram in the
document compartment inside the electrical cabinet. Please make use of this material when
carrying out maintenance work.
Fundamental safety information is presented in the following pages.
All cautions on operation must be strictly observed when operating the machine, carrying out
maintenance work, or writing programs. Failure to observe fundamental safety information can
cause accidents in which the operator or other personnel working near the machine are seriously
injured, or the machine is damaged. All personnel that deal with the machine must carefully read
and thoroughly understand the information in the following pages before attempting programming
or operating the machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
-2- FOR SAFE OPERATION
The vocabulary and terms used for machine parts and operations in the warnings, cautions and
notes are defined or explained in the manual texts and illustrations.
If you are unsure of the meaning of any word or expression, please refer to the corresponding
textual explanation or illustration. If you still cannot understand or are unsure of the meaning,
contact Mori Seiki for clarification.
"Operator", as used in these cautions, means not only the operator who operates or supervises a
machine tool to perform machining, but also any person, including maintenance personnel who
maintain and inspect a machine tool or safety device or safety measures provided with it, and the
programmers who create programs used for machining, who are engaged in operations which
deal with a machine tool.
Therefore, all persons engaged in these operations must carefully read these cautions and related
materials, and thoroughly understand the contents before attempting to operate the machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
1 CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE
The cautions that must constantly be born in mind when operating the machine are listed below.
Listed below are important cautions that apply to all machine-related work (machine operation,
maintenance, inspection, programming, etc.).
DANGER 1. Never touch a switch, button, or key with wet hands.

If it is not properly grounded or is leaking current, you could receive
an electric shock.
2. Before starting machine operation, check that there is nobody inside
the protective cover or close to rotating or moving parts of the
machine. Never touch or stand near the rotating or moving parts of
the machine while it is operating; you could be seriously injured by
being entangled in the rotating parts or crushed by the moving parts.
3. Never operate the machine with the protective cover removed or
while interlocks or other safety devices are ineffective, since the
machine could operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents
involving serious injuries.
Contact Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer or relevant equipment
manufacturers immediately if the protective cover or safety devices
are damaged.
4. Always lock out the power to the machine before carrying out work
inside the machine – such as setup work or cleaning the inside of the
machine – and before carrying out inspections, repairs, or
maintenance work. In addition, set the main switch to the OFF
position and lock it, and place "PERSONNEL INSIDE MACHINE" or
"UNDER MAINTENANCE" signs around the machine to stop anyone
from switching on the power or operating the machine while the
work is in progress. If work inside the machine or inspection or
maintenance work is carried out with the power switched on,
machine elements could be moved, and the personnel carrying out
the work could be seriously injured by being entangled in the
rotating parts or crushed by the moving parts of the machine.
5. Always switch off the power before carrying out inspection or
maintenance work in the electrical cabinet or on motors and
transformers. If work has to be done while the power is switched on,
it must be carried out by a qualified electrical engineer, taking the
proper precautions; there is a danger of electric shock.
SO-MC-A9E/P
DANGER 6. Cover power supply cables that are run along the floor with rigid
insulated plates to prevent them from being damaged. Damage to
the insulation of the power supply cable could cause electric shocks.
7. Even after the power is turned off, some devices will remain charged
and the temperature of motors, lights inside the machine, etc., will
remain high. Make sure that the charge has been discharged or the
temperature has fallen before carrying out maintenance work or
inspections on these devices. If you touch these devices/units
carelessly while they are still charged or while the temperature is still
high you could receive an electric shock or be burned.
8. Check that all cables are properly insulated before using the
machine. There is considerable danger of electric shock if damaged
cables are used.
WARNING 1. Keep the floor area around the machine tidy and clean; do not leave
things lying on it, and clean up spilled water or oil immediately. If
you fail to do this, plant personnel may injure themselves by tripping
over or slipping on the floor.
2. Before operating the machine, check the area where you will have to
stand and walk to make sure you can operate the machine safely. If
you do not check your footing beforehand, you could loose your
balance while working and injure yourself by putting your hands in a
dangerous place while trying to find support, or by falling over.
3. Before using a switch, button, or key, check visually that it is the one
you intend to use, and then press or set it decisively. Pressing the
wrong switch, button, or key by mistake can cause accidents
involving serious injuries or damage to the machine.
4. Always keep the doors closed during machine operation. Leaving
the machine running or operating it with a door open could cause
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine; plant
personnel could be seriously injured by being entangled in the
rotating parts of the machine or crushed by its moving parts, struck
by a workpiece or cutting tool if they fly out of the machine, hit by
flying chips, or splashed with coolant.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 5. The parameters are set on shipment in accordance with the machine
specifications; do not change them without first consulting Mori
Seiki. If the parameters are changed without consultation, the
machine may operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents
6. The machine specifications are set before shipping so that the
customer's safety is ensured and the machine can deliver its full
performance. Never change the settings nor modify the machine in
any case. Changing the settings or modifying the machine without
consultation may degrade safety assurance or cause accidents
involving serious injuries, impaired machine performance, and
considerable shortening of the machine service life. If the
specifications and/or settings have to be changed, or the machine
has to be modified to meet new machining requirements, or due to
changes in the operating conditions, consult Mori Seiki.
Mori Seiki cannot accept responsibility for accidents that occur as a
result of changing the machine specifications.
7. Before operating or programming the machine, or performing
maintenance work, carefully read the instruction manuals provided
by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer and the equipment
manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they
contain. Keep these instruction manuals safely so that you do not
lose them. If you do lose an instruction manual, contact Mori Seiki,
the NC unit manufacturer, or the relevant equipment manufacturer. If
you attempt to operate the machine without having carefully read the
instruction manuals first, you will perform dangerous and erroneous
operations which may cause accidents involving serious injuries or
damage to the machine.
8. Always observe the instructions in the caution labels stuck to the
machine. Carefully read the Safety Guidelines supplied with the
machine so that you fully understand them. If the writing on the
labels becomes illegible, or if the labels are damaged or peel off,
contact Mori Seiki. Also contact Mori Seiki if you cannot understand
any of the labels. If you operate the machine without observing the
instructions on the labels, or without understanding them properly,
you will perform dangerous and erroneous operations which may
cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 9. Never operate, maintain, or program the machine while under the
influence of alcohol or drugs. Your concentration will be impaired,
you may loose your balance and fall against dangerous parts of the
machine, and you may operate the machine incorrectly, causing
accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the machine.
10. Machine operators and authorized personnel working inside the
plant and in the vicinity of the machine must put their clothing and
hair in order so that there is no danger they will be entangled in the
machine. If you have uncontrolled long hair or loose clothing and it
gets caught in the machine, you will be seriously injured by being
entangled in the rotating parts of the machine or crushed by its
moving parts. Always wear safety shoes, eye protectors and a
helmet.
11. The machine is equipped with interlock functions such as the door
interlock and electrical cabinet door interlock to ensure the
operator's safety. All the interlock functions must be ON when
operating the machine. If you have to operate the machine with the
interlocks released, you must recognize that there are many hazards
involved and pay particular attention to safety while operating the
machine in this condition. After finishing the necessary work, you
must switch the interlocks back ON.
If the machine is operated with the interlocks released, it may
operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents involving
serious injuries or damage to the machine.
12. The door interlock function serves only to protect the machine
operator from accidents that can be prevented by inhibiting manual
and automatic operation of the spindle, axis movement, and all other
operations in automatic operation when the door is opened and
while it is open; it will not afford protection against other hazards.
For example, each machine user will machine a variety of workpiece
types and use a variety of workpiece holding fixtures, cutting tools,
and cutting conditions; you are still responsible for ensuring safety
with regard to the hazards that can arise from these user-specific
conditions.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 13. If the door interlock function is released, the machine is able to
operate with some limitations while the door is open, exposing you
to danger. In daily production operation, the door interlock function
must be set "ON" and the key operating the switch must be removed
from the switch and kept safely.
When aligning the workpiece, measuring the tool offset data, or
carrying out other setup work, it may be necessary to release the
door interlock function. If you have to carry out work while the
interlock function is released, you must recognize that there are
many hazards involved and pay particular attention to safety. When
the door interlock function is released, the warning lamp blinks in
red and a warning buzzer sounds intermittently. You must recognize
that the door interlock function is released when the warning lamp is
blinking in red and the warning buzzer is activated. After finishing
the necessary work, you must switch the interlock function back ON.
14. Before operating the machine, memorize the locations of the
emergency stop buttons so that you can press one immediately from
any location and at any time while operating the machine. The
emergency stop buttons are used to stop all operations in the event
of an emergency. If there is an obstacle in front of an emergency
stop button it will not be possible to press it immediately when an
emergency occurs and this could cause accidents involving serious
injuries or damage to the machine.
15. To prevent hazardous situations, the plant or equipment supervisor
must bar entry to the plant or the vicinity of the machine to anyone
with insufficient safety training. Allowing persons without sufficient
safety training unhindered into the plant and the vicinity of the
machine could cause accidents involving serious injuries.
16. Because of the inertia of the moving parts of the machine, they may
not be stopped immediately when the emergency stop button is
pressed. Always confirm that all operations have stopped before
going near these parts. If you approach the moving parts of the
machine without due care you may be entangled in them and
seriously injured.
17. Do not leave articles such as tools and rags inside the machine. If
the machine is operated with such articles inside it they may become
entangled with a tool and thrown out of the machine, and this could
cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 18. When the machine is running, operating noise may possibly be
produced, depending on the cutting conditions and other factors.
When an operator works near the machine, either change cutting
conditions to limit generation of noises or the operator must wear
protective gear, meeting the level of generated noise, which will not
cause inconvenience for performing intended work. Working under
noises might impair operator's health, such as hearing.
CAUTION 1. User programs stored in the memory, parameters set before shipping, and the
offset data input by the user, can be destroyed or lost due to incorrect operation
or other causes. To protect data against destruction and loss, back it up using an
external I/O device (option), or other device.
If you fail to make backup files, Mori Seiki cannot accept responsibility for any
problem resulting from destroyed programs or lost parameter data and/or offset
data.
Keep the parameter table supplied with the machine in a safe place. Note that if
the data is destroyed it will take some time to set the parameters again.
2. Never touch chips or the cutting edges of tools with your bare hands since you
may be injured.
3. If the machine is equipped with a footswitch, take care not to stumble over it since
you may be injured.
4. If it becomes necessary to perform a memory clear operation, contact Mori Seiki
first. If a memory clear operation is performed without due care, the entire
memory contents may be deleted, causing machine faults.
5. The machine operator must have normal sensory perception. If a person who
has an abnormality affecting any sense operates the machine, he/she will not be
able to accurately confirm the machine status and surrounding conditions by eye/
ear/touch. Sensory confirmation is extremely important when operating the
machine and an inability to make such confirmations properly could cause
6. Ensure that the workplace is adequately lit. If there is insufficient light, the
operator may trip over something or be unable to perform or check work
accurately, and this could cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to
the machine.
7. Remove any obstacles around the machine.
Secure adequate space around the machine for working and adequate
passageway, considering both ease of operation and safety. If there are any
obstacles or if there is insufficient space or passageway, the operator may trip
and fall or be unable to work properly, and this could cause accidents involving
SO-MC-A9E/P
CAUTION 8. Stack products (workpieces) stably. If they are not stacked stably they may fall
and injure the machine operator. Unstable stacking may also damage the
products (workpieces), causing defects.
9. Keep the area around the machine clean; remove chips and foreign matter near
the machine. If left, chips and foreign matter may cause plant personnel to fall
and injure themselves.
10. Use a working bench strong and stable enough to support the weight of the
workpieces and tools. If an unstable working bench is used the workpieces and
tools could fall off and injure the machine operator.
If a machine alarm or NC alarm occurs, check its meaning by referring to the alarm list in
NOTE
the instruction manual or ladder diagram, and take the appropriate action. If this is
ineffective, consult Mori Seiki or the NC unit manufacturer and take action when you
understand clearly what to do.
SO-MC-A9E/P
2 SAFETY PRACTICES DURING PROGRAMMING
The safety practices that the programmer must observe while programming are presented below.
Read them before attempting programming.
Workpiece shapes and materials vary widely among machine users and, since the workpiece
holding fixtures, cutting tools, cutting methods, and machining conditions will also vary
accordingly, Mori Seiki cannot predict what factors will apply in individual cases. It is the machine
user's responsibility to take these factors into account when creating a program. It is also the
machine user's responsibility to ensure safety with respect to the hazards that may arise due to
these user-dependent factors.
WARNING 1. Specify a spindle speed limit that is lower than the lowest of the
individual allowable speed limits for the holder and cutting tool. If
you do not follow this instruction, the workpiece or cutting tool could
fly out of the machine, causing accidents involving serious injuries
or damage to the machine.
2. Clamp workpieces and cutting tools securely. Determine the depth
of cut and cutting feedrate for test cutting with safe operation as the
first priority; do not give priority to productivity when making these
determinations. If you fail to observe this warning, the tool or
workpiece could fly out of the machine, causing accidents involving
3. Always select the most appropriate cutting tool and holder for the
material and shape of the workpiece to be machined and cutting
method, and check that the workpiece can be machined without any
problems.
If an inappropriate cutting tool or holder is selected, the workpiece or
cutting tool could fly out during machining, causing accidents
involving serious injuries or damage to the machine. Machining
accuracy will also be adversely affected.
4. Before starting spindle rotation, check that the workpiece and
cutting tool are securely clamped.
If the workpiece or cutting tool is not securely clamped, the cutting
tool will fly out when the spindle is rotated, or the workpiece will fly
out during machining, causing accidents involving serious injuries
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 5. The positions to be reached in the second, third and fourth zero
return operation are established by setting the distance from the
machine zero point in parameters. For the machines equipped with
an APC, do not change the settings for these parameters. If the
setting is changed, the machine will move in an unexpected manner,
and this could cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage
to the machine.
6. For the machine with the flat type operation panel, always place the
operation selection key-switch in the "operation enable" or
"operation disable" position after completing program entry. Be
aware that the program will be updated if program editing operations
are carried out with the operation selection key-switch at the
"operation and edit enable" position. If the program is executed after
being accidentally updated in this way the machine could operate
unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
7. For the machine with the discrete type operation panel, always place
the edit enable key-switch in the "edit disable" position after
completing program entry. Be aware that the program will be
updated if program editing operations are carried out with the edit
enable key-switch at the "edit enable" position. If the program is
executed after being accidentally updated in this way the machine
could operate unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to
the machine.
8. For the machine with the touch panel, always return the WRITE
PROTECT switch (PROGRAM) back to ON after completing program
entry. Be aware that the program will be updated if program editing
operations are carried out with the WRITE PROTECT switch
(PROGRAM) set OFF. If the program is executed after being
accidentally updated in this way, the machine could operate
unexpectedly, causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 9. Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users.
Mori Seiki cannot predict the spindle speed, feedrate, depth of cut,
etc., that will be required in each case and it is therefore the user's
responsibility to determine the appropriate settings.
Note also that the machining conditions determined in automatic
programming are the standard conditions, which are not necessarily
the most suitable for the user's purposes and may have to be
changed in accordance with the workpiece, cutting tool, fixture, etc.
The conditions determined in automatic programming are for
reference only and the final responsibility for determining the
conditions rests with the user. (Conversational NC specification)
If you have difficulty determining these conditions, consult the tool
manufacturer and fixture manufacturer. Machining under
inappropriate machining conditions can cause the workpiece or
cutting tool to fly out during machining, causing accidents involving
10. While the machine is temporarily stopped during machining – for
example when checking a program, performing test cutting, or
cleaning chips out of the machine – do not move the axes or perform
tool changes in manual operation. Or, if it is absolutely necessary to
do so, be sure to return the axes to their original positions before
restarting the program. If machining is restarted without returning
them to their original positions, the axes will move in unexpected
directions, causing collisions between the cutting tool or holders
and workpiece or fixture, which could cause accidents involving
serious injuries or damage to the machine. The workpiece could
also be machined with the wrong tool, and the cutting tool could be
damaged.
11. If the program is to be input to the NC memory not by the
programmer but by a machine operator, write it clearly and
accurately so that anyone will be able to read it. If the operator
misreads the program and inputs incorrect data, the cutting tool or
holder could interfere with the workpiece or fixture during
machining, causing accidents involving serious injuries or damage
to the machine.
12. If you forget to enter a decimal point in a program entry that requires
one and start the machine without noticing the error, the axis may
move to an unexpected position, causing damage to the machine.
Check that you have entered decimal points where necessary.
SO-MC-A9E/P
WARNING 13. Before starting the spindle, carefully check the workpiece gripping
conditions and the machining conditions, including the workpiece
clamping method, spindle speed, depth of cut, and feedrate. If you
start the spindle without adequate checking, the workpiece or cutting
tool could fly out, causing accidents involving serious injuries or
14. There are cases that the spindle must not be rotated at the specified
maximum speed due to the conditions related to the jig and the
cutting tool, etc., even if the length, the diameter, and the mass of the
cutting tool are all within the restrictions. If the spindle is rotated at a
high speed exceeding the permissible spindle forcibly under such
situation, the cutting tool will fly out, causing serious injuries or
CAUTION 1. Contact Mori Seiki when machining cast iron, ceramics, or other materials which
generate powder-type chips in dry cutting. If chips are not dealt with in an
appropriate manner for the workpiece material, they can cause machine faults.
2. Before starting mass production, always check the program and perform test
cutting in the single block mode. If you fail to do this the workpiece could collide
with the cutting tool during machining, causing damage to the machine.
Machining defects could also be caused.
3. When shifting the coordinate system in order to check a program, set the shift
direction and shift amount carefully to avoid interference between the cutting tool
and holder, or workpiece and fixture, etc., which could cause damage to the
machine.
4. You will probably use a variety of workpiece shapes and materials, and the
clamping method will differ according to the workpiece type. Therefore, when
checking a program with the workpiece clamped, check for interference carefully,
taking the workpiece shape and material, and the workpiece clamping method,
into account. Depending on these factors, there may be interference between
the cutting tool or holder and the workpiece or fixture, which will cause damage to
the machine.
5. Before tilting or rotating the table, make sure that no interference will occur as a
result of the motion, since this will cause damage to the machine.
6. If abnormal vibration or chattering is generated during machining due to improper
combination among jig, cutting tool, workpiece material, etc., change the
machining conditions to proper values. If machining is continued forcibly under
the machining conditions with improper values, it will bring critical problems for
the machine and accuracy such that the bearings is damaged quickly and cutting
tool is worn excessively will take place.
SO-MC-A9E/P
3 TO ENSURE HIGH ACCURACY
The accuracy of the finished product cannot be maintained unless the following points are
observed when operating the machine. Failure to observe these points can also cause accidents
involving serious injuries and damage to the machine. Study these points carefully before
operating the machine.
WARNING Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users, and
Mori Seiki cannot predict the requirements for individual cases. Give full
consideration to the workpiece material and shape in order to set the
appropriate machining conditions. If inappropriate settings are used, the
workpiece or cutting tool could fly out during machining, causing
Inappropriate settings will also adversely affect machining accuracy.
NOTE
1. When mounting a workpiece to the table or workpiece holding fixture, take the
rigidity of the workpiece into account when determining the clamping method so that
the workpiece will not be distorted during machining. If the workpiece is distorted,
machining accuracy will be adversely affected.
2. If any chips become entangled with the workpiece or cutting tool, the machining
accuracy will be adversely affected. Select a cutting tool and machining conditions
which do not cause entangling of chips.
SO-MC-A9E/P
4 PRECAUTIONS ON THE MACHINE EQUIPPED WITH

HIGH-SPEED SPINDLE
For the machine equipped with the high-speed spindle (definition of high-speed spindle: the
product of the spindle bearing I.D. (mm) × spindle speed (min−1) is 1.2 million or larger), strictly
observe the cautionary items indicated below to ensure safe machine operation and also to
maintain spindle life and accuracy for a long time.
CAUTION If abnormal vibration or chattering is generated during machining due to improper

combination among jig, cutting tool, workpiece material, etc., change the machining
conditions to proper values. If machining is continued forcibly under the machining
conditions with improper values, it will bring critical problems for the machine and
accuracy such that the bearings is damaged quickly and cutting tool is worn
excessively will take place.
5 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
The cautions that relate to the rapid traverse rate are given below. Observe these cautions during
programming.
CAUTION If X-, Y-, and Z-axis movements are specified in the same block in the G00 mode, the
tool path is not always a straight line from the present position to the programmed end
point. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the tool path, remembering that X-, Y-,
and Z-axis movement is at the rapid traverse rate. If the workpiece or fixture lies in the
tool path, it could interfere with the tool or tool holder. This interference will cause
SO-MC-A9E/P
6 CAUTIONS RELATING TO G CODES
The cautions that relate to G codes (also called "preparatory codes") are given below.
Observe these cautions during programming.
CAUTION 1. When using the G28 and G30 commands, first return the Z-axis to the zero point
or the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th zero point, and then return the X- and Y-axes to the zero
point or 2nd, 3rd, or 4th zero point. If the X- and Y-axes are returned to the zero
point or 2nd, 3rd, or 4th zero point first – depending on the positions of the cutting
tool and fixture, and on the position of the workpiece zero point – this may result
in interference with the workpiece, which will cause damage to the machine.
2. When using the G28 and G30 commands to return the Z-axis from its current
position to the zero point or the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th zero point, designate "G91 G28
Z0;", "G91 G30 Z0;" or "G91 G30 P3(P4) Z0;". If you designate "G90 G28 Z0;",
"G90 G30 Z0;" or "G90 G30 P3(P4) Z0;", the machine zero point will be
approached via the workpiece zero point, or the 2nd, 3rd or 4th zero point, and –
depending on the positions of the cutting tool and fixture and the workpiece zero
point – this may result in interference with the workpiece, which will cause
3. When using the stored stroke limit function, always execute a machine zero
return operation after switching the power ON, otherwise the function will not be
valid. If the machine is operated in this condition it will not stop even if the cutting
tool enters the prohibited area, and this could cause damage to the machine.
(Stored stroke limit specification)
NOTE
1. When specifying G codes in a block, they must be placed before the addresses
(other than G and M) which are executed under the mode they establish. If a G code
is specified after addresses for which it establishes the mode of processing, the
mode established by it is not valid to these addresses.
2. When executing a dwell using the G04 command, if the cutting tool is kept in contact
with the workpiece at a position such as the bottom of a groove for a long time it will
shorten the life of the tool nose as well as adversely affecting machining accuracy.
The dwell period should be the time it takes for the spindle to rotate approximately
one turn.
SO-MC-A9E/P
7 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE HOLE MACHINING CANNED

CYCLE
The cautions that relate to the hole machining canned cycle (G73 - G89) are presented below.
Observe these cautions.
WARNING When the machine is stopped during a hole machining canned cycle by
executing an emergency stop or pressing the reset key, the hole
machining mode is cancelled and the hole machining data is cleared. If
you restart machining without due care the machine could move in an
unexpected manner, causing accidents involving serious injuries or
CAUTION 1. A tapper is used in the tapping cycle called by G74 or G84. When a tapper is
used, the return movement from the bottom of the machine hole to the point R
level is executed with the tapper extended. Therefore, the point R level must be
selected so that the extended tapper will be completely clear of the machined
hole when the Z-axis reaches the point R level, otherwise the cutting tool may
collide or interfere with the workpiece on moving to the next machining position,
and this will cause damage to the machine.
2. When the emergency stop button or reset key has been pressed to stop the
machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the axes after checking the
workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes without
due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each other,
and this could cause damage to the machine.
3. When using the fine boring cycle called by G76 or the back boring cycle called by
G87, mount a boring bit at the position opposite the boring bar shift direction. If
the boring bit is mounted at the position that coincides with the boring bar shift
direction, the boring bit or boring bar will collide or interfere with the workpiece
when the program is executed and this will cause damage to the machine. It may
also break the boring bit.
4. In the manual boring cycle called by G88 (with manual withdrawal), any manual
operation may be performed after the spindle has stopped rotating at the bottom
of the hole. However, before changing from manual to another operation mode,
the cutting tool must be positioned outside the machined hole. If positioning to
the next machining position is carried out before the cutting tool has been
extracted from the machined hole, the cutting tool will strike the workpiece,
causing damage to the machine.
SO-MC-A9E/P
8 CAUTIONS RELATING TO M CODES
The cautions that relate to M codes (also called "miscellaneous codes") are given below. Observe
these cautions during programming.
CAUTION 1. Do not stop the spindle by specifying the M05 command while the cutting tool is
in contact with the workpiece. This could cause damage to the cutting tool.
2. Start the spindle by executing either the M03 or M04 command before the cutting
tool comes into contact with the workpiece. (Does not apply in the case of the
rigid tapping cycle.) If the cutting tool is brought into contact with the workpiece
while it is not rotating, it could be damaged.
3. When the automatic door is closed by specifying the M83 command, make sure
that your fingers, etc., do not get caught in the door and that there are no
obstacles that will prevent the door from closing. If your fingers are caught in the
door, you could be injured.
9 CAUTIONS RELATING TO TOOL CHANGES
The cautions that relate to tool changes are presented below. Observe these cautions.
WARNING If the tool change method is the technical memory random method, the
ATC operation is different for tool changes involving tools with the same
diameter and tool changes involving tools with different diameters. In the
case of tool changes for tools with different diameters the ATC operation
is performed twice. Take due care when changing tools with different
diameters in the MDI mode. If do not exercise sufficient caution and get
too close to the moving parts of the ATC you may be trapped by them and
seriously injured.
CAUTION 1. When mounting tools, check the restrictions on tools thoroughly and make sure
that the arrangement of tools will not cause interference at tool changes. If you
fail to observe the restrictions on tools, tools may interfere with each other when
tool changes are performed, and this will cause damage to the machine.
2. With the ATC of technical memory random method, make sure to set the pots at
both sides of the pot where a large-diameter tool that requires an empty pot at
both sides. If a tool change cycle is carried out with a tool stored in the pot next
to the large-diameter tool pot, an interference occurs between the large-diameter
tool and the tool stored in the pot, causing damage to the machine
SO-MC-A9E/P
FOREWORD
Machining workpieces in a machining center requires programs.

This manual describes the items that are required to create programs. An overview of each
chapter is given below.
A: BEFORE PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the basics for creating a program. It is written for beginners who might
be creating a program for the first time.
B: G FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the G functions. The G codes are also called the preparatory
functions. The NC determines the machining method and axis control mode for each block
according to the specified G code.
C: M FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the M functions. The M codes are also called the miscellaneous
functions. In addition to serving in auxiliary roles when used with G codes, M codes are used
to suspend program execution, discharge or stop coolant, etc.
This chapter describes hole machining canned cycle function. It specifies hole machining
cycle using commands in one block including a G function, which usually requires several
blocks. Explanation is also given on pattern cycles that simplify programming when executing
a hole machining cycle at positions which can be defined by a specific pattern as well as a
circle or frame cutting.
E: CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
This chapter describes cutter radius offset function. Cutter radius offset means the shift of the
tool path by the radius amount to the right or left from the programmed path. This function is
mainly used for pocket cutting or contouring with the end mill.
F: T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the T, S, and F functions. The T function calls the tool. The S function
specifies the spindle speed. The F function specifies the feedrate of the cutting tool.
G: D AND H FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes D and H functions both of which specify an offset number. D function
specifies a tool offset number used for the cutter radius offset function and tool position offset
and H function specifies a tool offset number used for the tool length offset function.
H: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (OPTION)
This chapter describes the tool life management function. The tool life management function
automatically selects an available tool in a registered tool group if the tool called in the same
group has been used to the preset life.
I: B FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the B function which controls the rotation of the table.
J: A FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the A function which specifies the tilting angle of the table.
K: EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
This chapter describes procedures for creating actual programs.
Please read this Programming Manual carefully. The manual is written to help you operate your
machining center more effectively.
BEFORE READING THIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL
To machine a workpiece in a machining center, a program must be created. This manual

describes the basic information to be understood before starting programming and several
example programs. When reading this manual, always remember the following points.
Also please note that the programs and portions of programs given in this manual are only
examples that help readers understand the explanation easier. Therefore, the programs in this
manual are not always applicable to actual production. Programming method and numeric values
in a program such as machining conditions must be determined meeting actual machine operating
environment including the workpiece material and shape.
WARNING 1. The programmer is requested to read this manual carefully and

observe the cautions it contains when creating programs, so as to
ensure the safety of the operator during operation. If the cautions in
this manual are ignored when creating a program, the machine may
operate in an unexpected manner when the program is run, causing
2. Explanation for programs will include the discussion on parameters.
The parameters are set on shipment in accordance with the machine
specifications; do not change them without first consulting Mori
Seiki. If the parameters are changed without consultation, the
machine may operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents
CAUTION 1. There are two methods for specifying the coordinate values; an absolute
command and an incremental command. In this manual, the absolute command
is usually being described. Unless otherwise stated, the program can also be
created using incremental commands. When a specified method using
incremental commands is different from one using absolute commands, or if
either an absolute or an incremental command cannot be used, some cautionary
notes will be described at that point.
For absolute commands and incremental commands, refer to pages A-25 (9)
and I-4 (2).
2. The illustrations of cutting tools in this manual may not indicate the correct setting
orientation, since this will differ according to the machine model.
Make sure the correct relationship between the cutting tool mounting position and
the workpiece (spindle) rotation direction when writing a program.
3. With G and M codes, two types of formats such as F16 format and F15 format are
available. The programming method varies between these two formats for some
of the G and M codes and such differences are explained in the related items in
this manual. Pay attention to the difference when creating a program.
Before shipping the machine, the format is set to the F16 format.
4. Please note that all of the functions and optional devices/equipment explained in
this manual are not always available with the delivered machine.
Retrofitting of such functions and optional devices/equipment is not always
possible. For details, contact Mori Seiki.
CHAPTER A
BEFORE PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the basic considerations for creating a program.

CONTENTS
A : BEFORE PROGRAMMING
1 WHAT IS A PROGRAM?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
2 WHAT IS REQUIRED OF PROGRAMMERS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
3 WHAT IS "CREATING A PROGRAM"? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
4 INPUTTING THE PROGRAM TO THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
5 FLOW UNTIL THE PRODUCT IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
5-1 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

5-2 Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
6 TERMS FOR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
6-1 Program Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

6-2 Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
6-3 Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
6-4 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
6-5 Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
6-6 Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
6-7 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
6-8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
7 AXIS CONTROL AND DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
7-1 Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

7-1-1 MH Series (Includes U-axis Control Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
7-1-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
7-1-3 ULTIMILL H3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
7-1-4 HVM630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
7-1-5 AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
7-2 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

7-2-1 MH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
7-2-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
7-2-3 ULTIMILL H3000, HVM630, AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

8 WORKPIECE ZERO POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
9 SPECIFYING THE DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
9-1 Absolute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

9-2 Incremental Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
9-3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
10 SPECIFYING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
11 FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
12 BASIC PATTERN OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
13 CAUTIONS FOR CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
13-1 Program Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32

13-2 Space between the Words in the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
13-3 Signs and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
13-4 Inputting a Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
BEFORE PROGRAMMING A-1
1 WHAT IS A PROGRAM?
What do you think of when you hear the term "program"?

Do you think of a program for a sporting event, an
educational exercise, or for operating a computer?
Generally speaking, a program is an instructional
statement that contains the contents of plan or is written
to work in conformity with certain rules.
A program is required to operate an NC machine tool.
All operations of the machine, including "spindle rotation",

O0001 ; "tool movement", or "coolant discharge" can be controlled
N1 ; by a program.
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0 ; A good program is essential for the operation of the NC
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2 ; machine tools. Programs are specified by inputting an
M03 ; alphabet and the numerals which succeed it.
G01 Z0 F2000 ; A part of program is shown below.
X–160.0 F211 ; The explanation given below discusses the items
. necessary for writing such programs. Please read this
. manual carefully for creating programs.
.
The process to write or create a program is called
"programming".
A-2 BEFORE PROGRAMMING
2 WHAT IS REQUIRED OF PROGRAMMERS?
Programmers must have a knowledge of machining. They should write programs based on this
knowledge, and also observe the points listed below, to ensure accurate, efficient and safe
operation.
Programmers must:
1. Develop a knowledge of the theory of cutting.
2. Acquire a knowledge of workpiece holding tools (fixtures) in order to determine the
machining method that ensures safe and accurate operation.
3. Determine the appropriate cutting tools by taking into consideration the workpiece shape,
material, spindle speed, feedrate, depth of cut, and width of cut to prevent problems which
might occur during machining.
4. Understand the machining performance of the machine to be used.
5. Understand the safety devices and interlock functions featured by the machine to be used.
6. Become familiar with the functions related to programming.
3 WHAT IS "CREATING A PROGRAM"?
What kind of actions are required to create a program?

1) Checking a drawing to determine the machining
required.
The drawing must be checked carefully to know

what is required.
2) Examine the section to be machined, and determine

the fixtures and tools that need to be used.
Some people start programming immediately, as
soon as they see drawing. This kind of impatience
can lead to unproductive and very dangerous
operation of the machine.
3) Determine the machining processes required based
Process Description Tool No. on the information and dimensions given in the
1 Facing 02 drawing.
2 Drilling 03 Machining process: facing in the first process,

drilling in the second process.
4) To create the machining process, first write down

O0001 ;
the program required as a combination of letters
N1 ;
and numerals on paper.
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0 ;
5) After a program has been created, carefully check
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2 ;
its contents.
M03 ;
G01 Z0 F2000 ;
X–160.0 F211 ;
.
.
.
4 INPUTTING THE PROGRAM TO THE MACHINE
After the program is created, input the program into the

NC memory using the keyboard on the NC operation
panel.
The contents of a program that has been input can be
checked on the screen. Execute the program. The
machine operates according to the program commands.
There may be cases that a decimal point is not input
mistakenly. To avoid such careless mistake, the
programmer should write the numerical data in the
manner as indicated below.
<Example>
1. Z.5 → Z0.5
2. X200. → X200.0
After inputting the program, check the input program
carefully on input error and omission of the data in the
program.
WARNING If the program is to be input to the NC

memory not by the programmer but
by a machine operator, write it clearly
and accurately so that anyone will be
able to read it. If the operator
misreads the program and inputs
incorrect data, the cutting tool or
holder could interfere with the
workpiece or fixture during
machining, causing accidents
involving serious injuries or damage
to the machine.
For the methods required to input a program to

the NC, or to execute the program, refer to the
OPERATION MANUAL separately provided.
5 FLOW UNTIL THE PRODUCT IS COMPLETED
5-1 Flow of Operation
This section describes the flow of operation, including programming. Follow and understand the
flow so that the operation can be performed smoothly.
1) Examine the drawing to determine the machining required
"TOOLING SYSTEM" in the

Production 2) Determine the tools to be used
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
planning and
programming
3) Examine the workpiece clamping method and the fixtures
4) Create the program
"TURNING ON THE POWER" in the OPERATION

5) Turn on the power supply MANUAL
6) Create the program using the conversational

programming function
"PROGRAM EDITING" in the

7) Store the program into memory OPERATION MANUAL
Instruction manual supplied by the NC
unit manufacturer
"OPERATION
8) Mount the tools and workpiece to the machine
PREPARATIONS" in the
OPERATION MANUAL
9) Measure and input the tool length and "OPERATION PREPARATIONS" in

the OPERATION MANUAL
Setup tool diameter offset value
operation
"OPERATION
10) Align the workpiece to set the workpiece zero point
PREPARATIONS" in the
OPERATION MANUAL
11) Set (Input) the workpiece zero point "OPERATION PREPARATIONS" in

the OPERATION MANUAL
"PREPARATION BEFORE
12) Check the program by carrying out dry run operation
STARTING MASS
(Correct the program if necessary) PRODUCTION" in the
OPERATION MANUAL
13) Check the machining condition by carrying out test cutting "PREPARATION
BEFORE
(Correct the program if necessary) STARTING MASS
(Input the tool offset value if necessary) PRODUCTION" in
the OPERATION
MANUAL
14) Machine the workpiece in automatic operation
Mass
production
15) Product is completed
1. Operation steps 4) and 7) above should be skipped when a program is created using
NOTE
the conversational programming function.
2. Operation step 6) above should be skipped when the conversational programming
function is not used for creating a program.
5-2 Check Items
The items to be checked in the course of programming and before starting machine operation are
summarized in the following tables. Check these items to ensure smooth operation.
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Are tolerances readable on the drawing?
2. Are the symbols used to indicate accuracy understandable?
Reading the 3. Are the shape and material of the workpiece blank made clear?
Drawing
Are the processes before and after the processes to be carried out on the
4.
machining center made clear?
5. Are the keys for machining understandable?
6. Is the workpiece zero point determined?
7. Is the use of the workpiece made clear?
8. Have you read all the dimensions and notes on the drawing?
9. Is the drawing kept clean, with no unnecessary information entered on it?
Check
Check Items
Column
Are the order of machining and machining conditions determined in
1.
accordance with the shape and material of the workpiece blank?
2. Are the workpiece clamping method and the fixtures determined correctly?
Order and
Conditions 3. Are the cutting tools selected correctly?
of Machining Are the machining processes appropriate for the shape and material of the
4.
workpiece blank?
5. Is machining free of interference?
6. Is the process chart prepared?
(To the next page)

Check
Check Items
1 2 3 Column
4 5 6 Is the program being written to suit the shape and material of the workpiece
1.
blank?
7 9
2. Are programs created in units of machining processes?
Inputting the 3. Is a decimal point entered in all numerical values?
Program
4. Is the sign (+, −) preceding numerical values correct?
5. Are feed modes (rapid traverse and cutting feed) used correctly?
6. Are approach paths and cutting feed identified?
7. Is all input data checked for correctness?
8. Is the program free of errors caused by lack of concentration?
Check
Check Items
Column
Are the tool holders and the retention knobs cleaned before mounting a
1.
cutting tool?
2. Are cutting tools free of abnormal wear and/or breakage?
Mounting 3. Are tool shape and material proper for intended operation?
the Tools
4. Are cutting tools mounted to the tool holders correctly?
5. Is the tool overhang appropriate?

When mounting a boring bar in the spindle, is the tool tip set in the direction
6.
opposite to the tool shift direction?
7. Are all cutting tools registered?
8. Is tool size code entered correctly?
9. Are tool numbers allocated correctly for different size of cutting tools?
Are cutting tools mounted taking the maximum diameter of the adjacent
10.
tools into consideration?
Are pots adjacent to a large diameter tool assigned for small diameter tools
11.
or left empty?
(To the next page)

Check
Check Items
Column
1. Is the DOOR INTERLOCK key-switch placed in the NORMAL position?
2. Is the operation-panel-side door closed?

Is due consideration given to possible interference during measurement of
Tool Offset 3.
tool offset data?
4. Is centering tool speed proper?
Are the workpiece zero point coordinate values set for the work coordinate
5.
system?
Is the workpiece zero point determined taking the diameter of the centering
6.
tool into consideration?
When measuring the tool length offset data, is the relative coordinate value
7.
set "0" with the Z-axis positioned at the machine zero point?
8. Is the offset direction correct?
9. Is the tool offset number correct?

Are the tool geometry offset data, tool wear offset data, and coordinate
10.
system used for offset identified correctly?
Are the cutter radius offset data and tool length offset data used for offset
11.
identified correctly?
Check
Check Items
Column
3. Is the single block function turned on?

Dry Run
Operation 4. Are the feedrate and spindle speed appropriate for operation?
5. Are the feed modes (rapid traverse and cutting feed) used correctly?
6. Is the tool retraction direction after cutting correct?
7. Is tool movement smooth in the calculated area?
8. Are the tools free of interference with the workpiece and fixtures?
9. Can the machine be stopped immediately when necessary?

After the completion of dry run mode operation, are switches on the
10.
operation panel (dry run, feed override, etc.) set to the proper positions?
(To the next page)

Check
Check Items
Column
Test Cutting 3. Is the single block function turned on?

Are cutting conditions (depth of cut, width of cut, feedrate, and spindle
4.
speed) set properly?
Are the order of machining and machining processes determined in
5.
accordance with the shape and material of the workpiece blank?
6. Are cutting tools selected properly?
7. Is the selection of fixture correct?
8. Is the workpiece clamping method correct?
9. Is the progress of cutting been observed?
10. Are coolant supply volume and direction correct?
11. Are the cutting tools free of interference with the workpiece and fixtures?
12. Are the dimensions measured after the rough cutting process?
13. Are the settings for feed override and rapid traverse override correct?
14. Can the machine be stopped immediately when necessary?
Check
Check Items
Column
1. Is the measuring instrument functioning correctly?
2. Is the choice of measuring instrument correct?
3. Is the measuring order correct?

Measuring
4. Is the measuring method appropriate?
5. Is the area to be measured indicated clearly?
6. Is the area to be measured free of chips and coolant?
8. Is the workpiece cool when the dimensions are measured?
(To the next page)

Check
Check Items
Column

Are all NC functions such as single block functions used to check the
Mass 3.
program turned off?
Production
Is a target work time established on the basis of the machining time for one
4.
workpiece?
5. Is tool wear observed?

6 TERMS FOR PROGRAMMING
This section describes the basic terms that must be understood for creating a program.
6-1 Program Number
Several programs can be stored in the NC memory.

Program numbers are used to keep multiple programs arranged in numerical order. Program
numbers appear at the beginning of a program stored in the memory.
A program number is set by inputting numbers four digits or less after the alphabet "O". Numbers
from 1 to 9999 can be used.
Ex.
O0001; Program number
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0;
M01;
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
M30;
If a program number to be input is already in the memory, that number, and therefore that
NOTE
program cannot be input. Change its number to input the program.
The program number can have less than four significant digits. It can be input using less
than four digits.
For example, even if a program number is input as O1, the screen will automatically
display "O0001".
6-2 Sequence Number
The sequence number is used to search for or call the position that is being executed, or to
facilitate finding the position you want to edit in the program easily.
The sequence number is expressed as a number of five digits or less (1 to 99999), following the
letter "N".
Generally, the sequence numbers are assigned to the part programs for individual cutting tools in
the ascending order in the order the machining processes are executed.
Ex.
O0001;
N1; Sequence number
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0;
M01;
M06;
N2; Sequence number

G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
M30;
1. If a sequence number consists of more than five digits, the five digits from the least
significant position are recognized as the sequence number.
2. The sequence number is not necessarily specified. Also, it is not necessary to input
numbers with five significant digits.
If a program is too long and exceeds the memory capacity, put the sequence
numbers at the beginning of the program for each process, or do not specify these
numbers. This will help save memory capacity.
6-3 Part Program
The part program refers to the program which contains all the information necessary for executing
the cutting process to be carried out by a single cutting tool.
Each process (1st process, 2nd process...) for machining a component contains the part programs
for as many tools as are necessary to complete each process.
Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2;
Part program for the tool No. 1
M01;
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S800 T1;
Part program for the tool No. 2
M01;
M06;
M30;
6-4 Address
An address is expressed using letters of the alphabet.
G01 Z0 F2000;
Address
6-5 Data
The numbers (including the sign and decimal point) that follow the address are called the "data".
G01 Z0 F2000;
Data
In addition, the information (program and other) to be input to the NC for machining the
NOTE
workpiece is also called the data.
Determine the type of data from the explanation of the statement.
6-6 Word
A word is the minimum unit for specifying functions. A word consists of an address and the data.
G01 Z0 F2000;
Word
6-7 Block
A block is the minimum command unit necessary to operate a machine (including the NC unit). It
is also the minimum unit used to create a part program. A block consists of words.
On the program sheet, each one line corresponds to one block.
O0001;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First block
N1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second block
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y100.0; . . . . Third block
Specify the end of a block with [ ; ].

NOTE
6-8 Summary
A program consists of words, a combination of address and data, and of blocks, a combination of
words, as shown below.
O0001; Program number

N1; Sequence number
G 90 G 00 G 54 X 90.0 Y 105.0; 1 block
Address + Data Part program
Word Program
M06; 1 block
N2; Sequence number

G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; 1 block
Part program
M30; 1 block
7 AXIS CONTROL AND DIRECTION
This section describes movement along the controlled axes and its relationship with the program.
Knowing the direction of the controlled axes is essential when creating a program.
7-1 Movement along the Controlled Axes
This section deals with the axis definition and how the axis movement is defined in programming.
7-1-1 MH Series (Includes U-axis Control Specification)
The controlled axes and their directions are determined as follows:
Axis Unit + and − Direction
X Table + direction: Right, viewing the machine from the front

Y Spindle + direction: Up, viewing the machine from the front
head
Z Column + direction: Away from the table, viewing the machine from the front
B Table + direction: Clockwise, viewing the table from the top
U U-axis tool − direction: The direction in which the bore of the hole being machined
holder increases.
Column
+Z
+U
+Y
−U
+B
+X
Spindle head
(Machine Front)
Table
7-1-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000

X Column + direction: Left, viewing the machine from the front
Y Spindle + direction: Up, viewing the machine from the front
head
Z Table + direction: Away from the column, viewing the machine from the front
B Pallet + direction: Clockwise, viewing the pallet from the top
Spindle head
Column
+
+
X −
Pallet Y
−
+
B
−
−
Z
(Machine Front)
Table
7-1-3 ULTIMILL H3000

X Spindle head + direction: Left, viewing the machine from the front
(saddle)
Y Spindle head + direction: Up, viewing the machine from the front
Z Spindle head + direction: Away from the operator, viewing the machine from the front
(column)
7-1-4 HVM630

X Double- + direction: Left, viewing the machine from the front
column
Y Saddle + direction: Up, viewing the machine from the front
Z Ram + direction: Away from the operator, viewing the machine from the front
Spindle
X
−
Pallet
+
+
− Z
Y
+ −
B −
Double-column
Ram
(Machine Front)
7-1-5 AFM2400

X Column + direction: Left, viewing the machine from the front
Y Saddle + direction: Up, viewing the machine from the front
Z Spindle + direction: Away from the operator, viewing the machine from the front
head
A Table + direction: Table front side down, viewing the machine from the front
Saddle
Y
− Z +
− −−
+
A X
−
+
(Machine Front)
Column
Table
Spindle head
7-2 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming
Pay attention to the sign (+, −) which is used to determine the direction of axis (X, Y, Z) movement.
7-2-1 MH Series
+Y
−Z
+X
−X
+B
−B
+Z
Table −Y
(Spindle side)
In response to X-axis movement commands, the table moves. And for Y- and Z-axis movement
commands, the tool (spindle head and column) moves.
Although actual machine movement corresponding to the individual axis movement commands is
as indicated above, it is assumed that the tool moves in the specified axis direction for the purpose
of programming so that calculation for coordinate values is simplified.
Controlled Movement Assumed for

Actual Movement
Axis Programming
X In response to a "X+_" command, the If the tool is assumed to move while
table moves in the left direction, when the table remains stopped, the tool
viewing it from the spindle (left, when moves in the right direction when
viewing the workpiece from the viewing it from the spindle (right, when
column). viewing the workpiece from the
column).
Y In response to a "Y+_" command, the The same direction as actual
spindle head moves up, when viewing movement.
it from the spindle (up, when viewing
the column from the workpiece).
Z In response to a "Z+_" command, the The same direction as actual
column moves away from the table movement.
(away, when viewing the tool rotating
axis from the workpiece).
B In response to a "B+_" command, the The same direction as actual
table rotates in the direction the movement.
right-hand thread advances in the
−Y-axis direction.
As summarized in the table above, if we assume that a tool moves, the positive (+) and negative
(−) directions of the X-axis movement are defined as in the illustration below.
+Y
−Z
−X
+X
+B
−B
+Z
Table −Y
(Spindle side)
7-2-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000
+Y
+Z
−X
+X
+B
−B
−Z
Table −Y
(Spindle side)
In response to Z-axis movement commands, the table moves. And for X- and Y-axes movement
commands, the tool (column and spindle head) moves.
Although actual machine movement corresponding to the individual axis movement commands is
as indicated above, it is assumed that the tool moves in the specified axis direction for the purpose
of programming so that calculation for coordinate values is simplified.
Controlled Movement Assumed for

Actual Movement
Axis Programming
X In response to a "X+_" command, the The same direction as actual
column moves in the right direction, movement.
when viewing it from the spindle (right,
viewing the workpiece from the
column).
Y In response to a "Y+_" command, the The same direction as actual
spindle head moves up, when viewing movement.
it from the spindle (up, when viewing
the workpiece from the column).
Z In response to a "Z+_" command, the If the tool is assumed to move while the
table moves away from the spindle table remains stopped, the tool moves
(away, when viewing the workpiece away from the column when viewing it
from the tool rotating axis). from the spindle (away, when viewing
the cutting tool rotating axis from the
workpiece).
B In response to a "B+_" command, the The same direction as actual
table rotates in the direction the movement.
right-hand thread advances in the
−Y-axis direction.
As summarized in the table above, if we assume that a tool moves, the positive (+) and negative
(−) directions of the Z-axis movement are defined as in the illustration below.
+Y
−Z
−X
+X
+B
−B
+Z
Table −Y
(Spindle side)
7-2-3 ULTIMILL H3000, HVM630, AFM2400
X-axis movement commands move the saddle, Y-axis movement commands the column, and
Z-axis movement commands the spindle head (tool). Although the actual machine movement
corresponding to the individual axis movement commands is as indicated below, it is assumed
that it is the tool that moves in the specified axis direction for the purpose of programming to
simplify the calculation of coordinate values. The actual motion is the same as the programmed
motion.
+Y
−Z
−X
+X
+Z
Table −Y
(Spindle side)
8 WORKPIECE ZERO POINT
When specifying the command "Move the cutting tool to point A.", for example, if there is no
reference point for the specified command, the machine cannot find point A and cannot move.
The reference point established for programming is called the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0, Z0).
In a program, X, Y, and Z coordinate values are specified taking the workpiece zero point for the
reference. Accordingly, when creating the program, the workpiece zero point must be determined.
The workpiece zero point should be taken at a point where programming will be facilitated.
Determine the workpiece zero point taking convenience for programming and setup as well as
required accuracy into consideration. Refer to the examples given as follows.
/
In the drawings used for explanation, the workpiece zero point is expressed as .
<Examples of setting the workpiece zero point>
1) Taking the workpiece zero point at the center allows easy calculation of the coordinate
values of the center of the tapped holes and circular pocket.
Circular pocket
(X0, Y0)
Tapped hole
Z0
2) Because the geometry is symmetrical in reference to the X-axis, taking the workpiece zero
point at the specified position facilitates calculation of the coordinate values.
Y (X0, Y0)
Z0
9 SPECIFYING THE DIMENSIONS
To specify tool movement from the presently located point to the next point (target point), the
following two types of commands can be used.
1. Absolute commands
2. Incremental commands
When writing a program, it is necessary to understand the nature of these two types of dimension
specifying commands.
This section deals with the basic for using the absolute and incremental commands in a program.
9-1 Absolute Commands
Absolute commands define a specific point by the signed distance from the workpiece zero point
(X0, Y0, Z0).
The axis movement commands in the G90 mode are all executed as the absolute
commands.
Specifying the absolute commands (1)

Ex.
To express the coordinate values point 1 and point 2 in the X-Y plane using absolute commands.
+Y G90 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

X−20.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 20 1. The positive (+) sign may be omitted. The
(−20.0, 20.0) 1
10
negative (−) sign cannot be omitted.
(10.0, 10.0)
X+10.0 → X10.0
−X +X
−30 −20 −10 10 20 30 Y+10.0 → Y10.0
−10
2. The values specified as ( , ) in the

−20
illustration left indicate the coordinate values
(X, Y).
−Y
Specifying the absolute commands (2)

Ex.
To express the positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the X-Y-Z plane using absolute commands.
50 +Y
100 100
1 4
1
175
Workpiece
500
+X
zero point
(X0, Y0, Z0)
175
2 3
3
2
300
G90 X−100.0 Y175.0 Z50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

(G90) (X−100.0) Y−175.0 (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . 2
(G90) X100.0 (Y−175.0) (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . . 3
(G90) (X100.0) Y175.0 (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Since the commands in ( ) are the same as in the previous block, they can be omitted.
9-2 Incremental Commands
Incremental commands define relative position on a given coordinate system by specifying the
movement distance from the present position. The positive sign indicates that the position to be
defined is in the positive direction from the present position.
/
The axis movement commands in the G91 mode are all executed as the incremental
commands.
Specifying the incremental commands (1)

Ex.
To express tool movement from point 1 to point 2 in the X-Y plane using incremental commands.
+Y G90 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

G91 X−30.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 20
1. The positive (+) sign may be omitted. The
(−20.0, 20.0) 1
10 negative (−) sign cannot be omitted.
(10.0, 10.0)
X+30.0 → X30.0
−X +X
−30 −20 −10 10 20 30
Y+10.0 → Y10.0
−10
2. The values specified as ( , ) in the

−20
illustration left indicate the coordinate values
(X, Y).
−Y
Specifying the incremental commands (2)

Ex.
To express the positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the X-Y-Z plane using incremental commands.
50 +Y
100 100
1 4
1
175
Workpiece
500
+X
zero point
(X0, Y0, Z0)
175
2 3
3
2
300
G90 X−100.0 Y175.0 Z50.0; . . . . . . . . . 1

G91 (X0) Y−350.0 (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
(G91) X200.0 (Y0) (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(G91) (X0) Y350.0 (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Since the commands in ( ) are the same as in the previous block, they can be omitted.
9-3 Summary
Differences between absolute programming and incremental programming are summarized

below.
Absolute Programming Incremental Programming

Address Characters G90 (X_ ; , Y_ ; , Z_ ;) G91 (X_ ; , Y_ ; , Z_ ;)
Meaning of the Sign The area where the specified The direction in which the cutting
(+/−) point exists. tool advances.
Meaning of the Coordinate values Distance of tool movement
Numerical Values (distance from the workpiece
zero point)
Reference Point of Workpiece zero point (X0, Y0, Actual tool position
Commands Z0)
Generally, a program is written using absolute commands.

Incremental commands are usually used when programming a machining which is
repeated in fixed pitches.
10 SPECIFYING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS
The cutting conditions that are set when creating a

program have a great influence on the safety, the
Depth Cutting feedrate
of cut machining efficiency and accuracy. These conditions
must be checked carefully.
Y The following four cutting conditions are necessary for
X machining the workpiece.
Cutting
width
Z
Spindle speed
1. Spindle speed (min−1)

The spindle speed is specified directly following address S (S function).
Spindle speed 400 min−1

COMMAND
S400; . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTE
min−1 means "rpm".
2. Cutting feedrate (mm/min)

Feedrate is specified directly following address F (F function).
COMMAND
F100; . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate per minute, 100 mm/min
3. Depth of cut
There is no special function used to specify the depth of cut. Depth of cut is specified using
tool movement along the Z-axis.
With a hole machining canned cycle, depth of cut can be specified using an address.
NOTE
For details of the hole machining canned cycle, refer to CHAPTER D "HOLE
MACHINING CANNED CYCLE".
4. Cutting width
There is no special function to specify width of cut. Specify it with movement along X- or
Y-axis.
11 FUNCTIONS
A program is created using alphabets which show functions, and numerical values. The G, M, S,
F, T, D, H, and B functions represent the main functions.
Details of each function are described in Chapter B and succeeding chapters.
The following table gives an overview of functions:
Code Functions
Specifies the machining method in each block of a program or

movement along an axis. Proceeding from this command, the NC
G code prepares for movement in each block. For this reason, the G function is
called a preparatory function.
Example: G00 . . . . . . . . Rapid traverse of axes
Is called the miscellaneous function and works as the function to
support the functions called by the G code.
It specifies ON/OFF control of machine operations, including program
M code
stop, coolant discharge or stop, and spindle rotation or stop etc.
Example: M08. . . . . . . . Coolant discharge
M09. . . . . . . . Coolant stop
Specifies the spindle speed.
S code
Example: S400 . . . . . . . Spindle speed: 400 min−1
Specifies the feedrate of the tool.
F code
Example: F100 . . . . . . . Feedrate of tool: 100 mm/min
Specifies the tool number.
T code
Example: T1 . . . . . . . . . Call tool No. 1 at tool change position
Specifies the cutter radius offset number.
D code Example: D1 . . . . . . . . . Cutter radius offset of No. 1 on the TOOL
OFFSET screen.
Specifies the tool length offset number.
H code Example: H1 . . . . . . . . . Tool length offset of No. 1 on the TOOL
OFFSET screen.
Specifies the rotation angle of the table.
B code
Example: B90.0 . . . . . . The table rotates 90°.
12 BASIC PATTERN OF PROGRAM
When creating a part program for each tool (face mill, end mill, etc.), the following basic patterns
are used.
O0001; Program number (This is specified only once at the beginning of all programs.)
N1; Sequence number (This is specified at the beginning of a part program.)
G90 G00 G54 (to G59) X_ Y_ ; Specifies positioning at X_ Y_ at a rapid traverse rate; X_ and Y_
are given in absolute values.
The workpiece zero point is determined by G54 (to

G59).
G43 Z_ H_ S_ T_ (M08); Specifies positioning of Z-axis and calls the next tool to the tool
change position. The spindle speed command and coolant
supply ON command are also specified.
M08 is not necessary when coolant is not used.
NOTE
*
M03; Starts spindle rotation in the normal direction.
(Machining program)
G00 Z_ (M09); Specifies retraction from the cutting area and stops coolant
supply.
M09 is not specified if coolant is not used.
NOTE
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; Returns X- and Y-axes to the second zero point to carry out tool
change and stops spindle rotation.
Tool change position varies depending on machine
NOTE models.
Page B-39 (11)
M01; Specifies optional stop.

M06; Executes tool change.
The part program same as *
Part programs are written for each tool.

M01; Optional stop
M06; Tool change
The part program same as *
M30; End of program; program is rewound.

13 CAUTIONS FOR CREATING A PROGRAM
13-1 Program Number
This manual describes all program numbers in a four digit number. However, it is not necessary to
write or enter a program number in a four digit number. A program number specified in less than
four digit number is recognized and displayed in a four digit number after it is input to the NC. If
"O1" is entered, for example, it is recognized and displayed as "O0001".
An entry of a program number of five or more digits is not permitted.

NOTE
13-2 Space between the Words in the Program
In this manual, a program is described in the manner as indicated below.

In line 1, for example, a space is placed between "G00"
O0001 ; and "G90". When entering a program to the NC, the
N1 ; word-to-word space may not be inserted.
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0 ; . . . . . . 1
When a program is input to the NC memory, a
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2 ;
space is automatically inserted between word and
word.
Space
13-3 Signs and Symbols
A program is expressed in a combination of alphabetic letters, positive/negative (+/−) signs, and

numbers containing a decimal point. In addition to these, the end of block symbol ";" and the block
delete symbol "/" are used.
Block delete function:

NOTE
If the block delete function is on, the commands beginning with the slash "/" are ignored up
to the end of block code ";" in the same block. The program is continuously executed from
the block not containing the slash.
If the block delete function is off, all blocks (even those preceded by a slash) are executed.
The following signs and symbols are also used.

"," "*" "[ ]" "( )" "#"
Note that symbol "@" cannot be used.
13-4 Inputting a Decimal Point
For an NC, it is possible to use a decimal point to enter numerical values. A decimal point can be
used to express the numerical values that have the unit of "distance", "angle", "time", or "speed".
The addresses which allow the use of a decimal point are indicated below.
Distance and angle: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R
Time: X
Cutting feedrate: F
WARNING When inputting a value for the address for which a decimal point can be
used, make sure that the decimal point is used correctly. If a decimal
point is not specified by mistake, the turret will move in an unexpected
direction, causing injuries and machine damage.
"mm" setting (specified by G21)
X1.0 . . . . . . X1 mm
X1. . . . . . . . X0.001 mm
(if a decimal point is not entered, it is assumed that the
value is specified in the unit of least input increment.)
"inch" setting (specified by G20)
X1.0 . . . . . . X1 inch
X1. . . . . . . . X0.0001 inch
(if a decimal point is not entered, it is assumed that the
value is specified in the unit of least input increment.)
1. There are limits in the usable units depending on addresses. Setting units are "mm",
NOTE
"inch", "degree" and "second".
X15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . X15 mm or X15 inches
G04 X1.0 . . . . . . . . . . Dwell for 1 second
F10.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm/rev, 10 mm/min, 10 inch/rev, or 10 inch/min
2. In the case of a dwell command, a decimal point can be used when address X is
used. However, it is not allowed to use a decimal point if address P is used since
address P is also used to specify a sequence number.
1. To call for dwell for 1 hour, specify as

G04 X3600.0;
(1 hour = 3600 seconds)
2. In a program, or in a block, it is allowed to specify the commands with and without a
decimal point.
X1000 Z23.7;
X10.0 Z22359;
CHAPTER B
G FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the G functions.

Among the G codes explained in this chapter, those which are used frequently in
programming are covered in the section from 2 "G90, G91 DIMENSIONING MODES
(ABSOLUTE COMMANDS AND INCREMENTAL COMMANDS)" to 13 "G40, G41, G42
CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET".
Since explanation on the G codes given in the sections from 14 "G02, G03 CUTTING
HELIX (HELICAL INTERPOLATION)" to 32 "G08 LOOK AHEAD CONTROL" include
optional functions, these sections should be referred to when such functions are used.
1. Whether the G codes explained in this chapter are standard or optional,

refer to the G code lists given in 1 "G CODE LIST".
2. For the G codes not explained in this chapter, refer to the instruction
manual supplied by the NC unit manufacturer.
CONTENTS
B : G FUNCTIONS
1 G CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
2 G90, G91 DIMENSIONING MODES

(ABSOLUTE COMMANDS AND INCREMENTAL COMMANDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
3 G54 - G59 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
3-1 Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Workpiece End Face) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
3-2 Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Center of Table Rotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
4 G10 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

BY PROGRAMMED COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
5 G43, G44, G49 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
5-1 Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

5-2 Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
6 G17, G18, G19 SELECTING PLANE FOR MACHINING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
7 G00 POSITIONING THE TOOL AT A RAPID TRAVERSE RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
8 G01 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A STRAIGHT PATH

AT A CUTTING FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
9 G02, G03 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A CIRCULAR ARC

AT A CUTTING FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
10 G04 SUSPENDING PROGRAM EXECUTION (DWELL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
11 G28, G30 RETURN THE AXES TO THE MACHINE ZERO POINT,

OR SECOND (THIRD OR FOURTH) ZERO POINT AUTOMATICALLY. . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
12 G73 - G89 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
13 G40, G41, G42 CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
14 G02, G03 CUTTING HELIX (HELICAL INTERPOLATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
15 G02.2, G03.2 CUTTING SPIRAL (INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55
16 G09 ACCURATELY POSITIONING

AT THE END POINT OF LINEAR MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
17 G10 CHANGING THE TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT

WITH PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62
18 G22, G23 SETTING THE TOOL ENTRY INHIBITED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63
19 G31 SKIP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-66

20 G45 - G48 TOOL POSITION OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
21 G50, G51 REDUCING AND ENLARGING THE SHAPE (SCALING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-73
22 G50, G51 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-76
23 G50.1, G51.1 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80
24 G52 SETTING THE LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
25 G53 SELECTING THE MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
26 G54, G54.1 SETTING THE ADDITIONAL WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . B-86
27 G60 UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89
28 G65, G66, G66.1, G67 USING MACRO PROGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
29 G68, G69 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
30 G72.1 COPY BY ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105
31 G72.2 COPY BY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
32 G08 LOOK AHEAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
APPENDIX 1 CHANGING OFFSET BY SWITCHING

PRE-LOAD LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-1
1-1 Pre-load Level Switching and Changing Offset by S Codes . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-2
1-2 Changing the Pre-load Level Switching Offset by G10 . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-3
1-3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-4
G FUNCTIONS B-1
1 G CODE LIST
G codes are also called preparatory functions. The G codes consisting of the address G
and a numerical value that follows address G define the machining method and the axis
movement mode in a specified block. The NC establishes the control mode in response to
the specified G code.
The numerical value following address G defines the commands written in that block.
Depending on how the G codes remain valid, they are classified into the following two types:
Type Meaning
One-shot G code The G code is valid only in the specified block.
(G codes in group 00,
excluding G10 and G11)
Modal G code The G code remains valid until another G code in the
(G codes in groups other same group is specified.
than group 00)
For example, G00 and G01 are both modal codes, that is, they are G codes in the group
other than group 00.
G01 X_ Y_ ;
X_ ; G01 is valid in this range.
Y_ ;
G00 X_ Y_ ;
1. When specifying G codes in a block, they must be placed before the addresses
NOTE
(other than G and M) which are executed under the mode they establish. If a
G code is specified after addresses for which it establishes the mode of
processing, the mode established by it is not valid to these addresses.
2. More than one G code, each belonging to a different G code group, may be specified
in the same block.
3. If more than one G code, belonging to the same group, are specified in a block, the
one specified later is valid.
4. If a G code not listed in the G code table or a G code for which the
corresponding option is not selected is specified, an alarm message (No. 010)
is displayed on the screen.
5. The NC establishes the G code modes, identified by the symbol, when the power
is turned on.
6. For rigid tapping, specify "M29 S_" to the block just before the block containing G84
or G74.
7. *1 Optional for MH series (includes U-axis control specification).

*2 Standard for MH series (includes U-axis control specification).
*3
Standard for U-axis control specification.
B-2 G FUNCTIONS
: Standard : Option
Code Group Function Division
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation

Circular interpolation/helical interpolation/spiral interpolation/
G02 / / /
conical interpolation, CW (clockwise)
G02.2 Involute interpolation, CW (clockwise)
01
G02.3 Exponential interpolation, CW (clockwise)
Circular interpolation/helical interpolation/spiral interpolation/
G03 / / /
conical interpolation, CCW (counterclockwise)
G03.2 Involute interpolation, CCW (counterclockwise)
G03.3 Exponential interpolation, CCW (counterclockwise)
G04 Dwell/Exact stop
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation

G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107)
G08 Look ahead control *1
00
G09 Exact stop
G10 Data setting
G10.6 Tool retraction data
G11 Data setting mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode

25
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
G15 Polar coordinate command cancel

17
G16 Polar coordinate command
G17 XpYp plane Xp: X-axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane Yp: Y-axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane Zp: Z-axis or its parallel axis
G20 Data input in inch system

06
G21 Data input in metric system
G22 Stored stroke check function ON

04
G23 Stored stroke check function OFF
G25 Spindle speed variation detection OFF

24
G26 Spindle speed variation detection ON
G FUNCTIONS B-3
: Standard : Option
G27 Zero return check
G28 Automatic zero return
G29 Return from zero point

00
G30 Second/third, fourth zero return *2
/
G30.1 Floating zero return
G31 Skip function
G33 01 Thread cutting *3
G40 Cutter radius offset cancel
G41 07 Cutter radius offset, left
G42 Cutter radius offset, right

G40.1
Normal direction control cancel mode
(G150)
G41.1
19 Normal direction control ON (left side)
(G151)
G42.1
Normal direction control ON (right side)
(G152)
G43 Tool length offset, +
08
G44 Tool length offset, −
G45 Tool position offset, increase
G46 Tool position offset, decrease

00
G47 Tool position offset, double-increase
G48 Tool position offset, double-decrease
G49 08 Tool length offset cancel
G50 Scaling cancel

11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel

22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting

00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
B-4 G FUNCTIONS
: Standard : Option

Work coordinate system 1 selection/Additional work coordinate system
G54 /
selection
G54.1 Additional work coordinate system selection
G55 Work coordinate system 2 selection
G56 14 Work coordinate system 3 selection
G60 00 Uni-directional approach
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override mode

15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode (exact stop check mode)
G65 00 Macro call

Macro modal call
G66
(call after execution of axis movement commands)
G66.1 12 Macro modal call (call in each block)
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 Coordinate rotation/3D coordinate conversion

16
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel/3D coordinate conversion cancel
G72.1 Copy-rotation
00
G72.2 Copy-shift
G FUNCTIONS B-5
: Standard : Option
G73 High-speed deep hole drilling cycle
G74 Reverse tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G80 Hole machining canned cycle cancel
G81 Spot drilling cycle
G82 Counter boring cycle

Hole machining canned
G83 09 Deep hole drilling cycle
cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute command

03
G91 Incremental command
G92 Work coordinate system change/Maximum spindle speed setting *3

/
00
G92.1 Work coordinate system preset
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 05 Feed per minute mode
G95 Feed per revolution mode *3
G96 Constant surface speed control *3

13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel *3
G98 Initial point level return (hole machining canned cycle)

10
G99 Point R level return (hole machining canned cycle)
B-6 G FUNCTIONS
2 G90, G91 DIMENSIONING MODES (ABSOLUTE COMMANDS

AND INCREMENTAL COMMANDS)
To specify tool movement from the presently located point to the next point (target point), the
following two types of commands can be used.
1. Absolute command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G90
2. Incremental command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G91
<Absolute command>
Absolute commands define a specific point by the signed distance from the workpiece zero point
(X0, Y0, Z0).
The axis movement commands in the G90 mode are all executed as the absolute
commands.
<Incremental command>
Incremental commands define relative position on a given coordinate system by specifying the
movement distance from the present position. The positive sign indicates that the position to be
defined is in the positive direction from the present position.
The axis movement commands in the G91 mode are all executed as the incremental
commands.
COMMAND 1. Absolute command

G90 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
2. Incremental command
G91 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G90 . . . . . . . . Calls the absolute dimensioning mode.
• G91 . . . . . . . . Calls the incremental dimensioning mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . (G90): Specifies direction and distance of the target point
referenced to the workpiece zero point.
(G91): Specifies the movement distance to the target point
from the preceding position.
Once the G90 command is specified, it remains valid unless the G91 command is
NOTE
specified next. To the contrary, once the G91 command is specified, it remains valid
unless the G90 command is specified next.
Such G codes are called modal G code.
For the G code groups, refer to page B-1 (1).
The positive (+) sign may be omitted. The negative (−) sign cannot be omitted.
X+10.0 → X10.0
Y+10.0 → Y10.0
G FUNCTIONS B-7
Programming using G90 and G91 (1)

Ex.
The program to move the cutting tool along path 1 → 2 on the X- and Y-axes.
+Y
<Absolute command>
G90 G00 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 20 X−20.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
(−20.0, 20.0) 1
10 <Incremental command>
(10.0, 10.0)
−X +X G90 G00 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
−30 −20 −10 10 20 30
−10 G91 X−30.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
−20
The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration
left indicate the coordinate values (X, Y).
−Y

Ex.
The program to move the cutting tool along path 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 on the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
50 +Y
100 100
1 4
1
175
Workpiece
500
zero point +X
(X0, Y0, Z0)

175
2 3
3
2
300
B-8 G FUNCTIONS
<Absolute command>
G90 G00 X−100.0 Y175.0 Z50.0; . . . . . 1

(X−100.0) Y−175.0 (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . 2
X100.0 (Y−175.0) (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . . 3
(X100.0) Y175.0 (Z50.0); . . . . . . . . . . . 4
<Incremental command>
G90 G00 X−100.0 Y175.0 Z50.0; . . . . . 1

G91 (X0) Y−350.0 (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X200.0 (Y0) (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(X0) Y350.0 (Z0); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Since the commands given in ( ) call no axis movement, they can be omitted.

Ex.
The program to move the cutting tool along path 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 on the X- and Y-axes, using
both absolute and incremental commands.
+Y G90 G00 X10.0 Y10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X−20.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 20 G91 X5.0 Y−30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(−20.0, 20.0) 1
10 X25.0 Y−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
(10.0, 10.0)
−X +X G90 X20.0 Y−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
−30 −20 −10 10 20 30
−10 5 (20.0, −10.0)
3 The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration
(−15.0, −10.0)
−20 4 (10.0, −20.0) left indicate the coordinate values (X, Y).
−Y
G FUNCTIONS B-9
3 G54 - G59 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
The operation to "set a work coordinate system" means the operation by which the NC recognizes
the location of the workpiece zero point which is determined arbitrarily.
By setting six work coordinate systems beforehand, call one of these coordinate systems by
executing the corresponding G code.
There are two methods of setting the workpiece zero point.
• Setting the workpiece zero point at the end face of the workpiece
Page B-10 (3-1)
• Setting the workpiece zero point at the center of table rotation.

Page B-13 (3-2)
For the procedure used for setting the workpiece zero point, refer to the OPERATION
MANUAL.
COMMAND
(G90) G54(G55, G56, G57, G58, G59) X_ Y_ ;
• G90 . . . . . . . . Calls the absolute commands.
• G54 to G59. . . Selects a work coordinate system.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value of each axis used for positioning
a cutting tool in the selected work coordinate system. (workpiece
zero point)
1. The G54 work coordinate system is selected when the power is turned on.
NOTE
2. If the number of work coordinate systems called by G54 to G59 is not sufficient for
intended operation, use the G10 (changing work coordinate system), G52 (setting
local coordinate system) or G54, G54.1 (setting additional work coordinate system)
<option> command to define more number of work coordinate systems.
For G10, refer to page B-16 (4).
For G52, refer to page B-83 (24).
For G54, G54.1, refer to page B-86 (26).
1. A work coordinate system is defined in the manner to offset the machine coordinate
system. Therefore, as it is not necessary to input the measured values to the
program, use of a work coordinate system makes programming easier.
2. Because there are six coordinate systems from G54 to G59, the setting of these
coordinate system is convenient for machining that requires plural coordinate
systems in such as multiple workpiece setup.
B-10 G FUNCTIONS
3-1 Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Workpiece End Face)
The procedure for setting the workpiece zero point at the end face of the workpiece is described
below.
Concerning the X- and Y-axes, set the distance from the machine zero point of the X- and Y-axes
to the end face of the workpiece (workpiece zero point) on the WORK OFFSET screen in negative
values.
For the Z-axis, set the distance from the spindle gage line to the end face of the workpiece
(workpiece zero point) on the WORK OFFSET screen in a negative value, with the Z-axis returned
to the machine zero point.
When the workpiece zero point is set in this method, dimensions such as depth of a hole
specified on the part drawing can be used in programming since the workpiece zero point
on the Z-axis is set at the end face of the workpiece.
G FUNCTIONS B-11
Programming using G54 to G59 (Workpiece zero point set at the end face of
Ex. workpiece) (1)
Create the program using the G54 command for the workpiece indicated below with the workpiece
zero point set at the end face of the workpiece.
Select a point convenient for calculating the coordinate values for the workpiece zero
point.
+Y
+X
Workpiece zero point for G54

+Z
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) at a rapid
traverse rate in the work coordinate system called by G54
When the G54 command is specified, the

coordinate system having the origin at the
workpiece zero point for G54 is established.
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate
Calling T2 to the tool change position
M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the normal direction at 800 min−1
(S800)
S800 specified in the previous block is used as

the spindle speed command.
G01 Z3.0 F2000;
Z−5.0 F48;
Machining program
B-12 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G54 to G59 (Workpiece zero point set at the end face of
Ex. workpiece) (2)
Create the program using the G54 and G55 commands for the workpiece indicated below with the
workpiece zero point set at the end face of the workpiece.
When two workpieces are mounted on one face of the angle plate, the same positioning is
executed in the two work coordinate systems (G54, G55).
+Y +Y
30 30 30 30
Angle plate
2 1 6 5
20 20
+X 20 20 +X
3 4 7 8
Workpiece zero point for G54 Workpiece zero point for G55
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X30.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
coordinate system called by G54
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
X−30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 2 at a rapid traverse rate
Y−20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 3 at a rapid traverse rate
X30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 4 at a rapid traverse rate
G55 X30.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 5 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
As known from the example program above, it is recommended to set the workpiece zero
point for individual workpieces to simplify programming when multiple workpieces are set.
G FUNCTIONS B-13
3-2 Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Center of Table Rotation)
The procedure for setting the workpiece zero point at the center of table rotation is described
below.
Concerning the X-axis, set a half of X-axis travel on the WORK OFFSET screen in a negative
value.
Concerning the Y-axis, set the distance from the machine zero point of the Y-axis to the end face
of the workpiece (workpiece zero point) on the WORK OFFSET screen in a negative value.
For the Z-axis, set the distance from the spindle gage line to the center of table rotation with the
Z-axis returned to the machine zero point on the WORK OFFSET screen in a negative value.
When the workpiece zero point is set in this method, it is not necessary to specify the work
coordinate system setting G code for each of the workpieces mounted on four faces of the
angle plate, since the workpiece zero point on the Z-axis is set at the center of table
rotation.
Pay attention to the following to use this method for programming:

NOTE
• The center of the angle plate is aligned with the center of table rotation.
• Concerning the Z-axis coordinate value, take into consideration the distance from
the center of table rotation to the end face of the workpiece.
B-14 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G54 to G59 (Workpiece zero point set at the center of table
Ex. rotation) (1)
Create the program using the G54 command for the workpiece indicated below with the workpiece
zero point set at the center of table rotation.
Select a point convenient for calculating the coordinate values for the workpiece zero
point.
+Y
125 100
+Y
+Z +X
Angle plate Workpiece zero

point for G54
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) at a rapid
traverse rate in the work coordinate system called by G54
When the G54 command is specified, the

coordinate system having the origin at the
workpiece zero point for G54 is established.
G43 Z255.0 H1 S800 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z255.0 at a rapid traverse rate
(S800)
S800 specified in the previous block is used as

the spindle speed command.
G01 Z3.0 F2000;

Z−5.0 F48;
Machining program
G FUNCTIONS B-15
Programming using G54 to G59 (Workpiece zero point set at the center of table
Ex. rotation) (2)
Create the program using the G54 and G55 commands for the workpiece indicated below with the
workpiece zero point set at the center of table rotation.
When two workpieces are mounted on one face of the angle plate, the same positioning is
executed in the two work coordinate systems (G54, G55).
+Y
125 100 +Y +Y
30 30 30 30
2 1 6 5
20 20
20 20
+X +X
+Z
3 4 7 8
Angle plate
G54 Angle plate G55
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X30.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
G43 Z255.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G55 X30.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 5 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
As known from the example program above, it is recommended to set the workpiece zero
point for individual workpieces to simplify programming when multiple workpieces are set.
B-16 G FUNCTIONS
4 G10 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM BY

PROGRAMMED COMMAND
It is possible to change the offset data of work coordinate

+Y +Y’
systems (G54 - G59) by a command in a program.
The G10 command is used when setting a work
coordinate system for the individual workpieces mounted
New G54 coordinate
system defined by G10. on an angle plate or jig.
1. When the G10 command is used, it is not

+X’ necessary to set the offset data which was
obtained in setups on the WORK OFFSET
+X screen for each execution of a program
since the work coordinate system offset data
Original G54 coordinate system can be set for X-, Y-, and Z-axes in a
program.
2. The G10 command is always used to
operate the machine without attendance of
an operator at night shift using the pallet
pool or other automation specifications.
COMMAND
G90(G91) G10 L2 P_ X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G90 . . . . . . . . Calls absolute commands.
• G91 . . . . . . . . Calls incremental commands.
• G10 . . . . . . . . Specifies external input of offset amount of work coordinate
system.
• L2 . . . . . . . . . . Specifies work coordinate system offset amount input.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Selects work coordinate systems G54 - G59.
P0 → Work coordinate system shift data common to G54

to G59 (COMMON)
P1 → Work coordinate system shift data of G54
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values (workpiece zero point) used for
positioning in a work coordinate system.
(G90): The specified coordinate values establish the

NOTE
new workpiece zero point.
(G91): The specified coordinate values are added to the
coordinate values of present workpiece zero
point.
G FUNCTIONS B-17
The G10 command updates the distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece
NOTE
zero point which is obtained during setting up. Accordingly, if the zero point of the work
coordinate system is changed by using the G10 command, the commands are executed in
the updated coordinate system.
In a program, if a coordinate system should be established while the present work
coordinate system remains as it is, use a local coordinate system (G52).
For details of the local coordinate system (G52), refer to page B-83 (24).
Programming using G10 L2

Ex.
To execute positioning of a cutting tool at workpiece zero points of 1 to 6.
Among workpiece zero points 1 to 6, since the G54 and G55 commands are used for points 1 and
2, and points 5 and 6, work coordinate system offset data of G54 and G55 work coordinate
systems are input in a program. Offset data for the work coordinate systems G56 and G57 have
been input during setting up.
Machine zero point

+Y
350 100 100 200
120
+Y +Y +Y
G54 G55 G56
1 , 2 , 3
+Z +X +X +X
1 2 3
Angle plate
130
+Y +Y +Y
G57 G54 G55
4 , 5 , 6
+Z +X +X +X
4 5 6
Angle plate
O0001;
N1;
G90 G10 L2 P1 X−400.0 Y−120.0 Z−350.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting the offset data of point 1 for G54 work coordinate
system
G10 L2 P2 X−300.0 Y−120.0 Z−350.0;
system
G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of a cutting tool at workpiece zero point 1 of
G54 at rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G55 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of a cutting tool at workpiece zero point 2 of
B-18 G FUNCTIONS

G90 G10 L2 P1 X−300.0 Y−250.0 Z−350.0;
system
G10 L2 P2 X−200.0 Y−250.0 Z−350.0;
system
G FUNCTIONS B-19
5 G43, G44, G49 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET
The G43 and G44 commands are used to locate the tip of tool at the Z-axis position specified in
the program independent of differences in tool lengths by using the tool length offset function.
There are two methods for setting tool length offset data.
• To set the distance from the spindle gage line to the tool tip (type 1)
Page B-20 (5-1)
• To set the distance from the tool tip to the workpiece zero point with the Z-axis positioned at
the machine zero return point (type 2)
Page B-21 (5-2)
For the procedure for setting the tool length offset data, refer to the OPERATION
MANUAL.
COMMAND
G43 Z_ H_ ;
G49;
• G43 . . . . . . . . Calls the tool length offset mode.
• G49 . . . . . . . . Cancels the tool length offset mode.
• Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value for positioning in the Z-axis
direction.
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the tool offset number to be used.
1. The tool length offset mode is canceled by the H0 command instead of specifying
NOTE
the G49 command.
2. If the G28, G30, G30.1 (option), or the G53 command is specified in the tool length
offset mode, the tool length offset mode is canceled.
If the G44 command is used for tool length offset, the sign for the tool length offset amount
should be reversed from the sign used with the G44 command.
Mori Seiki uses G43 instead of G44.
B-20 G FUNCTIONS
5-1 Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 1)
With type 1, set the distance from the spindle gage line to the tool tip on the TOOL OFFSET
screen in a positive value.
A: Distance from the spindle gage line to the center of
Spindle
gage line
table rotation
B: Tool length (offset data)
B (Type 1) C: Movement distance

D: Distance from the center of table rotation to the
reference face
Offset data = A − (C + D)
A
Distance A is determined by the machine
C model. For this dimension, refer to the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION and PARTS
LIST.
Reference face
D Center of table rotation
Workpiece
Table
When this method is used for setting the tool length offset data, it is not necessary to
measure tool lengths for each kind of workpieces if the workpiece zero point is set at the
end of the workpiece or at the center of table rotation. Usually, this method is used for
setting tool length offset data.
G FUNCTIONS B-21
5-2 Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 2)
With type 2, set the distance from the tool tip to the workpiece zero point, with the Z-axis returned
to the machine zero point, on the TOOL OFFSET screen in a negative value.
Spindle A: Distance from the spindle gage line to the center of
gage line table rotation
B: Tool length
B
C: Movement distance (offset data)
D: Distance from the center of table rotation to the
reference face
Offset data = C
A
C (Type 2)
Reference face
D
Center of table rotation
Workpiece
Table
When this method is used for setting the tool length offset data, it is necessary to measure
tool lengths for each kind of workpieces. However, since this method is simple to set the
tool length offset data, this method may be used when machining a single workpiece.
B-22 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G43 and G49

Ex.
+Y
−Z +Z 40
2
1
+X
Z0 Workpiece zero point for G54
O0001;
N1; (T1 is set in the spindle)
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at a point 30 mm away from Z0 (workpiece
upper face) in the +Z direction at a rapid traverse rate;
offset is made in the Z-axis direction by the tool length
amount set for tool offset number 1.
M03;
Machining program
M01;
M06;
N2; (T2 is set in the spindle)

G90 G00 G54 X40.0 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 2 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H2 S1000 T3; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at a point 30 mm away from Z0 (workpiece
upper face) in the +Z direction at a rapid traverse rate;
offset is made in the Z-axis direction by the tool length
amount set for tool offset number 2.
M03;
Machining program
M30;
G FUNCTIONS B-23
<Basic program pattern>
The basic pattern of blocks where G43 is specified is shown below.
For using the tool length offset mode (G43), it is advisable to use it in a pattern.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z_ H_ S_ T_ ;
M03;
Machining program
M01;
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z_ H_ S_ T_ ;
M03;
Machining program
M30;
B-24 G FUNCTIONS
6 G17, G18, G19 SELECTING PLANE FOR MACHINING
+Y To execute circular arc cutting, cutter radius offset,

rotation copy (option), coordinate system rotation (option),
+X parallel copy (option), and drilling, it is necessary to select
the plane on which the called function is executed.
G18
Generally, the XY plane called by G17 is selected to
+Z execute the required functions. However, there are cases
G17 that the function must be executed on the ZX or YZ plane.
G19
To select the ZX or YZ plane, specify G18 or G19.
COMMAND
G17; . . . . . . . . . . . XY plane (selected when power is turned on)
G18; . . . . . . . . . . . ZX plane
G19; . . . . . . . . . . . YZ plane
1. G17 (XY plane) is selected when the power is turned on.

NOTE
2. Axis movement commands are not affected by the selected plane.

G17 G02 X_ Y_ R_ F_ ;
G01 Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Z-axis moves independent of the
selected plane.
3. When specifying a circular interpolation command (G02, G03), an alarm message is
displayed on the screen if selected plane is not proper for the specified commands.
G17 G02 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . An alarm message is displayed
The program must be:
G18 G02 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
4. To execute the circular interpolation using the U-axis, select the ZX plane by
specifying G18. In the block containing G18, specify the axis (U- or Z-axis) which
should be called in combination with the U-axis for circular interpolation. If no axis is
specified in the G18 block, circular interpolation is executed between the X-axis and
the U-axis.
After the completion of machining to be carried out using the U-axis, return the plane
selection to the XY plane by specifying G17.
G18 G91 U0 Z0;
Machining program using U-axis
G17;
G FUNCTIONS B-25
Programming using G17, G18, or G19 (1)

Ex.
To program the arc 1 → 2 → 3 indicated in the following illustration.
The values specified as ( , , ) in the illustration below indicate the coordinate values
(X, Y, Z).
+Y
+X
(5.0, 0, 0)
2
+Z
3
(0, 0, −5.0) 1
(0, −5.0, 0)
O0001;
N1;
(G17) G01 X0 Y−5.0 Z0 F100; . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 on the XY plane

G02 X5.0 Y0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along the
5 10
arc in the clockwise direction up to +X
point 2 on the XY plane 2
−5
1
Circular cutting (Radius: 5.0 mm) −10
−Y
G18 G02 X0 Z−5.0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along the arc +X
in the clockwise direction up to point
3 on the ZX plane
10
Circular cutting (Radius: 5.0 mm) 2
5
3
−Z
−10 −5
G19 G03 Y−5.0 Z0 R5.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along the arc −5 −10
in the along the arc in the −Z
3
counterclockwise direction up to −5
1
point 1 on the YZ plane −10
Circular cutting (Radius: 5.0 mm)

−Y
B-26 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G17, G18, or G19 (2)

Ex.
To program three types of circular arc (1 → 3 → 2, 1 → 4 → 2, 3 → 4 → 5; radius 10 mm) in the
machining of hemisphere shown below.
The values specified as ( , , ) in the illustration below indicate the coordinate values
(X, Y, Z).
5 (0, 10.0, 0)
(0, 0, −10.0) 4
1
(10.0, 0, 0)
(X0, Y0)
2
3
(−10.0, 0, 0) (0, −10.0, 0)
+Y
+X
+Z
<Circular arc 1 → 3 → 2>
(G17) G01 X10.0 Y0 Z0 F100; . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 on the XY plane

G02 X−10.0 Y0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along −10 10
the arc in the clockwise direction +X
2 1
up to point 2 on the XY plane.
Circular cutting (Radius: 10.0 mm) 3 −10
−Y
G FUNCTIONS B-27
G01 X10.0 Y0 Z0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1

G18 G03 X−10.0 Z0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along +X
the arc in the along the arc in 1
10
the counterclockwise direction
up to point 2 on the ZX plane. −10
+Z
−10
Determine the arc rotating 2
direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise direction specified by G02 or
G03) by viewing the arc in the negative direction
from the positive direction in the Y-axis, which is
not contained in the ZX plane.
G01 X0 Y−10.0 Z0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 3

G19 G03 Y10.0 Z0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool along the +Y
arc in the along the arc in the 5
10
counterclockwise direction up to
point 5 on the YZ plane. −10
−Z
−10
Determine the arc rotating 3
direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise direction specified by G02 or
G03) by viewing the arc in the negative direction
from the positive direction in the X-axis, which is
not contained in the YZ plane.
B-28 G FUNCTIONS
7 G00 POSITIONING THE TOOL AT A RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
By specifying the G00 command, all axis movement

commands are executed at the rapid traverse rate. In
other words, the cutting tool is positioned at the
programmed target point at a rapid traverse rate.
The G00 mode is usually used for the following
operations:
1. At the start of machining:
To move the cutting tool close to the workpiece.
2. During machining:
To move the cutting tool, retracted from the
workpiece, to the next programmed target point.
CAUTION When moving the cutting tool at a rapid

traverse rate during machining, make sure that
there are no obstacles in the tool paths.
3. At the end of machining:
To move the cutting tool away from the workpiece.
COMMAND
G00 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G00 . . . . . . . . Calls positioning at a rapid traverse rate.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the positioning target point at a rapid traverse rate.
CAUTION If X-, Y-, and Z-axis movements are specified in the same block in the G00 mode, the
tool path is not always a straight line from the present position to the programmed end
point. Therefore, when specifying positioning in the G00 mode, it is necessary to make
sure that there is no obstacle in the path of positioning, which is determined according
to the traverse rate of the individual axes (X, Y, Z). If there is an obstacle such as a
workpiece and a fixture in the positioning path, the tool or the tool holder will be hit
against them causing machine damage.
G FUNCTIONS B-29
1. Once the G00 command is specified, it remains valid until another G code in the 01
NOTE
group is specified. G01, G02, and G03 are examples of G codes which belong to
the group 01.
G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same group is specified are
called modal G codes.
For the G code groups, refer to page B-1 (1)
2. The rapid traverse rate varies depending on the machine.
Page F-16 (3-1)
3. The rapid traverse rate is adjustable by using the rapid traverse rate override switch
on the machine operation panel.
4. If the rapid traverse rate override switch is set to "0" during automatic operation, the
programmed rapid traverse is not executed and the operation enters the feed hold
mode.
Programming using G00

Ex.
The program to move the cutting tool along path 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 at a rapid traverse rate.
+Y
31 33
2 1
25
25
+X
15
25
3 4
15 15
Rapid traverse
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 X33.0 Y25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate

X−15.0 Y−15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 3 at a rapid traverse rate
X15.0 Y−25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 4 at a rapid traverse rate
Since the G00 command is a modal G code, it is valid for the succeeding blocks.
Therefore, axis movement commands in these blocks are all executed at a rapid traverse
rate.
B-30 G FUNCTIONS
8 G01 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A STRAIGHT PATH AT A

CUTTING FEEDRATE
By specifying the G01 command, the cutting tool is moved

along a straight line to cut a workpiece.
The feedrate is specified with an F code by the distance
the cutting tool should be moved in a minute.
This mode is used to carry out face cutting or

pocket cutting using an end mill, or facing using a
face milling cutter.
COMMAND
G01 X_ Y_ Z_ F_ ;
• G01 . . . . . . . . Calls the linear interpolation mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the cutting target point for cutting.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate.
1. Once the G01 command is specified, it remains valid until another G code in the 01
NOTE
group is specified. G00, G02, and G03 are examples of G codes which belong to
the group 01.
G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same group is specified are
called modal G codes.
2. The cutting traverse rate is adjustable by using the feedrate override switch on the
machine operation panel in the range of 0 to 150%.
3. The feedrate data is "0" until an F code is specified.
If an axis movement command is read before an F code is specified, the machine
does not operate. In this case, an alarm message (No. 011) is displayed on the
screen.
G FUNCTIONS B-31

Ex.
The program to move the cutting tool along path 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 at a cutting feedrate.
+Y
31 33
2 1
25
25
+X
15
25
3 4
15 15
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G90 G01 X33.0 Y25.0 F500; . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
X−31.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool from point 1 to point 2 at a feedrate
of 500 mm/min
X−15.0 Y−15.0 F250; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool from point 2 to point 3 at a feedrate
of 250 mm/min
X15.0 Y−25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool from point 3 to point 4 at a feedrate
of 250 mm/min
Since the G01 command is a modal G code, it is valid for the succeeding blocks.
Therefore, axis movement commands in these blocks are all executed at a cutting
feedrate.
B-32 G FUNCTIONS
9 G02, G03 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A CIRCULAR ARC AT A

CUTTING FEEDRATE
Specify the G02 and G03 commands when cutting a circle

or a circular arc shape.
G02
G03
COMMAND 1. Circular arc on XY plane

G17 G02(G03) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
G17 G02(G03) X_ Y_ R_ F_ ;
2. Circular arc on ZX plane
G18 G02(G03) X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
G18 G02(G03) X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
3. Circular arc on YZ plane
G19 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
G19 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane where a
circular arc is defined. G02
• G02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the circular arc in the

clockwise direction.
• G03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the circular arc in the
G03
counterclockwise direction.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values
of the end point of the arc.
• I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and the direction from the start
point to the center of arc.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the circular arc radius.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a feedrate.
G FUNCTIONS B-33
1. When the power is turned on, G17 (XY plane) is selected.

NOTE
Generally, circular arc cutting is carried out in the XY plane (G17). When cutting a
circular arc in the ZX or YZ plane, select the plane by specifying the G18 or G19
command.
2. The sign (positive (+), negative (−)) used with an R command indicates the following.
For a circular arc of 180°, the sign may be either positive (+) or negative (−).
R>0 Circular arc of 180° or smaller

R<0 Circular arc of 180° or larger
3. When cutting a full circle, an R command cannot be used to specify radius.

Use I, J, and K to specify the radius.
If circle radius is specified with R, innumerable circles that have the same start and
end points can be defined and the specific one cannot be determined.
4. When I, J, and K command is specified with an R command in the same block, the R
command is given priority and I, J, and K commands are ignored.
5. To cut a half-circle accurately or to accurately define the center of an arc of which the
center angle is close to 180°, use I and K commands instead of an R command.
If an R command is used, there are cases that the center of a half-circle or an arc of
which the center angle is close to 180° cannot be set accurately due to calculation
error.
G02 or G03 is determined by viewing the arc in the negative direction from the positive
direction in the axis which is not contained in the selected plane.
In the G17 XY plane, for example, the G02 command generates a clockwise arc by
viewing the arc in the negative direction from the positive direction in the Z-axis.
B-34 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To define a full circle.
The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration below indicate the coordinate values (X,
Y).
2 (0, 50.0)
3
(−60.0, 50.0) 1
R50 (70.0, 50.0)
Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;

G01 X0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
G03 J−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting along a circle in the counterclockwise direction at
a feedrate of 500 mm/min
With a fully circle, X and Y are not specified since

NOTE
the start point and the end point are at the same
position.
The distance from the start point (point 2) to the

center of the circle is 50 mm in the negative
direction of the Y-axis.
G01 X−60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 3 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
G FUNCTIONS B-35

Ex.
To program the shape 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1, which includes arcs.
+Y
R20
4 3
2
30
R10
20
5
10
+X
10
6 1
20
R10
30
9
R20 7 8
8 18
Cutting feed
28 28
O0001;
N1;
G90 G01 X28.0 Y0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate of 500
mm/min
Axis movement commands in the following blocks

are all executed at a feedrate of 500 mm/min.
Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2

G03 X18.0 Y30.0 I−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Circular cutting (counterclockwise direction) to point 3
(Radius: 10.0 mm)
Specification of I in this block does not have

special meaning. It is possible to specify R10.0
instead of I−10.0.
G01 X−8.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 4
G02 X−28.0 Y10.0 R20.0; . . . . . . . . . . Circular cutting (clockwise direction) to point 5
(Radius: 20.0 mm)
G01 Y−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 6
G02 X−8.0 Y−30.0 R20.0; . . . . . . . . . . Circular cutting (clockwise direction) to point 7
(Radius: 20.0 mm)
G01 X18.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 8
B-36 G FUNCTIONS
G91 G03 X10.0 Y10.0 R10.0;. . . . . . . . Circular cutting (counterclockwise direction) to point 9
(Radius: 10.0 mm)
Since the commands are specified in the G91

incremental mode, (X10.0, Y10.0) indicate the
distance from the start point to the end point of the
circular arc.
Giving the commands in the incremental mode in this
block is only for reference purpose and it does not have
specific meaning.
G90 G01 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 (absolute command)
G FUNCTIONS B-37
10 G04 SUSPENDING PROGRAM EXECUTION (DWELL)
The G04 command is used to suspend program execution

during automatic operation for the period specified in the
program.
This function is called the dwell function.
By specifying the dwell function at the bottom of the hole,
Tool rotates and feed axis movement stops.
is stopped. The spindle keeps rotating if axis movement stops.
By rotating the spindle one turn while maintaining the
cutting tool at the bottom of the hole, the accuracy at the
hole bottom is improved and undercut portion is
eliminated.
When suspending program execution by specifying G04 at the bottom of the hole, for
NOTE
example, specify the time which allows the spindle to rotate by approximately one turn. If
the spindle is rotated too long while the cutting tool is in contact with the workpiece, it will
shorten the tool life as well as deteriorate finished surface accuracy.
The G04 command is used for spot facing or boring.
COMMAND
G04 P_ ;
G04 X_ ;
• G04 . . . . . . . . Calls the dwell function.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . The period in which the program execution is suspended.
Specify the dwell period in units of 0.001 sec without a decimal
point.
P1000 . . . . . . . . . 1 sec.
• X. . . . . . . . . . . The period in which the program execution is suspended.
Specify the dwell period using a value with a decimal point.
X1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 sec.
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 sec.
1. When address P is used to specify the dwell period, decimal point cannot be used.
NOTE
Dwell for 1.5 seconds . . . . . . . . G04 P1500;
Dwell for 2.3 seconds . . . . . . . . G04 P2300;
2. Programmable range of dwell period: 0.001 to 99999.999 (sec)
3. The G04 command is valid only for the specified block.
4. Calculate the time per spindle rotation using the following equation.
60 (sec)
t (sec) =
Spindle speed (min−1)
B-38 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To carry out hole machining up to 10 mm depth and dwell at the hole bottom using an end mill.
2 1
Dwell for 0.1 sec Rapid traverse
at the hole bottom
Cutting feed
10 2
−Z +Z
Z0
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;

G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the spindle speed of 800 min−1
G01 Z2.0 F2000;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the tool to point 1 at a feedrate of 2000 mm/min
Z−10.0 F50; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to point 2, the bottom of the hole, at a feedrate of
50 mm/min
G04 P100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspending program execution for 0.1 seconds at the
hole bottom
Time per spindle 60 (sec)
= = 0.075 (sec)
rotation 800 (min−1)
To suspend program execution for a period equivalent to

more than one turn of the spindle, specify 0.1 second for a
dwell period.
Dwell can also be specified by "G04 X0.1;"

instead of "G04 P100;".
G01 Z2.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retracting the tool from point 2 to point 1 at a feedrate of

50 mm/min
G FUNCTIONS B-39
11 G28, G30 RETURN THE AXES TO THE MACHINE ZERO POINT,

OR SECOND (THIRD OR FOURTH) ZERO POINT
AUTOMATICALLY
By specifying G28 or G30, it is possible to return the specified axes to the machine zero point, or
second, third or fourth zero point via the specified intermediate point. This type of zero return
operation is used to avoid interference of a cutting tool with the workpiece, angle plate, or machine
cover which might occur if the cutting tool is directly returned from the present position to the tool
change position. It is also used when changing a workpiece or removing chips, or when carrying
out APC operation.
With SH series, the third and fourth zero return function is optional.
NOTE
COMMAND 1. Machine zero point

G28 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
2. Second zero point
G30 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
3. Third and fourth zero point
G30 P3(P4) X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G28 . . . . . . . . Calls the machine zero return mode.
• G30 . . . . . . . . Calls the second zero return mode.
• G30 P3 . . . . . . Calls the third zero return mode.
• G30 P4 . . . . . . Calls the fourth zero return mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the axes to be returned to the machine zero point or,
the second, third, or fourth zero point.
Numeric value specified following addresses X, Y, and Z

NOTE
indicates the coordinate value of the intermediate point.
WARNING The positions to be reached in the second, third and fourth zero return
operation are established by setting the distance from the machine zero
point in parameters No. 1241, No. 1242, and No. 1243, respectively. Do not
change the setting for these parameters. If the setting is changed
mistakenly, the machine will move in an unexpected manner, and this
could cause accidents involving serious injuries or damage to the
machine.
CAUTION 1. When returning the axes to the machine zero point (or second, third, or fourth
zero point) using G28 or G30, return the Z-axis to the machine zero point (or
second, third, or fourth zero point) first and after that return the X- and Y-axes to
the machine zero point (or second, third, or fourth zero point). If the X- or Y-axis
is returned first, the cutting tool will interfere with the fixture or with the workpiece,
depending on the position of the workpiece, causing machine damage.
B-40 G FUNCTIONS
CAUTION 2. When returning the Z-axis from the present position to the machine zero point (or
second, third or fourth zero point) using G28 or G30, specify any of the following
commands: "G91 G28 Z0;", "G91 G30 Z0;", "G91 G30 P3(P4) Z0;".
If G28 or G30 is specified in the G90 mode ("G90 G28 Z0;", "G90 G30 Z0;", "G90
G30 P3(P4) Z0;"), the Z-axis returns to the machine zero point (or second, third,
or fourth zero point) via the workpiece zero point. This movement will cause
interference of a cutting tool with the fixture or with the workpiece, depending on
the position of the workpiece, causing machine damage.
1. The tool change position differs among the machine models.

NOTE
<SH-503, SH5000, 8000 (rack magazine specification)>
Both X- and Y-axes are at the second zero point.
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes

M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
<NH4000, 5000, SH-403, 633, SH5000, 8000 (rotary magazine specification),
HVM630>
All of X-, Y-, and Z-axes are at the second zero point.
G91 G30 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Z-axis

G30 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
<MH-403, 503, 503/U, 633, 633/U>
Both Y- and Z-axes are at the second zero point and U-axis is at the machine zero
point (U-axis specification).

G30 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Y-axis
G28 U0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of U-axis (specified only with
the U-axis specification machines)
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
<MH-1003>
Both Y- and Z-axes are at the second zero point and X-axis is at the machine zero
point.

G30 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Y-axis
G28 X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-axis
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
2. The APC position varies depending on the machine models.
For the APC position, refer to page I-5 (3).
G FUNCTIONS B-41
12 G73 - G89 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES
A hole machining cycle specifies operation sequence to be specified in several blocks by the
commands in a single block containing a G code.
For details of G73 - G89 (hole machining canned cycle), refer to Chapter D, "HOLE
MACHINING CANNED CYCLE".
<Basic pattern of hole machining canned cycle>
Basic command format and movement of the hole machining canned cycle are explained below:
<Movement>
A hole machining canned cycle consists of movements 1
Movement 3 Movement 2 to 6 shown in the diagram.
Movements 1, 2, and 6 are common to all canned cycles
called by G73 to G89.
Movement 1
Movement 4 Point R Movements 3 to 5 vary according to respective canned
Point Z Initial point cycles.
Movement 5 Movement 6
Rapid traverse
Workpiece Cutting feed
Rapid traverse or
Z0 cutting feed
−Z +Z
For a hole machining canned cycle, "initial point", "point R", and "point Z" indicate the
following positions:
• Initial point . . . . . . The position where a hole machining canned cycle starts in the
Z-axis direction
• Point R. . . . . . . . . The position where Z-axis feedrate changes from rapid traverse
rate to the programmed cutting feedrate in the called hole
machining canned cycle
• Point Z . . . . . . . . . The position of the hole bottom in the Z-axis direction
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining start position by the movements of X- and
Y-axes.
Movement 2: Moving to point R at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Hole machining (Hole machining is carried out.)
Movement 4: Movement at hole bottom
Specify dwell and/or spindle orientation if necessary.

B-42 G FUNCTIONS
Movement 5: Returning to point R level
Whether the Z-axis return movement is executed at a rapid traverse rate

NOTE
or cutting feedrate is determined by the G code specified for calling the
hole machining canned cycle.
Movement 6: Returning to initial point at rapid traverse rate
COMMAND
G90(G91) G98(G99) G73 - G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ;
• G98 . . . . . . . . Calls the return to initial point level.
After finishing a hole machining cycle, the Z-axis returns

NOTE
to the initial point level and positioning is executed by the
X- and Y-axis at the next hole machining position.
(Movement 6)
• G99 . . . . . . . . Calls the return to point R level.

NOTE
to the point R level and positioning is executed by the X-
and Y-axis at the next hole machining position.
(Movement 5)
• G73 - G89 . . . Calls a hole machining canned cycle.
Operation mode for movement 3 to movement 5 is

NOTE
determined according the specified G code.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . Specify the hole machining positions (in XY plane).
(Movement 1)
• Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the point Z level (hole bottom).
(G90): Defined by the distance and the direction referenced to
Z0 (workpiece zero point).
the point R level.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the point R level where Z-axis feedrate changes from a
rapid traverse rate to a cutting feedrate.
the initial point level.
• Q . . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut per one infeed motion (G73, G83), or shift
amount (G76, G87). (incremental value)
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the period of dwell function executed at the hole
bottom.
P1500 → 1.5 sec

G FUNCTIONS B-43

• K. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of repetitions.
If designation of address K is omitted, hole machining

NOTE
cycle is executed once after the positioning at the hole
position (equivalent to K1).
K0 . . . . . . . . . . . After the positioning at the specified
hole position, hole machining cycle is
not executed.
K1 to K9999 . . . Hole machining cycle is repeated by
the number of times specified by
address K.
Page D-5
Movement 1
Movement 4 Point R
Point Z Initial point
Rapid traverse
Workpiece Cutting feed
Rapid traverse or
Z0 cutting feed
−Z +Z
1. Whether movement 5 is executed at a rapid traverse rate or a cutting feedrate is

NOTE
determined according to the G code specified to call the hole machining canned
cycle. (G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89)
2. When the power is turned on, the G98 mode (the return to the initial point level) is
selected.
3. G98 and G99 are valid only in a hole machining canned cycle and not valid for other
operation.
4. In the F15 format, shift amount (G76, G87) is specified using address I and J.
5. In the F15 format, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.
B-44 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using the counter boring cycle (G82)

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y50.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1300 T2;
M03;
X30.0 Y40.0;
G99 G82 X20.0 Y30.0 Z−25.0 R3.0 P100 F100;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle (counter boring cycle)
Machining program
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the hole machining canned cycle
• Z30.0 . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the initial point

30 level
25 (X30.0 Y40.0 Z30.0)
• G99. . . . . . . . . Return to the point R level return
Movement 3 mode
Movement 1
3 • G82. . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle
Movement 4 (counter boring cycle)
Initial point
Point R
(Z3.0)
(X20.0 Y30.0 Z30.0) • X20.0 Y30.0 . . Hole machining position
• Z−25.0 . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the point Z
level (hole bottom)
Workpiece Rapid traverse • R3.0 . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
Cutting feed level
Z0 This has the same meaning
as Z3.0.
• P100 . . . . . . . . Dwell for 0.1 sec at the hole bottom

• F100 . . . . . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
One block of commands including G82 execute a series of operation from movement 1 to
movement 5.
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining position (X20.0, Y30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 2: Z-axis movement up to point R (Z3.0) at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Cutting up to the hole bottom (point Z level, Z−25.0) at the specified feedrate 100
mm/min
Movement 4: Dwell for 0.1 sec at the hole bottom
Movement 5: Rapid retraction to point R level, as determined by G99
G FUNCTIONS B-45
In the G90 incremental mode, the same cycle is programmed as indicated below.
G91 G99 G82 X−10.0 Y−10.0 Z−28.0 R−27.0 P100 F100;
B-46 G FUNCTIONS
13 G40, G41, G42 CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
The cutter radius offset means shifting of the tool paths to the right or left by the radius from the
programmed paths.
For details of the G40 - G42 commands (cutter radius offset), refer to Chapter E,
"CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET".
Generally, when cutting a pocket or carrying out contouring operation using an end mill, the cutter
radius offset function is used to finish the workpiece in the shape specified in the drawing.
How the shape in Fig. 1 is finished using the cutter radius offset function is briefly explained below.
3 4 Specify the required shape to be finished in the program:
point 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
Workpiece
1
Fig. 1
3 4 Since the center of a cutting tool moves along the defined

paths, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in
Fig. 2 if the program is created without using the cutter
radius offset function.
2 The workpiece is finished to the shape indicated by
broken line in Fig. 2, which is smaller than the required
Workpiece
shape indicated in Fig. 1 by the radius of the cutting tool
( ).
1
Fig. 2
Tool
To shift the tool paths from the programmed paths, input

the radius of the cutting tool for the cutter radius offset
3 4 data at the TOOL OFFSET screen.
If the cutter radius offset function is used, the tool paths
are shifted outside from the programmed paths by the
2
input offset amount as shown in Fig. 3 to finish the
Workpiece required shape.
In this manner, by shifting the tool paths from the
programmed paths by using the cutter radius offset
1 function, it is not necessary to obtain the coordinate
Fig. 3
values using complicated calculation to generate the tool
Workpiece viewed from the
spindle head paths to finish the workpiece to the required shape.
G FUNCTIONS B-47
COMMAND 1. Cutter radius offset in the XY plane

G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
2. Cutter radius offset in the ZX plane
G18 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Z_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
3. Cutter radius offset in the YZ plane
G19 G01(G00) G41(G42) Y_ Z_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane where cutter radius offset is executed.
• G01(G00) . . . . . . . . . . Selects the interpolation mode in which the cutter radius
offset function is executed.
G00 . . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . . Cutting feed
• G41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset <G41>
mode (offset to the left). Workpiece
The tool paths are

generated by shifting the
programmed paths to the Tool advancing
direction
left in reference to the tool
advancing direction by the
specified offset amount.
• G42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset
Tool advancing
mode (offset to the right). direction
The tool paths are
programmed paths to the Workpiece
right in reference to the tool <G42>
• G40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the cutter radius offset mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
• I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . . . . When making a setting that represents the direction of the
workpiece shape in the following block, the direction ratio
for this setting is specified as a vector.
• D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset number.
Specify the offset number to be used.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate.
B-48 G FUNCTIONS
14 G02, G03 CUTTING HELIX (HELICAL INTERPOLATION)
By specifying X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the circular

interpolation mode, the cutting tool movement is
controlled along helix.
This interpolation mode is used to cut threads

using a thread cutting tool.
COMMAND 1. Helical interpolation in the XY plane

G17 G02(G03) X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ F_ ;
G17 G02(G03) X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
2. Helical interpolation in the ZX plane
G18 G02(G03) X_ Z_ Y_ I_ K_ F_ ;
G18 G02(G03) X_ Z_ Y_ R_ F_ ;
3. Helical interpolation in the YZ plane
G19 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ X_ J_ K_ F_ ;
G19 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ X_ R_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane where helical interpolation is executed.
• G02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls helical interpolation in the clockwise direction,
viewing the workpiece from the cutting tool.
• G03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls helical interpolation in the counterclockwise
direction, viewing the workpiece from the cutting tool.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point of helical
interpolation.
• I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction from the start point of
helical interpolation to the center.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius for helical interpolation.
G FUNCTIONS B-49
1. In the helical interpolation mode, the cutter radius offset function is applied only to
NOTE
circular arc.
2. In the block where the helical interpolation is specified, it is not allowed to specify the
tool position offset and the tool length offset function.
3. The F command specifies the feedrate
X
along the circular arc. Since actual
feedrate differs from the feedrate
specified by the F command in the Length of
circular arc
program, careful consideration must be
paid so that the feedrate along a linear Z
Feedrate
axis does not exceed the limit of the
Tool path
machine.
The feedrate along a linear axis is
Length of linear axis
calculated with the following formula.
Y
Linear axis length

Linear axis feedrate = F ×
Circular arc length
B-50 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G02 or G03 (Helical interpolation)

Ex.
To cut the thread of M60 P = 2.0, 30 mm depth at the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) of the work
coordinate system G54 using the 30 mm diameter thread cutting tool.
+Y
30 4
5 1 3 7
+X
−30 30
2
M60 × P2.0
φ 30 30 −30 6
Relief: 2 mm −Z Z0 +Z Locus of the cutting tool

Thread cutting tool
(pitch 2 mm)
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1590 T2;
M03;
Z−30.0;
G01 G41 X12.0 Y−18.0 D1 F80;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G03 X30.0 Y0 Z−29.7 R18.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
I−30.0 Z−27.7; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
X12.0 Y18.0 Z−27.4 R18.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G00 G40 X0 Y0;
<Lead angle>
12
10 11 12 11
As in the illustration in the left, when triangle abc is wound
7 8 9 c 10
9 8
6 7
4 5
1 2 3 1
2 3 4
5 6
around a cylinder, the oblique line of the triangle forms a
b
a curve, which is called helix. If a groove having the section
πD
of triangle or square is created along the helix, it forms the
9 8
c 11
10
2
3 4
7 tread. ∠ cab = θ of triangle abc to form the helix of this
5 6
12 1 tread is called the lead angle. In order to cut the tread
0 0
θ b
smoothly, movements in point 3 to point 8 must generate
a
the same angle as the lead angle. Lead angle can be
θ: Lead angle (degree)
L: Lead (mm) calculated using the following formula.
D: Thread diameter (mm) L
tanθ =
π•D
G FUNCTIONS B-51
1) point 1 → 2
<Approach arc radius>
The radius of the approach arc radius must satisfy the following conditions.
Tool radius < r (approach arc radius) < Machining radius
By entering tool radius 15 mm and machining radius 30 mm to the inequality above, the
following can be obtained.
15 < r < 30
From this, approach radius is determined as r = 18 mm.
<Coordinate values of approach arc radius start point>
If the inside angle of the approach arc is too large, approach motion will take a time.
Conversely, if it is too small, the tool may interfere with the face to be machined. Taking
these into consideration, the inside angle of the approach arc is determined to be 90°.
The coordinate values of the center of the approach arc are calculated using the approach
radius and the machining radius; X12.0, Y0. The coordinate values of the start point 2 are
then calculated as X12.0, Y−18.0.
2) point 2 → 3
<Lead in approach arc>
To execute thread cutting smoothly, the lead angle within the approach arc must match the
lead angle of the thread to be cut.
Machining radius : Pitch (Lead) = Approach arc radius : L (Lead)
Since "machining radius = 30 mm", "pitch = 2 mm", and "approach arc radius = 18 mm",
30 : 2 = 18 : L
Accordingly, value L is obtained as follows:
L = 1.2 mm
B-52 G FUNCTIONS
<Z-axis movement distance during approach>

Since the inside angle of the approach arc is 90°, the arc is a quadrant. This means that one
fourth the lead 1.2 mm in the approach arc is the movement distance of the Z-axis during
approach. That is, the Z-axis moves 0.3 mm during approach motion along the approach
arc 2 → 3. The Z coordinate value at the completion of approach is therefore calculated as
shown below.
Z: −30.0 + 0.3 = −29.7
+Y
30 4
Coordinate values
of the center of
approach arc
5 1 3 7
(X12.0, Y0)
+X
−30 30
2
(X12.0, Y−18.0)
−30 6
3) point 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 (full circle)

<Z-axis movement distance>
Since this movement generates a full circle, movement along the Z-axis equals the pitch
(lead), 2 mm.
Z: −29.7 + 2.0 = −27.7
G FUNCTIONS B-53
4) point 7 → 8
<Lead in escape arc>
The lead in the escape arc is the same as that in the approach arc.
L = 1.2 mm
<Z-axis movement distance during escape>
The Z-axis movement distance during escape is equal to that during approach. Therefore,
one fourth the lead in the escape arc 1.2 mm is the distance the Z-axis moves during
escape. This Z-axis movement distance during movement along the escape arc 7 → 8 is
thus obtained as 0.3 mm.
Z: −27.7 + 0.3 = −27.4
<Coordinate values of the end point of escape arc>
If the inside angle of the escape arc is too large, escape motion will take a time. Conversely,
if it is too small, the tool may interfere with the face to be machined. Taking these into
consideration, the inside angle of the escape arc is determined to be 90°.
The center of the escape arc is taken at the same point as the start point of the approach arc
(X12.0, Y0). Therefore, the coordinate values of the end point 8 of the escape arc are
X12.0, Y18.0.
+Y
30 4
8 (X12.0, Y18.0)
5 3 7
+X
−30 (X12.0, Y0) 30
Coordinate values
of the center of
escape arc
−30 6
B-54 G FUNCTIONS
<How to calculate spindle speed and feedrate>

<Cutting conditions>
Cutting speed 150 m/min

Feed of tip/spindle rotation 0.1 mm
Spindle speed:
1000V 1000 × 150 N: Spindle speed (min−1)
N= =
π•D π × 30 V: Cutting speed (m/min)
= 1590 (min−1) D: Tool diameter (mm)
Feedrate:
F1 (D1 − D2) 159 × (60 − 30) F1: Feedrate on the cutting line (mm/min)
F= =
D1 60 D1: Thread diameter (mm)
= 80 (mm/min) D2: Tool diameter (mm)
F1 = f•Z•N f: Tip feedrate per spindle rotation (mm)
= 0.1 × 1 × 1590 Z: Number of tips mounted in the thread
= 159 (mm/min) cutting tool
For O.D. thread, use the following formula:

NOTE
F1 (D1 + D2)
F=
D1
+Y
Workpiece
+X
φ D1
φ D2
The values obtained in the calculation above are only for reference purpose.
NOTE
Determine the cutting conditions, spindle speed, and feedrate be referring to the catalog
and technical document of the cutting tool manufacturer.
G FUNCTIONS B-55
15 G02.2, G03.2 CUTTING SPIRAL (INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION)
The G02.2 and G03.2 commands are used for cutting

involute curve.
The G02.2 and G03.2 commands are optional.

NOTE
Involute curve means spiral curve.
COMMAND 1. 1.Involute interpolation on XY plane

G17 G02.2(G03.2) X_ Y_ I_ J_ R_ F_ ;
2. Involute interpolation on ZX plane
G18 G02.2(G03.2) X_ Z_ I_ K_ R_ F_ ;
3. Involute interpolation on YZ plane
G19 G02.2(G03.2) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane
1’
where involute
interpolation is
executed.
1
• G02.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls involute
interpolation in the
clockwise direction.
2
• G03.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls involute
interpolation in the This is called the base circle.
counterclockwise 1 :Start point
1 ' :Present position
direction.
2 :Contact point of the tangent drawn
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the from point 1' to the base circle
Involute curve is the set of point 1'
coordinate values of which satisfies
the end point of 1 2 = 1 ' 2 .
involute
interpolation.
the involute curve to the center of the base circle.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of the base circle.
B-56 G FUNCTIONS
1. The start and end points of the involute curve must be taken within 100 turns from
NOTE
the point where the involute curve starts.
2. In the G02.2 or G03.2 mode, an alarm occurs in the following cases:
• The end point is not specified.
• None of I, J, and K is specified.
• A command (I0, J0, K0) which causes the start point and the center of the base
circle to lie at the same position is specified.
• Either the start or end point lies in the base circle.
• R is not specified.
• R≤0
3. The G codes which can be specified in the involute interpolation mode are indicated
below.
• G04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dwell
• G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data setting
• G17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XY plane
• G18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZX plane
• G19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YZ plane
• G65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro call
• G66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro modal call
• G67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro modal call cancel
• G90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute command
• G91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
4. In the involute interpolation mode, helical interpolation (G02, G03) and scaling (G51)
are not possible.
5. The involute interpolation can be specified in the following modes.
• G41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutter radius offset, left
• G42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutter radius offset, right
• G51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling
• G51.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable mirror image
• G68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate rotation
G FUNCTIONS B-57
6. The involute interpolation cannot be specified in the following modes.

NOTE
• G41.1(G151) . . . . . . . Normal direction control ON (left side)

• G42.1(G152) . . . . . . . Normal direction control ON (right side)
• G07.1(G107) . . . . . . . Cylindrical interpolation
• G12.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polar coordinate interpolation mode
• G16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polar coordinate command
• G72.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy-rotation
Rotation direction of the involute curve (G02.2, G03.2) is determined by viewing the
involute curve in the negative direction from the positive side of the axis which is not
included in the selected interpolation plane.
On the XY (G17) plane, for example, clockwise direction viewing from the positive side of
the Z-axis in the negative direction is defined as G02.2.
B-58 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G02.2 or G03.2 (Involute interpolation)

Ex.
To create the program for defining the involute curve from point 1 to point 2.
1. The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration below indicate the coordinate

values (X, Y).
2. In the drawing, 1 indicates the start point of involute curve and 2 indicates the end
of involute curve.
3. The Y coordinate of point 2 in the drawing can be calculated in the following manner:
The Y coordinate value of point 2 is equal to 1 ' 2 , where 1 ' 2 is one and a half
turn of the base circle.
1 ' 2 = (diameter × π) × 1.5
= 20 × π × 1.5
= 94.248
+Y
(10.0, 94.248)
2
3
(50.0, 94.248)
+X
1 1’
(−10.0, 0) (10.0, 0)
Base circle
(Radius: 10 mm)
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
X−10.0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G01 Z−5.0 F50;
G02.2 X10.0 Y94.248 I10.0 J0 R10.0 F200;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to point 2 along the involute curve at a feedrate of
200 mm/min
G01 X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to point 3 at a feedrate of 200 mm/min
G FUNCTIONS B-59
16 G09 ACCURATELY POSITIONING AT THE END POINT OF

LINEAR MOVEMENT
If the G09 command is specified, axis movement

specified in the same block is decelerated before stopped
at the end point. The G09 command calls the function
which checks whether the cutting tool has been
positioned exactly as specified.
A If cutting tool movement of A → B, B → C is specified in

B
the G01 mode, the corner may be slightly rounded as
indicated by broken lines. To finish the corner sharp, the
C
G09 command is used.
In the G01 mode, when axis movement is decelerated
before stopping at the programmed end point, it is also
accelerated automatically to start the axis movement
Tool path programmed in the G01 mode command specified in the next block.
Actual tool path
The G09 mode is valid for cutting feed (G01, G02,
NOTE
G03).
It is used to make the corner of the workpiece

sharp in the G01 cutting feed mode, for example.
B-60 G FUNCTIONS
COMMAND 1. Linear cutting

G09 G01 X_ Y_ Z_ F_ ;
2. Circular cutting
<XY plane>
G17 G09 G02(G03) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
G17 G09 G02(G03) X_ Y_ R_ F_ ;
<ZX plane>
G18 G09 G02(G03) X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
G18 G09 G02(G03) X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
<YZ plane>
G19 G09 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
G19 G09 G02(G03) Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane where a circular arc is defined.
• G09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the exact stop check function, which checks if a
cutting tool is correctly positioned at the programmed end
point during cutting.
• G01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the linear cutting mode to move axes at a cutting
feedrate.
• G02(G03) . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the circular arc cutting mode to move axes at a
cutting feedrate.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point of
movement.
the arc to the center.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the circular arc radius.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate (mm/min).
1. The G09 command is a G code in the 00 group.

NOTE
Since G09 is one-shot G code, it is valid only in the specified block.
2. The G61 also command has check function for exact stop.
Different from the G09 command, the G61 command is a modal G code.
The G04 command can be used instead of the G09 command.

G FUNCTIONS B-61

Ex.
Using the G09 command for movement in point 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 in the following illustration.
The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration below indicate the coordinate values (X,
Y).
+Y
(−60.0, 50.0) 2 1 (60.0, 50.0)
50
+X
50
(−60.0, −50.0) 3 4 (60.0, −50.0)

60 60 Cutting feed
O0001;
N1;
G00 X60.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G09 G01 X−60.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
The exact positioning at the end point 2 of movement is
checked by the NC.
Before starting the movement commands in the next
block, the cutting tool stops at point 2 once.
Y−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 3 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
Without deceleration at point 3, the cutting tool starts
executing the command in the next block.
Since the G09 command is one-shot command, it

NOTE
is not valid for this block. Therefore, exact
positioning is not checked by the NC.
G09 X60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 4 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
Same as in point 2, the exact positioning at the end point
4 of movement is checked by the NC.
Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 at a feedrate of 500
mm/min
Without deceleration at point 1, the cutting tool starts
executing the command in the next block.
Since the G09 command is one-shot command, it

NOTE
is not valid for this block. Therefore, exact
positioning is not checked by the NC.
B-62 G FUNCTIONS
17 G10 CHANGING THE TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT WITH PROGRAM

COMMAND
The tool offset amount is set on the TOOL OFFSET screen.

The tool offset consists of the tool length offset and cutter radius offset, and both of these offsets
have the tool geometry offset data and the tool wear offset data.
Once set, the tool offset amount can be changed by a program using the G10 command.
COMMAND
G90(G91) G10 L_ P_ R_ ;
• G90 . . . . . . . . Specifies the absolute dimensioning mode.
• G91 . . . . . . . . Specifies the incremental dimensioning mode.
• G10 . . . . . . . . Specifies the external input of offset amount.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . Selects the tool offset amount.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset number.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset amount.
(G90): The specified amount is taken as new offset

NOTE
amount.
(G91): The specified amount is added to the present
tool offset amount.
Programming using G10 L10 - L13

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G10 L12 P1 R7.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting "7.0 mm" for the tool geometry offset amount of
cutter radius offset of the tool offset number 1
G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
G42 G01 X50.0 Y80.0 D1 F200;. . . . . . By D1, the cutter radius offset command G42 is executed
using the tool geometry offset amount of cutter radius
offset set for tool offset number 1.
G FUNCTIONS B-63
18 G22, G23 SETTING THE TOOL ENTRY INHIBITED AREA
The function called by G22 and G23 are called the stored
stroke check function.
In the G22 mode, when a tool enters the specified area an
alarm message is displayed on the screen and the
machine stops. G23 cancels the G22 mode.
If different kind workpieces 1 and 2 are mounted on the
angle plate or fixture, for example, the tool entry inhibited
area should be set by specifying the G22 command to
avoid interference of a cutting tool with the workpiece 2
while workpiece 1 is being cut.
The G22 and G23 commands are optional.

NOTE
COMMAND
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
G23;
• G22 . . . . . . . . Turns the stored stroke check function ON.
• G23 . . . . . . . . Turns the stored stroke check function OFF.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the start point of the tool entry inhibited area.
Specify the distance from the machine zero point, i.e., machine
coordinate values displayed on the screen.
The X, Y, and Z commands are specified in the minimum

NOTE
setting unit.
100 mm → 100000
• I, J, K . . . . . . . Specifies the end point of the tool entry inhibited area.
Specify the distance from the machine zero point, i.e., machine
coordinate values displayed on the screen.
The X, Y, and Z commands are specified in the minimum

NOTE
setting unit.
100 mm → 100000
(X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
<Tool entry inhibited area>

B-64 G FUNCTIONS
CAUTION When using the G22 stored stroke check function, it is necessary to execute the
machine zero return operation after turning on power. The stored stroke check function
cannot be used unless the machine zero return is executed. If the machine is operated
while the stored stroke check function is not set, the machine does not stop even when
a cutting tool enters the tool entry inhibited area, causing machine damage.
1. For setting the coordinate values "X_ Y_ Z_" and "I_ J_ K_", the following conditions
NOTE
must be satisfied.
• X > I, Y > J, Z > K
• X − I > 2 mm, Y − J > 2 mm, Z − K > 2 mm
(X−80.0, Y−55.0, Z−40.0)
(I−130.0, J−75.0, K−80.0)
• X−80.0 > I−130.0 • −80.0 − (−130.0) = 50.0 > 2 mm

• Y−55.0 > J−75.0 • −55.0 − (−75.0) = 20.0 > 2 mm
• Z−40.0 > K−80.0 • −40.0 − (−80.0) = 40.0 > 2 mm
2.
(X, Y, Z) (X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K) (I, J, K)
<Entry inhibited area is set outside> <Entry inhibited area is set inside>
As shown in the illustration diagram above, the tool entry inhibited area is
established "outside" or "inside" the specified zone. Where the tool entry inhibited
area is set "outside" or "inside" is determined by the setting for parameter No.
1300.0.
3. The G22 and G23 commands must be specified in a block without other commands.
4. If the same values are set for "X_ Y_ Z_" and "I_ J_ K_" following the G22 command,
the tool entry inhibited area is not set.
5. Tool entry inhibited area specified with G22 is set in parameters.
The value set in parameters are not lost even if the power is turned off.
Accordingly, unless canceled by G23, the G22 function is valid when the power is
turned on.
G FUNCTIONS B-65
If a cutting tool enters the tool entry inhibited area specified with G22, an alarm is
displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
In this case, the cutting tool can be moved only in the opposite direction in which the
cutting tool has been moved.
The alarm state can be cleared by pressing the RESET

(RESET) key on the operation panel
after moving the cutting tool outside the tool entry inhibited area manually.

Ex.
To set the tool entry inhibited area as shown in the following illustration.
(X−100.0, Y−50.0, Z−40.0)
(I−140.0, J−70.0, K−80.0)
O0001;
N1;
G91 G28 Z0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of Z-axis
G28 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X- and Y-axes
G22 X−100.0 Y−50.0 Z−40.0 I−140.0 J−70.0 K−80.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the tool entry inhibited area as illustrated above
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z_ H_ S_ T_ ;
M03;
Machining program
G23; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling of the tool entry inhibited area

B-66 G FUNCTIONS
19 G31 SKIP FUNCTION
Specify the G31 command when carrying out the

workpiece alignment, tool length measurement, tool
breakage detection, etc. for the machine equipped with a
sensor.
Movement in the G31 mode is linear, same as in the G01
mode.
Different from the operation in the G01 mode, if the skip
signal is input externally during sensor movement in the
G31 mode, current movement is stopped and the program
advances to the next block ignoring the remaining
distance.
G31 cannot be specified in the ordinary machining

program.
COMMAND
G31 X_ Y_ Z_ F_ ;
• G31 . . . . . . . . Turns ON the skip function.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate.
1. The G31 command is a G code in the 00 group.

NOTE
2. Before specifying the G31 command, cancel the cutter radius offset mode (G41,
G42) by specifying the G40 command. If the G31 command is specified in the cutter
radius offset mode, an alarm message (No. 035) is displayed on the screen.
G FUNCTIONS B-67

Ex.
Axis movements after input of the skip signal varies according to the dimensioning mode
(incremental or absolute) of the commands specified in the block succeeding the G31 block.
Examples 1. to 3. explain axis movements in such cases.
1. When the commands in the block succeeding the G31 block are specified in incremental
values
In the block succeeding the G31 block, axes movements are controlled according to the
specified incremental commands from the point where the external skip signal is input.
For the program which moves a cutting tool along path 1 → 2 → 3, behavior of the cutting
tool after the input of the skip signal at point 2', during movement from point 1 to point 2 in
the G31 mode, is explained.
+Y
3 (57.0, 35.0) G90 G00 X−40.0 Y−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]

(−30.0, 35.0) 2
G91 G31 X10.0 Y85.0 F500;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
2’
X87.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
+X
1
(−40.0, −50.0)
The command in block 3 is executed in the incremental

2 (30.0, 35.0) 3 (57.0, 35.0)
mode referenced to point 2' where the axis movement in
87.0
the previous G31 block is interrupted by the input of a skip
2’
87.0 signal.
Skip signal was given here. The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration
left indicate the coordinate values (X, Y).
Programmed path
Actual path
1 (40.0, –50.0)
B-68 G FUNCTIONS
2. When the commands in the block succeeding the G31 block are specified in absolute values
calling movement of a single axis
In the block succeeding the G31 block, the axes specified in this block move to the specified
position. However the axes not specified stay at the position where the skip signal is given.
In the path 1 → 2 → 3, G31 is specified for path 1 → 2. Using such a program, axis
movement is explained in the case a skip signal is input at point 2'.
+Y
(−30.0, 35.0) 2
3 (57.0, 35.0) G90 G00 X−40.0 Y−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]
2’
G31 X−30.0 Y35.0 F500;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
+X
X57.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
1
(−40.0, −50.0)
If a skip signal is input at any point in the path 1 →

2 (−30.0, 35.0) 3 (57.0, 35.0)
2, specified in block [2], the axis specified in block
[3] (X-axis) moves to the specified position.
2’ X57.0
The axis (Y-axis) that is not specified in block [3]
keeps the position in which the skip signal is input.
Skip signal was given here.
The values specified as ( , ) in the
Programmed path illustration left indicate the coordinate values
1 (−40.0, −50.0) Actual path (X, Y).
G FUNCTIONS B-69
3. When the commands in the block succeeding the G31 block are specified in absolute values
calling movement of two axes
If a skip signal is input at any point between the path specified in the G31 mode, positioning
called in the block succeeding the G31 block is always made at the specified position.
In the path 1 → 2 → 3, G31 is specified for path 1 → 2. Using such a program, axis
movement is explained in the case a skip signal is input at point 2'.
+Y
3 (57.0, 35.0) G90 G00 X−40.0 Y−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]

(−30.0, 35.0) 2
G31 X−30.0 Y35.0 F500;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
2’
X57.0 Y35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
+X
1
(−40.0, −50.0)
If a skip signal is input at any point in the path specified by

2 (−30.0, 35.0) 3 (57.0, 35.0)
block [2], positioning is always made at the position speci-
fied by block [3].
2’
The values specified as ( , ) in the illustration

Skip signal was given here. left indicate the coordinate values (X, Y).
Programmed path
1 (−40.0, −50.0) Actual path
B-70 G FUNCTIONS
20 G45 - G48 TOOL POSITION OFFSET
Command Offset
By specifying the G45 to G48 command, movement
value amount distance of the specified axis can be increased/decreased
or double-increased/double-decreased by the value set
on the TOOL OFFSET screen.
It is possible to machine the contour of a workpiece using
an end mill by shifting tool radius that has been input as
G45
the offset amount. This is the same use as the cutter
radius offset function (G41, G42). However, in taper
G46 machining, excessive cutting (undersized cutting) or
insufficient cutting (oversized cutting) is caused by
G47 offsetting only the tool radius.
Accordingly, the tool position offset G code (G45 - G48)
G48 are not used generally, but the cutter radius offset function
(G41, G42) is used.
COMMAND
G45(G46, G47, G48) X(Y)_ D_ ;
• G45 - G48 . . . Tool position offset
G code Function
G45 Increase by the amount set in the TOOL OFFSET screen.

G46 Decrease by the amount set in the TOOL OFFSET screen.
Increase by the double amount set in the TOOL OFFSET
G47
screen.
Decrease by the double amount set in the TOOL OFFSET
G48
screen.
• X(Y) . . . . . . . . Specifies the end point of axis movement specified in a block.

• D. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the tool offset number.
G FUNCTIONS B-71
1. G codes calling the tool position offset function (G45 - G48) is G code in group 00.
NOTE
As the above G codes are one-shot G code, they are valid only in the specified
block.
2. Setting range of the offset amount is indicated below.
Metric input (mm)
±999.999mm
Offset amount
±999.999deg
3. In taper machining, offset is made as explained below.

G45 X100.0 Y50.0 D1;
(Offset amount (D1) = 50 mm)
End point
Offset amount 50 mm
Programmed path
Actual path
Start point Offset amount
50 mm
4. G45 - G48 cannot be used in the cutter radius offset mode.

5. G45 - G48 commands cannot be used in a hole machining canned cycle.
It is necessary to specify the G45 - G48 commands before specifying a hole
machining canned cycle.
6. The offset amount is cleared to "0" when "D0" is specified.
B-72 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
(G91) G45 X100.0 D1;
Start point Specified point End point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The G45 command increases the
distance by the amount set in the
TOOL OFFSET screen.
100 30 Movement command +100.0

Offset amount (D1) +30.0
130

Ex.
End point (G91) G46 X100.0 D1;
Start point Specified point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The G46 command decreases the
distance by the amount set in the
TOOL OFFSET screen.
100 Offset amount (D1) +30.0

Ex.
(G91) G47 X100.0 D1;
Start point End point Specified point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The G47 command increases the
distance by the double amount set in
the TOOL OFFSET screen.
Movement command +100.0

100 60
160

Ex.
(G91) G48 X100.0 D1;
Start point End point Specified point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The G48 command decreases the
distance by the double amount set in
the TOOL OFFSET screen.

100
G FUNCTIONS B-73
21 G50, G51 REDUCING AND ENLARGING THE SHAPE (SCALING)
+Y The shape specified by the program can be reduced or

enlarged (scaling).
P4 P3 After programming the shape P1P2P3P4 shown in the
P’4 P’3 illustration to the left, execute the scaling function to the
programmed shape to obtain the shape P'1P'2P'3P'4.
P’1 P’2
Specifying the G50 command cancels the G51 mode.
P1 P2
+X NOTE
The scaling function can be used to machine the

workpieces having the similar shape.
COMMAND
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_ ;
G50;
• G51 . . . . . . . . Specifies scaling.
• G50 . . . . . . . . Cancels the scaling.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value of the center of scaling (absolute
value).
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the magnification ratio (without decimal point).
CAUTION 1. Specify the G51 command without other commands in a block.

After completion of scaling, be sure to cancel the scaling mode by specifying the
G50 command.
2. Before specifying the automatic zero return command (G27, G28, G29, G30 and
G92), be sure to cancel the scaling mode by G50.
B-74 G FUNCTIONS
1. A decimal point cannot be input when magnification ratio is specified following

NOTE
address P.
Least input increment (0.001 or 0.00001) is set by parameter No. 5400.7.
Least input increment is 0.001: . . . . . . . . 10.587 times: P10587
Least input increment is 0.00001: . . . . . . 3.5 times: P350000
2. If P is omitted, magnification ratio set for parameter No. 5411 is applied.
3. If the coordinate values X, Y, and Z of the center of scaling are omitted, the present
point is taken as the center of scaling.
4. If a different scale factor is set for the individual axes, change the setting for
parameter No. 5400.6. In this case, set the scale factor of the individual axes to the
address characters indicated below.
• Address I for X-axis
• Address J for Y-axis
• Address K for Z-axis
With addresses I, J, and K, it is not allowed to use a decimal point as with address P.
The least input increment set for address P is applied to these addresses.
Addresses I, J, and K must not be omitted.
5. If scaling is executed for the circular interpolation with a different scale factor set for
the individual axes, an ellipse is not generated.
6. In the scaling mode, the coordinate values are displayed for the shape after scaling.
7. Whether the scaling function is valid or invalid for each axis is set for parameters No.
5401.0.
8. In Z-axis movement in the hole machining canned cycle, scaling can not be applied
to the following movements.
• Depth of cut Q and retraction amount d in the high-speed deep hole drilling
cycle (G73)
• Depth of cut Q and clearance amount d in the deep hole drilling cycle (G83)
• Shift amount Q or I and J at the bottom of hole in the fine boring cycle (G76)
• Shift amount Q or I and J of a tool in the back boring cycle (G87)
9. In the G51 mode, subsequent movement commands are reduced or enlarged by the
magnification ratio specified by P taking the point specified by X, Y, and Z as the
center of scaling.
10. Scaling is not applied to the offset data for such as cutter radius offset, tool length
offset, and tool position offset.
G FUNCTIONS B-75
Programming using G50 and G51 (scaling)

Ex.
To machine the shape 1' 2' 3' 4' specifying scaling to the shape 1 2 3 4 shown in the following
illustration.
Program is created with the least input increment of 0.001 mm.

NOTE
+Y
2 200 1
100
2’ 1’
(X0, Y0)
+X
−200 −100 100 200
3’ 4’
−100
3 −200 4
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
G51 X0 Y0 P500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying scaling of 0.5-time magnification taking the
workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) as the center of scaling.
X200.0 Y200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . As scaling is applied to the shape 1 2 3
G01 Z−30.0 F500; 4, the shape 1' 2' 3' 4' is machined.
X−200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y−200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Y200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G00 Z30.0;
G50; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the scaling mode.
B-76 G FUNCTIONS
22 G50, G51 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE
+Y For the symmetrical shape as shown left, create the

program having shape A as the sub-program. It is
possible to create program of shapes B, C, and D with
B A
G51 command.
Specifying G50 cancels G51.
+X G50 and G51 commands are optional.

NOTE
Just like reflecting a shape in the mirror, other

C D shape is programmed. Therefore, this function is
called programmable mirror image.
COMMAND
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
G50;
• G51 . . . . . . . . Specifies programmable mirror image.
• G50 . . . . . . . . Cancels the programmable mirror image.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the axis and center of symmetry.
The mirror image function is applied taking the specified

NOTE
axis as the axis of symmetry and the point of the
specified coordinate value as the center of symmetry.
• I, J, K . . . . . . . Specifies the scale factor of each axis.
Specify a scale factor in a negative value for the axis for

NOTE
which mirror image is applied.
Address I for X-axis, address J for Y-axis, and address K

for Z-axis
CAUTION 1. Specify the G51 command in a block without other commands.

Cancel the mirror image function by specifying the G50 command after the
completion of mirror image.
2. Before specifying the G27, G28, G29, G30, or G92 command, cancel the mirror
image mode by specifying the G50 command.
G FUNCTIONS B-77
1. To use the programmable image function by specifying the G51 command, make
NOTE
appropriate setting for the following parameters.
• No. 5400.6 . . . . . . . This parameter selects the mode of programmable image
processing (point symmetry or symmetry with respect to
line).
• No. 5401.0 . . . . . . . If the setting for No. 5400.6 is "symmetry with respect to
line", "1" must be set for this parameter.
• No. 5400.7 . . . . . . . Selects the command unit of programmable image scale
factor from 0.001 and 0.00001.
2. The mirror image function can be specified by using the setting function in addition to
the G51 command.
If the mirror image function is set on the SETTING screen, it becomes valid after the
execution of the G51 (programmable mirror image) command.
3. When mirror image is specified to only the single axis of the specified plane,
commands are as follows.
• Circular COMMAND. . . . . . . G02 (Clockwise direction) and G03
(Counterclockwise direction) become opposite.
• Cutter radius offset. . . . . . . . G41 (left offset) and G42 (right offset) become
opposite.
• Coordinate rotation. . . . . . . . Rotation angle becomes opposite.
4. If the mirror image function is applied to a hole machining canned cycle, the mirror
image function is invalid for some of arguments as indicated below.
• In the fine boring cycle (G76), the mirror image function is invalid for the shift
amount Q or I and J at the bottom of hole.
• In the back boring cycle (G87), the mirror image function is invalid for the tool
shift amount Q or I and J.
5. Addresses I, J, and K must not be omitted.
6. After specifying the G51 or G50 command, the first axis movement must be
specified by an absolute command.
B-78 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To create the program for machining the shape A, B, C, and D in the following illustration.
Separate the program in main program and sub-program, and input the shape A to the
sub-program (O0002).
Then, call the sub-program (O0002) in the main program (O0001), use the mirror image function
and create the program for the shape B, C, and D.
Set "0" for Z of parameter No. 5401.0.

NOTE
+Y
3
80
B 1 A
60 2
50
C D
+X
50 60 100
Sub-program (O0002)
O0002; (Shape A)
G01 Z−30.0 F120;
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of 120
mm/min
mm/min
X60.0 Y60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 at a feedrate of 120
mm/min
G00 Z10.0;
M99;
G FUNCTIONS B-79
Main program (O0001)

O0001; (Machine the shape A, B, C, and D)
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape A.
G51 X50.0 Y50.0 I−1.0 J1.0; . . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of X-axis
making X50.0 as the symmetric axis.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape B.
With the commands above, shape A in

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape B.
G51 X50.0 Y50.0 I−1.0 J−1.0; . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of X- and
Y-axes making X50.0, Y50.0 as the symmetric axis.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining
shape C.

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape C.
G51 X50.0 Y50.0 I1.0 J−1.0; . . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of Y-axis
making Y50.0 as the symmetric axis.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape D.

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape D.
G50; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the mirror image
B-80 G FUNCTIONS
23 G50.1, G51.1 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE
+Y For the symmetrical shape as shown left, create the

program having shape A as the sub-program. It is
possible to create program of shapes B, C, and D with
B A
G51.1 command.
Specifying G50.1 cancels G51.1.
+X G50.1 and G51.1 commands are optional.

NOTE
Just like reflecting a shape in the mirror, other

C D shape is programmed. Therefore, this function is
called programmable mirror image.
COMMAND
G51.1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G51.1 . . . . . . . Specifies programmable mirror image.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the axis and center of symmetry.
The mirror image function is applied taking the specified

NOTE
axis as the axis of symmetry and the point of the
specified coordinate value as the center of symmetry.
COMMAND
G50.1 X_ (Y_ Z_ );
• G50.1 . . . . . . . Cancels the programmable mirror image.
• X (Y, Z) . . . . . . Specifies an axis for which the mirror image function is canceled.
Since the coordinate value specified following address

X, Y, and Z is ignored, the commands are specified as
X0, Y0, or Z0.
1. The mirror image function can be specified by using the setting function in addition to
NOTE
the G51.1 command.
If the mirror image function is set on the SETTING screen, it becomes valid after the
execution of the G51.1 (programmable mirror image) command.
2. When mirror image is specified to only the single axis of the specified plane,
commands are as follows.
• Circular COMMAND. . . . . G02 (clockwise direction) and G03
(counterclockwise direction) become opposite.
• Cutter radius offset. . . . . . G41 (left offset) and G42 (right offset) become
opposite.
• Coordinate rotation. . . . . . Rotation angle becomes opposite.
G FUNCTIONS B-81
3. The G50.1 and G51.1 commands must not be specified in the scaling or coordinate
NOTE
rotation mode.
If programmable mirror image, scaling, and coordinate rotation are specified in the
same block, they are executed in this order and, therefore, the G commands should
be specified in the order of G51.1, G51, and G68. To cancel them, specify the G
commands in the order of G69, G50, and G50.1.
4. After specifying the G51.1 or G50.1 command, the first axis movement must be
specified by an absolute command.
Programming using G50.1 and G51.1

Ex.
To create the program for machining the shape A, B, C, and D in the following diagram.
Separate the program in main program and sub-program, and input the shape A to the
sub-program (O0002).
Then, call the sub-program (O0002) in the main program (O0001), use the mirror image function
and create the program for the shape B, C, and D.
+Y
3
80
B 1 A
60 2
50
C D
+X
50 60 100
Sub-program (O0002)
O0002; (Shape A)
G01 Z−30.0 F120;
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of 120
mm/min
mm/min
X60.0 Y60.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 at a feedrate of 120
mm/min
G00 Z10.0;
M99;
B-82 G FUNCTIONS

O0001; (Machine the shape A, B, C, and D)
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape A.
G51.1 X50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of X-axis
making X50.0 as the symmetric axis.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape B.

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape B.
G51.1 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of X- and
Y-axes making X50.0, Y50.0 as the symmetric axis.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining
shape C.

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape C.
G50.1 X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the mirror image in the minus direction of Y-axis
making Y50.0 as the symmetric axis.
X-axis mirror image is canceled.

NOTE
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O2 (O0002) and machining shape D.

NOTE
sub-program O2 (O0002) is changed to shape D.
G50.1 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the mirror image
Y-axis mirror image is canceled. This cancels the

NOTE
mirror image function for all axes.
G FUNCTIONS B-83
24 G52 SETTING THE LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM
It is possible to shift the workpiece zero point of the

program created in the work coordinate system (G54 -
G59) to establish more number of coordinate systems.
Even if the G52 local coordinate system is set, the original
work coordinate system (G54 - G59) is not affected.
Use a G52 local coordinate system when the number of
work coordinate systems set by G54 to G59 is not
sufficient for the intended operation.
COMMAND
G52 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G52 . . . . . . . . Sets a local coordinate system.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the amount to shift the work coordinate system.
The position is zero point of the local coordinate system.
1. The local coordinate system is canceled by the following operations.

NOTE
• When "G52 X0 Y0 Z0;" is executed.

• When all axes are returned to the zero point manually.
2. A local coordinate system is not canceled by the operation of the RESET (RESET) key
or when the NC is reset. Therefore, it is necessary to specify the local coordinate
system cancel command (G52 X0 Y0 Z0;) in the program to use a local coordinate
system.
If NC parameter is set as "NC parameter No. 1202.3 = 1", however, reset operation
cancels a local coordinate system.
3. If the G52 command is specified in the cutter radius offset mode (G41 or G42), the
cutter radius offset mode is temporarily canceled.
4. When the G52 command is specified, the first axis movement command after the
execution of it must be specified in absolute values.
5. When a local coordinate system is set by specifying the G52 command, the work
coordinate system and the machine coordinate system is not influenced by the set
local coordinate system.
B-84 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To machine 8 holes of 5 mm deep using a 10 mm dia. drill.
Four 10 mm dia. holes, equally spaced on 30 mm Workpiece zero point for G54 (X0, Y0)
dia. circle.
Y
2
30
1
X
3 Y’
φ 30
40
2’
4
1’
X’
3’
φ 30
40
4’
30 50 40
Workpiece zero point for G52 (X'0, Y'0)
Sub-program (O0002)
O0002;
X15.0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X0 Y15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X−15.0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X0 Y−15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
M99;

O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F100 K0;
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling is executed at each position of 1, 2, 3, and 4.
G52 X50.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By shifting the workpiece zero point, the local coordinate
system X'-Y' is established.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling is executed at each position of 1', 2', 3', and 4'.
G52 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local coordinate system (G52) is canceled.
Work coordinate system (G54) becomes valid.

NOTE
G80;
G FUNCTIONS B-85
25 G53 SELECTING THE MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
The machine coordinate system means the coordinate system having its origin at the machine
zero point of X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
For the machine equipped with sensor or when using the special fixtures, it is possible to move a
cutting tool to a fixed position at rapid traverse by specifying the G53 command. Also specify the
G53 command to move the table to the machine center before finishing the machining.
The machine coordinate values of the axes can be confirmed by the present position
(machine coordinate) displayed on the screen.
COMMAND
G90 G53 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G53 . . . . . . . . Selects the machine coordinate system.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value in the machine coordinate
system.
1. The G53 command is a "00" group command.

NOTE
The G53 command is one-shot code. It is valid only in the specified block.
2. The G53 command is valid in the G90 (absolute command) mode, but is invalid in
the G91 (incremental command) mode.
3. Before specifying the G53 command, cancel the cutter radius offset, tool length
offset and tool position offset modes.

Ex.
To end a program after moving the table at the center of X-axis travel (X-axis travel: 600 mm,
Y-axis travel: 410 mm)
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S300 T2;
M03;
Machining program
G91 G28 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle after the completion of zero point
return of the Z-axis
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the spindle tool with T2 tool
G90 G53 X−300.0 Y−205.0; . . . . . . . . . The table moves to the center of X- and Y- axis travel at a
rapid traverse rate.
M30;
B-86 G FUNCTIONS
26 G54, G54.1 SETTING THE ADDITIONAL WORK COORDINATE

SYSTEM
By using the additional work coordinate system function,

additional 48 or 300 sets of work coordinate systems can
be used in addition to the six work coordinate system set
and called by G54 - G59.
If the number of work coordinate systems to be used is
insufficient due to multiple workpiece setup operation, use
the G54 command. The additional work coordinate
systems can be set in the same manner as setting the
standard work coordinate systems (G54 to G59).
The additional work coordinate systems called by

NOTE
the G54 and G54.1 commands are optional.
COMMAND
G54 P_ X_ Y_ ;
G54.1 P_ X_ Y_ ;
• G54, G54.1. . . Selects an additional work coordinate system.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . (Additional 48 sets of work coordinate systems)
Specifies a number in the range from 1 to 48.
(Additional 300 sets of work coordinate systems)
Specifies a number in the range from 1 to 300.
A number in the range from 1 to 48 or from 1 to 300

should be specified to select the additional work
coordinate system to be used.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value in the selected work coordinate
system.
1. When power is turned on, the G54 work coordinate system is selected.
NOTE
2. Specify address P after the G54.1 (G54) command. If address P is not specified
following the G54.1 command in the same block, additional coordinate system 1
(G54.1 P1) is selected.
3. If a value outside the allowable range is specified for address P, an alarm message
(No. 030) is displayed on the screen.
G FUNCTIONS B-87
The origin of an additional work coordinate system can be shifted by executing the
following commands.
G10 L20 P_ X_ Y_ ;
• G10 L20. . . . . . . . . Calls the additional work coordinate system shift mode.
• P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Additional 48 sets of work coordinate systems)
Selects the additional work coordinate system from additional
work coordinate systems 1 to 48.
(Additional 300 sets of work coordinate systems)
Selects the additional work coordinate system from additional
work coordinate systems 1 to 300.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction of the workpiece zero point
in the new work coordinate system in reference to the machine
zero point.
(G90): Specifies the distance from the machine zero point to
the workpiece zero point of the additional work
coordinate system to be set newly. The specified
values are taken as the new offset amount.
(G91): Specifies the distance and direction from the origin in
the present work coordinate system to the workpiece
zero point of the additional work coordinate system to
be set newly. The specified values are added to the
present offset amount.
B-88 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G54 or G54.1 (Additional work coordinate system)

Ex.
To machine two workpieces, mounted on one face of the angle plate, by setting the individual
additional work coordinate systems.
+Y +Y
Angle plate
+X +X
G54 P1, G54.1 P1 G54 P2, G54.1 P2
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54(G54.1) P1 X0 Y0; . . . . . Positioning at the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) of No. 1
additional work coordinate system at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S500 T2;
M03;
Machining program
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54(G54.1) P2 X0 Y0; . . . . . Positioning at the workpiece zero point (X0, Y0) of No. 2
additional work coordinate system at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H2 S800 T3;
M03;
Machining program
G FUNCTIONS B-89
27 G60 UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING
1 2 With this command, positioning is always carried out from

X the fixed direction.
0 10 20
As shown in the illustration, positioning at X10.0 in made
different directions as in 1 and 2 will cause the X-axis
to be positioned with a slight error between these two
positioning operations due to backlash and other factors.
In the G60 mode, since positioning is always carried out
from the fixed direction, positioning accuracy is ensured.
The G60 command is standard for the U-axis

NOTE
control specification.
For other machines, the G60 command is
optional.
Specify the G60 command when accurate

positioning is required in such as carrying out
boring at multiple positions.
COMMAND
G60 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
• G60 . . . . . . . . Calls the uni-directional positioning mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point at a rapid
traverse rate.
Overrun stroke
Start point
Start point
End point
1. The G60 command is a "00" group command.

NOTE
It can be changed to a modal G code in "01" group by setting "1" for parameter No.
5431.0.
2. Uni-directional positioning for the Z-axis is not possible during hole machining
canned cycle.
3. Uni-directional positioning for the axis to be shifted in the canned cycle G76 or G87
is not possible.
4. Uni-directional positioning for the axis to which overrun stroke is not set for the
parameter is not possible.
B-90 G FUNCTIONS
NOTE
5. Uni-directional positioning for the axis for which travel is set to 0 is not possible.
6. The overrun stroke and the direction for positioning are set using parameter No.
5440.
7. The mirror image function is not valid for the positioning direction which is set using a
parameter.
8. If the direction of positioning specified in the program is the same direction as the
positioning direction set for the parameter, an axis stops once at a point away from
the specified end point by the "overrun stroke" which is set for the parameter. After
that positioning is made at the specified end point.
9. When G76 fine boring cycle or G87 back boring cycle is executed in the
uni-directional positioning mode, set the tool shift direction opposite to the direction
in which positioning has been made. Since uni-directional positioning is not
executed on tool shift axis in G76 and G87 cycles, if tool shift direction is set in the
same direction as the uni-directional positioning direction, the axis does not return to
the positioning point when it returns by the shift amount at the initial or R-point level
at the end of machining. This means that the axis position will be offset due to
backlash and other causes.
Tool shift direction and axis are set for parameters No. 5101.4 and No. 5101.5,
individually.

Ex.
To carry out hole machining at hole positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the illustration below.
Positioning direction and overrun stroke to be set for parameter No. 5440 are X+1.0 mm,
NOTE
Y+1.0 mm.
+Y
30 30
2 1
20
+X
20
3 4
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y20.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
G FUNCTIONS B-91
G60 X30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-directional positioning at point 1 from the +X direction

at a rapid traverse rate
1 (X30.0, Y20.0) (X50.0, Y20.0)
1.0 mm
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 1
Spot drilling cycle (G81) is executed at points 2, 3,

and 4 which are reached by the axis movement
commands specified in the blocks before G80
block.
G60 X−30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-directional positioning at point 2 from the +X direction
2 (X−30.0, Y20.0) 1 (X30.0, Y20.0)
1.0 mm
G60 Y−20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-directional positioning at point 3 from the +Y direction

2 (X−30.0, Y20.0)
3 (X−30.0, Y−20.0)
1.0 mm
X30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-directional positioning at point 4 from the +X direction

3 (X−30.0, Y−20.0) 4 (X30.0, Y−20.0)
1.0 mm
Since the positioning direction of "from +X-axis" is

NOTE
set for the parameter, positioning is executed in
the same manner as in simple positioning from
point 3 to point 4. The X-axis once stops at a
point 1.0 mm before point 4 and then it is
positioned to point 4.
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the spot drilling cycle (G81)
B-92 G FUNCTIONS
28 G65, G66, G66.1, G67 USING MACRO PROGRAMS
<Macro program>
In this section, a macro program is explained. Although it

O0001; seems difficult, it provides very convenient functions for
#1 = 0;
programming.
#2 = #1 + 1;
WHILE[...] D01; It is strongly recommended that the basic concept of
... ... ...
macro programs should be thoroughly understood so that

programming may be simplified.
M99
COMMAND
G65(G66, G66.1) P_ L_ <Argument assignment>;
G67;
• G65 . . . . . . . . . Calls the macro call mode (one-shot command).
• G66 . . . . . . . . . Calls the macro call mode (modal command).
(call after execution of axis movement commands)
• G66.1 . . . . . . . . Calls the macro call mode (modal command).
(call in each block)
• G67 . . . . . . . . . Cancels the modal macro call mode, called by G66 or G66.1.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the macro program number to be called.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of macro program calls.
(If it is omitted, the specified macro program is called one time.)
• Argument assignment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies argument (A to Z) and value.
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied
by the NC unit manufacturer.
G FUNCTIONS B-93
1. Macro program is executed only in the block where G65 is specified.

NOTE
2. If the G66 command is specified, macro program is executed each time an axis
movement command is executed until this mode is canceled by the G67 command.
3. If the G66.1 command is specified, macro program is executed at each block after
the execution of commands in it until this mode is canceled by the G67 command.
4. In the G65, G66 and G66.1 blocks, the G65, G66 and G66.1 commands must be
specified preceding all arguments.
5. The G67 command is not related to G65.
6. The G66 or G66.1 block and the G67 block must be specified in the same program.
7. The G65 command cannot be specified with the G66, G66.1 or G67 command in the
same block.
8. Some of the characters used in a macro program are special characters. ("#", "*",
and "/" are examples of these special characters.) Since they are not supported by
the EIA code, it is not possible to use the EIA code for input/output of a macro
program. Therefore, a macro program must be created in the ISO code.
9. In the G66.1 mode, all codes other than O (program number), N (sequence number),
and G codes are not executed but they are treated as arguments. However, if more
than one G code or address N is specified in a single block, they are processed in
the following manner.
• G code . . . . . The G code specified last is treated as an argument.
• Address N . . Address N, other than the first one, is all treated as an
argument.
G66.1 P_ ;
N100 G90 G01 X_ Y_ F_ N200 . . . . . . G01 and N200 are both treated as an
Argument Argument
argument.
10. G66.1 (call in each block) is provided as an optional function with custom B macro.
1. The number of program repetition is max. 9999.

2. NC data such as G, M, F and T codes can be specified with variable.
G#1, M#2, F#3, T#7
B-94 G FUNCTIONS
<Use Macro Programs in the following cases>
+Y The illustration left shows typical example of drilling

90 4 operations for which programming can be simplified if a
90 5 85 macro program is used.
3 Drilling operation at six positions requires the program to
6
2 be written as indicated below if a macro program is not
1 used.
40° (X100.0, Y50.0)

+X
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
G98 G81 Z−10.0 R3.0 F100 K0;. . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81)
X100.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a
rapid traverse rate
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 2 at a
rapid traverse rate Drilling operation of 1 to 6
.....................
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 6 at a
rapid traverse rate
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the spot drilling cycle (G81)
G FUNCTIONS B-95
Troublesome calculation is required to get the coordinate

+Y D
values of holes 2 to 6.
4
H
U If angle 40° or position of hole 1 (X100.0, Y50.0) is
5 V
3 changed, the coordinate values of other holes must be
6
calculated again.
2
1 A macro program can be effectively in such case. That is,
when carrying out machining operation using the same
pattern, changes in dimensions do not require the
Q (X, Y) program to be written again. The macro program
+X
calculates the coordinate values necessary for program
execution by simply entering the data necessary for the
calculation by the macro program.
If the pattern shown above is defined by macro program
O1000, the program to execute drilling at the six positions
is written as indicated below.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
(G98) G81 Z−10.0 R3.0 F100 K0;
G65 P1000 X100.0 Y50.0 U180.0 V85.0 H2 D3 Q40.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One-shot macro call commands
• P . . . . . . . Specifies the macro program number to
be called.
• X - Q . . . . Arguments
G80;
Macro program (O1000)

O1000;
#1 = 0;
WHILE [#1 LE #4] D01;
#5 = #21∗#2/#3;
#6 = 1 − 2∗#10;
END1;
M99;
B-96 G FUNCTIONS
A macro program is created by combining the variables and qualifications which are expressed in
[ ].
Note that variables "#_ " are used in a macro program while arguments "A, B, C, ... X, Y, Z" are
used in a main program.
Since a combination between argument and variable is fixed such as "A = #1, B = #2", the value
specified for an argument in the main program is assigned to the corresponding variable in the
macro program.
The macro program indicated above is only for reference purpose and cannot be used for
NOTE
actual operation.
The symbol of "#_ " used in a program indicates a "variable". Variables are used in a
macro program.
For details of combination between arguments and variables, refer to the instruction
manual supplied by the NC unit manufacturer.
Programming using G65, G66 and G67

Ex.
1) To carry out the same machining at four holes:
+Y
(0, 0)
+X
φ 20
+Y
(100, 0) (200, 0)
+X
(50, −40) Operation pattern
in a hole
First, create the program for the pattern to be executed in a hole.

O8000; 4 2
Z−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 1
+Y
G91 G01 Y#1 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3

+X
G02 J−#1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G01 Y−#1;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G90 G00 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of program
G FUNCTIONS B-97
Next, create the main program for hole machining at four hole positions.
+Y
1 (0, 0) 3 (200, 0)
+X
2 (100, 0)
4 (50, −40)
Main program using G66 (O0001)

O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G66 P8000 A10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Value "10.0" given for argument A is input to variable #1 in
the macro program No. 8000 and the macro program is
executed based on this value.
1. Since the G66 command is the modal macro

call command, the macro program No. 8000
is executed at the positions 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2. Argument "A" corresponds to variable "#1".
X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program No. 8000 at point 1
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program No. 8000 at point 2
X200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program No. 8000 at point 3
X50.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program No. 8000 at point 4
G67; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the macro call command
B-98 G FUNCTIONS
1. Even when the G65 command is used, macro programs remain unchanged.
NOTE
2. Since the G65 command is a one-shot G code, it is valid only in the specified block.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G65 P8000 A10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program (O8000) at point 1 by
entering "10.0" for #1 in the macro program
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program (O8000) at point 2 by
G65 P8000 A10.0; entering "10.0" for #1 in the macro program
X50.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program (O8000) at point 4 by
Main program using M98 (sub-program call) (O0001)
Compare the following with the macro program which uses G66.
It is found that the program using G66 is shorter than the one using M98.
For details of M98 (Sub-program call), refer to page C-19 (8)
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
M98 P100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing sub-program O0100 at point 1
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing sub-program O0100 at point 2
M98 P100;
X200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing sub-program O0100 at point 3

M98 P100;
X50.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing sub-program O0100 at point 4

M98 P100;
G FUNCTIONS B-99
Sub-program (O0100)
O0100;
Z−10.0;
G91 G01 Y10.0 F100;
G02 J−10.0;
G01 Y−10.0;
G90 G00 Z10.0;
M99;
2) To create the macro program for the application where the holes have different diameters
while the pattern is similar to that used in 1).
+Y
(0, 0) φ 26 φ 30
+X
+Y
φ 20
(100, 0) (200, 0)
+X
Operation pattern
φ 32 (50, −40)
in a hole
First, create the program for the pattern in a hole.

O8000;
Z−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G91 G01 Y#1 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 2
G02 J−#1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 1
+Y
G01 Y−#1;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3
G90 G00 Z10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 +X
M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of program

B-100 G FUNCTIONS
Next, create the main program for hole machining at four hole positions.
+Y
1 (0, 0) 3 (200, 0)
+X
2 (100, 0)
4 (50, −40)

O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G65 P8000 A10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program (O8000) at point 1 by
entering "10.0" for #1 in the macro program (10 mm
radius hole)
G65 P8000 A13.0; entering "13.0" for #1 in the macro program (13 mm
radius hole)
radius hole)
X50.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the macro program (O8000) at point 4 by
radius hole)
Variable "#1" in the macro program O8000 corresponds to the value of address A at points 1 to 4.
By using a variable in a macro program in this manner, similar machining can be executed with a
relatively short program by simply changing the value to be assigned to the variable.
If the M98 command is used, the same operation cannot be defined in such a short program since
it is used for simple execution of a sub-program.
The basic of macro programs would have been understood.
A macro program is created by the combination of variables (#) and qualifications ([ ]).
To use a macro program efficiently, complicated combination of macro programs is necessary.
Read and observe the caution items which are specified in the manuals supplied by the NC unit
manufacturer when creating a macro program.
G FUNCTIONS B-101
29 G68, G69 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION
The programmed shape can be rotated in an arbitrary angle using the G68 command.
Specifying the G69 command cancels this function.

NOTE
Use this function in the following cases:
+Y 1. For a shape difficult to calculate the coordinate

1
values:
When programming shape 1, first program shape 2
and rotate it using the G68 command.
+X
+Y 1
2
+X
Rotation angle
Center of rotation
Rotation angle 2. For a shape which can be defined by rotating other

+Y
2 shape:
3 After programming shape 1, rotate it to define shape
1
2 and shape 3 using the G68 command. The shape
2 and shape 3 can be programmed easily by using
the coordinate rotation function.
+X
Center of rotation
COMMAND 1. Coordinate rotation on XY plane

G17 G68 X_ Y_ R_ ;
G69;
2. Coordinate rotation on ZX plane
G18 G68 X_ Z_ R_ ;
G69;
3. Coordinate rotation on YZ plane
G19 G68 Y_ Z_ R_ ;
G69;
B-102 G FUNCTIONS
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane in which the coordinate system is
rotated.
• G68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the coordinate rotation function.
• G69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the coordinate rotation function.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value of the center of rotation
(absolute value).
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle of rotation.
The counterclockwise direction is the positive (+)

direction.
1. Do not change the plane selected by (G17 - G19) in the coordinate system rotation
NOTE
mode.
2. The coordinate values of the center of rotation should be specified in absolute
values. If these values are specified in incremental values, the point where the G68
command is specified is taken as the center of rotation.
3. If the center of rotation is omitted, the point where the G68 command is specified is
taken as the center of rotation.
4. Whether the rotation angle is specified in an absolute value or an incremental value
is selected by the setting for parameter No. 5400.0.
5. The minimum setting unit and programmable range of rotation angle is given below.
Minimum Setting Unit Programmable Range
0.001° −360.000° − 360.000°
6. If address R is omitted, the value set for parameter No. 5410 is taken as the rotation
angle.
7. Offset motion such as cutter radius offset, tool length offset, and tool position offset
is executed after the execution of the rotation.
8. The G68 and G69 commands can be specified in the cutter radius offset mode. The
plane in which the rotation is executed and the one in which the cutter radius offset is
executed must be the same plane.
9. When the G68 command is specified in the scaling mode (G51 mode), scaling is
also applied to the coordinate values of the center of rotation. However, scaling is
not applied to the rotation angle.
For the movement commands, coordinate rotation is executed after the execution of
scaling. Accordingly, the commands in the program must be specified in the
following order.
G51;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling mode
G68;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate rotation valid
G69;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate rotation invalid

G50;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling mode cancel
10. When the G69 command is specified, the first axis movement command after the
execution of it must be specified in absolute values.
G FUNCTIONS B-103
11. The G68 command cannot be specified if both of the cutter radius offset function
NOTE
(G41 or G42 mode) and the scaling function (G51 mode) are called.
Specify the G68 command before specifying the cutter radius offset function.
G51;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling mode
G68;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate rotation valid
G41;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutter radius offset

B-104 G FUNCTIONS

Ex.
When programming the shape of 1 2 3 4 it will take much time to calculate the coordinate values of
point 2, 3, and 4. In this case, create the program for the shape of 1' 2' 3' 4' and rotate it to the
original shape of 1 2 3 4.
+Y
50 3 ’ (30.0, 50.0)
2 2’
R20
(10.0, 50.0)
4 30
20 4 ’ (30.0, 20.0)
1
(10.0, 20.0)
+X
10 30
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
X10.0 Y20.0;
G01 Z−3.0 F200;
G68 (X10.0 Y20.0) R30.0; . . . . . . . . . . Calling the coordinate rotation function
The coordinate values of the center of rotation is point 1
(X10.0, Y20.0) and the rotation angle is 30°.
As a cutting tool is at the rotation center,

commands in ( ) can be omitted.
Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . Specifying the shape of 1' 2' 3' 4' by defining it in the order
of 2' → 3' → 4' → 1
By rotating the coordinate using the G68

X30.0; NOTE
command, commands in these blocks are used
G03 Y20.0 R20.0;
for the program of shape 2 → 3 → 4 → 1.
G01 X10.0;
G69; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the coordinate rotation function

The shape of 1 2 3 4 is programmed.
G FUNCTIONS B-105
30 G72.1 COPY BY ROTATION
The function of the G72.1 command is explained below

using the star-shape illustrated to the left as an example.
1 By rotating the shape 1 72° sequentially, shapes 2, 3, 4,

and 5 are defined. The copy by rotation function uses this
principle.
The program defining the shape 1 should be created as a
sub-program and shape 1 is rotated to define shapes 2 to
5; the program of these shapes is created by this rotation.
5 1
The G72.1 command is optional.
NOTE
4 2 When machining a shape which can be defined by

copying the original shape by rotation, use of the
3 G72.1 command can simplify programming.
COMMAND 1. Copy by rotation on XY plane

G17 G72.1 P_ L_ X_ Y_ R_ ;
2. Copy by rotation on ZX plane
G18 G72.1 P_ L_ X_ Z_ R_ ;
3. Copy by rotation on YZ plane
G19 G72.1 P_ L_ Y_ Z_ R_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Sets the plane where copy by rotation is executed.
• G72.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the copy by rotation function.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the sub-program number.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
If it is omitted, the specified sub-program is called one
time.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of center of rotation
(absolute value).
• R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle of rotation (incremental value).
The counterclockwise rotation is "+".

B-106 G FUNCTIONS
1. A movement command must be specified in the first block of the sub-program for
NOTE
which copy by rotation is executed.
If the first block contains only the program number without a movement command,
there are cases that axis movement stops at the start point of the copied shape in
the nth-time (n = 1, 2, 3,.......) copy processing.
The first axis movement command must always be specified in absolute values.
<Wrong example>
O1000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No movement commands in the first
block
G90 G01 X100.0 Y200.0;
M99;
<Correct example>
O1000 G90 G01 X100.0 Y200.0; . . . . . . Movement commands specified in the
first block
M99;
2. If the G72.1 command in the sub-program which is subjected to the copy by rotation
processing of G72.1 command is specified again, an alarm message (No. 160) is
displayed on the screen.
3. It is allowed to specify the G72.2 command (copy by shift) in the sub-program which
is subjected to the copy by rotation processing by G72.1 command.
Similarly, it is allowed to specify the G72.1 command (copy by rotation) in the
sub-program which is subjected to the copy by shift processing by the G72.2
command.
4. It is allowed to specify the sub-program call (M98) and macro call (G65) in the
sub-program which is subjected to the copy by rotation processing by the G72.1
command.
5. The coordinate values of the center of rotation should be specified by absolute
commands. Even if incremental commands are used to specify the coordinate
values of the center of rotation, they are regarded as the absolute commands.
6. Use incremental values for specifying the angle of rotation (R). The rotation angle in
the nth time rotation is "R × (n − 1)".
7. In the G72.1 block, single block stop is not allowed.
8. In the G72.1 block, addresses other than P, L, X, Y, Z, and R are ignored.
Be sure to specify the sub-program number (P), coordinate values of center of
rotation (X, Y, Z), and angle of rotation (R) in this block.
9. If the sub-program number which is specified by address P is not found, an alarm
message (No. 078) is displayed on the screen.
10. If the address P is not specified, an alarm message (No. 076) is displayed on the
screen.
G FUNCTIONS B-107
11. The following commands cannot be specified in the copy by rotation processing.
NOTE
• Plane selection command (G17, G18, G19)

• Polar coordinate commands
• Return to machine zero
• Programmable mirror image, scaling, and coordinate system rotation
(It is possible to specify the copy by rotation after specifying the programmable
mirror image, scaling, or coordinate system rotation.)
12. Do not use the cutter radius offset function (G41, G42) in a sub-program in which the
copy by rotation is executed.
13. In the sub-program for which copy is executed by rotation, it is not allowed to change
the tool offset amount (D and H codes). Changing the G92 and G54 - G59 modes is
not permitted, either. These modes and codes must be changed before the
execution of rotation.
14. If the end point in the nth time rotation for copy does not come to the start point of the
(n + 1)th time rotation for copy, in other words, if the specified angle of rotation is
incorrect, the axes move from the end point in the nth time rotation for copy to the
start point of the (n + 1)th time rotation for copy before the execution of copy
processing.
15. During arbitrary angle chamfering, corner rounding, or tool position offset mode, it is
not allowed to execute copy by rotation.
B-108 G FUNCTIONS
Programming using G72.1 (Copy by rotation)

Ex.
To create the program of shapes B and C by rotating the sub-program (O0100) which defines
shape A. Sub-program rotation is specified by G72.1 in main program (O0001).
+Y R10
A
5 4
Start point
6 3
120 1
7 2
+X
R30
B C
Creating the program of shape A (point 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7)

Sub-program (O0100)
O0100 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0;. . . . . . . . . . . 3
G01 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G03 X_ Y_ R10.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G01 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G03 X_ Y_ R30.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
M99;
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G41 G01 X_ Y_ D1 F100;. . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of 100 mm/
min; cutter radius offset (G41) function is used.
G17 G72.1 P100 L3 X0 Y0 R120.0; . . . Specifying copy by rotation
Executing copy by rotation; center of rotation (X0, Y0) and
angle of rotation (120°)
Since the final shape consists of shapes A, B, and

C, sub-program (O0100) is executed three times.
G40 G01 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the cutter radius offset function

G FUNCTIONS B-109
31 G72.2 COPY BY SHIFT
+Y The function of the G72.2 command is explained below

1 2 3
using the shape illustrated in the left.
If the same shape is arranged in the manner as shown in
the left, the program defining the shape 1 should be
created as a sub-program and shape 1 is shifted to define
+X shapes 2 and 3 ; the program of these shapes is created
in this manner.
The G72.2 command is optional.

NOTE
When machining a shape which can be defined by

copying the original shape by shift, use of the
G72.2 command can simplify programming.
COMMAND 1. Copy by shift on XY plane
G17 G72.2 P_ L_ I_ J_ ;
2. Copy by shift on ZX plane
G18 G72.2 P_ L_ I_ K_ ;
3. Copy by shift on YZ plane
G19 G72.2 P_ L_ J_ K_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Sets the plane where copy by shift is executed.
• G72.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the copy by shift function.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the sub-program number.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
If it is omitted, the specified sub-program is called one
time.
• I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the shift amount in the X-axis direction.
• J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the shift amount in the Y-axis direction.
• K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the shift amount in the Z-axis direction.
B-110 G FUNCTIONS
1. A movement command must be specified in the first block of the sub-program for
NOTE
which copy by shift is executed.
If the first block contains only the program number without a movement command,
there are cases that axis movement stops at the start point of the copied shape in
the nth-time (n = 1, 2, 3......) copy processing.
The first axis movement command must always be specified in absolute values.
<Wrong example>
O1000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No movement commands in the first
block
G90 G01 X100.0 Y200.0;
M99;
<Correct example>
O1000 G90 G01 X100.0 Y200.0; . . . . . . Movement commands specified in the
first block
M99;
2. If the G72.2 command in the sub-program which is subjected to the copy by shift
processing of G72.2 command is specified again, an alarm message (No. 161) is
3. It is allowed to specify the G72.1 command (copy by rotation) in the sub-program
which is subjected to the copy by shift processing by the G72.2 command.
Similarly, it is allowed to specify the G72.2 command (copy by shift) in the
sub-program which is subjected to the copy by rotation processing by the G72.1
command.
4. It is allowed to specify the sub-program call (M98) and macro call (G65) in the
sub-program which is subjected to the copy by shift processing by the G72.2
command.
5. Use incremental values for specifying the shift amount (I, J, and K). The shift
amount in the nth time shift is "(shift amount) × (n − 1)".
6. In the G72.2 block, single block stop is not allowed.
7. In the G72.2 block, addresses other than P, L, I, J, and K are ignored.
Be sure to specify the sub-program number (P) and shift amount (I, J, and K) in this
block.
8. If the sub-program number which is specified by address P is not found, an alarm
9. If the address P is not specified, an alarm message (No. 076) is displayed on the
screen.
G FUNCTIONS B-111
10. The following commands cannot be specified in the copy by shift processing.
NOTE
• Plane selection command (G17, G18, G19)

• Polar coordinate commands
• Return to machine zero
• Programmable mirror image, scaling, and coordinate system rotation
(It is possible to specify the copy by shift after specifying the programmable
mirror image, scaling, or coordinate system rotation.)
11. Do not use the cutter radius offset function (G41, G42) in a sub-program in which the
copy by shift is executed.
12. In the sub-program for which copy is executed by shift, it is not allowed to change
the tool offset amount (D and H codes). Changing the G92 and G54 - G59 modes is
not permitted, either. These modes and codes must be changed before the
execution of shift.
13. If the end point in the nth time shift for copy does not come to the start point of the (n
+ 1)th time shift for copy, in other words, if the specified shift amount is incorrect, the
axes move from the end point in the nth time shift for copy to the start point of the (n
+ 1)th time shift for copy before the execution of copy processing.
14. During arbitrary angle chamfering, corner rounding, or tool position offset mode, it is
not allowed to execute copy by shift.
Programming using G72.2 (Copy by shift)

Ex.
To create the program of shapes B and C by shifting the sub-program (O0100) which defines
shape A. Sub-program shift is specified by G72.2 in main program (O0001).
+Y
A B C
50 5 6 R20
3 8
20 2 4 7
10 20
Start point
9
+X
(−20.0, 0) 1 30 100 170 240
70 70 70
B-112 G FUNCTIONS
Creating the program of shape A (point 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8)

Sub-program (O0100)
O0100 G90 G01 X40.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . 4
Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G02 X80.0 R20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G01 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
X100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
M99;

O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S800 T2;
M03;
G17 X−20.0 Y0;
G41 G01 X20.0 D1 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 1 at a feedrate of
100 mm/min; cutter radius offset (G41) function is used.
Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 2 at a feedrate of
100 mm/min
X30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 3 at a feedrate of
100 mm/min
G72.2 P100 L3 I70.0 J0; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying copy by shift
Executing copy by shift; shift by 70 mm in the +X direction
Since the final shape consists of shapes A, B, and

C, sub-program (O0100) is executed three times.
X240.0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to point 9 at a feedrate of

100 mm/min
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the cutter radius offset function
G FUNCTIONS B-113
32 G08 LOOK AHEAD CONTROL
The look ahead control is used for high-speed, high-accuracy machining.

Usually, acceleration/deceleration becomes larger as feedrate becomes larger, which in turn
causes larger time delay to impair machining accuracy. The look ahead control suppresses such
time delay when acceleration/deceleration is increased to reduce error in machined shape under
fast feedrate machining.
The "G08 P1;" command calls the look ahead control mode.
The "G08 P0;" command cancels the look ahead control mode.
The G08 command is optional for MH series (includes U-axis control specification).
NOTE
With SH series, the quadrant-projection compensation is executed automatically without

specifying the G314 command when the look ahead control mode is executed.
COMMAND
G08 P1;
G08 P0;
• G08 P1; . . . . . Specifies look ahead control mode ON.
• G08 P0; . . . . . Specifies look ahead control mode OFF.
1. Specify the G08 command in a block without other commands.

NOTE
2. The look ahead control is canceled when the RESET (RESET) key is pressed.
3. In the look ahead control mode, the following functions become valid.
• Precede feed-forward function
The function to give the command anticipating the error between the
commands and actual movement.
• Automatic corner deceleration function
The function to maintain the programmed feedrate as long as possible by
reducing shocks at corners.
• Arc radius feedrate clamp function
The function to clamp the feedrate when cutting an arc of small radius, thereby
restricting acceleration of feed axes within the allowable limits to reduce
shocks to the machine.
• Pre-interpolation linear acceleration/deceleration function
• Post-interpolation linear acceleration/deceleration function
B-114 G FUNCTIONS
4. In the look ahead control mode, the following functions cannot be specified or used.
NOTE
To specify or use them, cancel the look ahead control mode.
• Rigid tapping • Rotary table indexing
• Feed per revolution • Thread cutting, synchronized
feed
• F1-digit feed • Pulse handle feed
• Polar coordinate interpolation • Program restart
• Cylindrical interpolation • Feed stop
• Involute interpolation • High-speed skip
• Exponential function interpolation • Constant surface speed control
• 3D coordinate conversion • Interruption type custom macro
• Normal direction control • Small diameter deep hole drilling
cycle
• Polar coordinate command • High-speed remote buffer

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S12000 T2;
M03;
Machining program
G08 P1;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the look ahead control mode

G01 X12.0 Y−10.0 F9600; . . . . . . . . . . Cutting to X12.0, Y−10.0 at a feedrate of 9600 mm/min
G02 X−28.0 R20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting an arc (half circle) of 20 mm radius in the
clockwise direction at a feedrate of 9600 mm/min
G02 X−48.0 R20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting an arc (half circle) of 20 mm radius in the
clockwise direction at a feedrate of 9600 mm/min
Since the machining is executed in the look ahead

control mode, shape error in machining can be
reduced even at a feedrate of 9600 mm/min.
G08 P0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the look ahead control mode
APPENDIX B-1
APPENDIX 1 CHANGING OFFSET BY SWITCHING PRE-LOAD

LEVELS
The 20000 min−1 specification machine of SH-503 and SH5000 has two spindle speed ranges,
low and high, and pre-load level applied to the spindle bearings (angular contact ball bearings) is
switched to the high or low pre-load level according to the spindle speed range.
The 15000 min−1 specification machine of SH-633, SH8000, MH-503 and 633 and the 13000
min−1 specification machine of MH-1003 have three spindle speed ranges, low, middle and high,
and pre-load level applied to the spindle bearings (angular contact ball bearings) is switched to the
high, middle or low pre-load level according to the spindle speed range.
If the pre-load level is changed according to spindle speeds, however, the spindle position is
displaced in the Z-axis direction. To eliminate an error due to displacement, the Z-axis position is
offset according to the pre-load level.
The Z-axis offset is set for "Z" of "COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen.
1. The appropriate pre-load value applied to the spindle varies according to spindle
NOTE
speeds. Generally, higher pre-load can be applied to the spindle in a low spindle
speed range to give high rigidity or high spindle rotating accuracy.
In a high spindle speed range, however, applying a high pre-load increases the
internal load due to heat generation of bearings and centrifugal force, which causes
problems such as seizure. To avoid such problems, pre-load level is changed to
lower level in high spindle speed ranges.
2. If the pre-load switching offset is not used, change the setting for parameter K10.3 to
"1".
3. When the pre-load switching offset is used, the Z-axis displacement by switching
pre-load levels is offset on the work coordinate system. In the tool length
measurement, it is not necessary to take into account the displacement by pre-load
levels. Measure the tool length after always specifying the S code of the basic
pre-load level (standard: high pre-load level in which "0" is set for the PC parameter)
in measurement.
If the pre-load switching offset is not used, measure the tool length after specifying
the spindle speed in actual machining by S code.
To give high rotation accuracy and rigidity, spindle bearings are pre-loaded.
B-2 APPENDIX
1-1 Pre-load Level Switching and Changing Offset by S Codes
Pre-load levels are changed according to spindle speeds specified by S codes.

Z-axis offset values are set for the individual pre-load levels using parameters, and the called
value is written to "Z" of "COMMON" of the WORK OFFSET screen. Therefore, the Z value of
"COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen changes according to changes in spindle speeds
specified by S codes.
1. Pre-load levels applied to spindle speeds specified by S codes are indicated below.
NOTE
<SH-503 (20000 min−1 specification), SH5000 (20000 min−1 specification)>
Spindle speeds (min−1) Pre-load Level
0 to 12999 High
13000 to 20000 Low
< MH-503 (15000 min−1 specification), MH-633 (15000 min−1 specification),

SH-633 (15000 min−1 specification), SH8000 (15000 min−1 specification)>
0 to 3999 High
4000 to 9999 Middle
10000 to 15000 Low
<MH-1003 (13000 min−1 specification)>
0 to 3999 High
4000 to 9999 Middle
10000 to 13000 Low
2. Pre-load level is selected in response to the designation of an S code even when a

spindle start command (M03, M04) is not designated.
For S codes, refer to page F-11 (2)
APPENDIX B-3
1-2 Changing the Pre-load Level Switching Offset by G10
Using the G10 command, the pre-load level switching offset values set for "Z" of "COMMON" on
the WORK OFFSET screen can be changed.
COMMAND
G90(G91) G10 L2 P0 Z_ ;
M65;
• G90 . . . . . . . . Calls the absolute command mode.
• G91 . . . . . . . . Calls the incremental command mode.
• G10 . . . . . . . . External input of offset value of a work coordinate system
• L2 . . . . . . . . . . Input of offset value of a work coordinate system
• P0. . . . . . . . . . Selects the offset data common to work coordinate systems G54
to G59.
• Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the pre-load level switching offset value.
(G90): The specified offset value replaces the existing

NOTE
value.
(G91): The specified offset value is added to the
existing value.
• M65 . . . . . . . . Updates the offset data common to work coordinate systems
G54 to G59.
1. Specify the M65 command in the block immediately after the block where the G10
NOTE
command is specified.
2. If is possible to manually change the pre-load level switching offset value set for "Z"
of "COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen.
After changing the offset value manually, execute the M65 command in the MDI
mode.
3. Specify the M65 command in a block without other commands.
If the M65 command is specified with the G10 or M06 command or an S code in the
same block, the pre-load level switching offset value set for "Z" of "COMMON" on the
WORK OFFSET screen is not changed.
4. If the power is shut off without executing the updating of the pre-load level switching
offset value by the M65 command or an S code after changing the pre-load level
switching offset value set for "Z" of "COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen
either by the G10 command or manually, the pre-load level switching offset value is
not changed.
When the power is turned on again, the offset value for high pre-load level is set for
"Z" of "COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen.
5. When the power is turned on, the offset value for high pre-load level is set for "Z" of
"COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen.
B-4 APPENDIX
1-3 Parameters
The parameters related to the pre-load level switching offset are indicated below.
WARNING The parameters are set on shipment in accordance with the machine
specifications; do not change them without first consulting Mori Seiki. If
the parameters are changed without consultation, the machine may
operate in an unexpected manner, causing accidents involving serious
injuries or damage to the machine.
Parameter Description
D324 Z-axis offset value to be used when pre-load level is changed to the high level.
(μm)
Set "0" for this parameter since this value is taken as the reference for
NOTE
offset.
D328 Z-axis offset value to be used when pre-load level is changed to the middle level.
(μm)
D332 Z-axis offset value to be used when pre-load level is changed to the low level.
(μm)
D336 Z-coordinate value at the reference pre-load level.
The Z-axis offset value at the individual pre-load levels is added to the
NOTE
Z-coordinate value set for this parameter and written to "Z" of
"COMMON" on the WORK OFFSET screen.
It is possible to take the value set for D328 or D332 for the reference value. For the
NOTE
parameter which is taken as the reference value, "0" must be set.
CHAPTER C
M FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the M functions.

CONTENTS
C : M FUNCTIONS
1 M CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
2 M00, M01 PROGRAM STOP AND OPTIONAL STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
3 M02, M30 PROGRAM END, PROGRAM END AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
4 M03, M04, M05 SPINDLE START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
5 M06 TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
6 M08, M09 COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
7 M33 TOOL STORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
8 M98, M99 SUB-PROGRAM CALL AND RETURN FROM SUB-PROGRAM . . . . . . . . C-19
9 M20 AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
10 M07, M55, M09 OIL SHOT START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
11 M50, M09 OIL-HOLE DRILL COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
12 M92, M09 OIL MIST DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
13 M72, M77 CHIP FLUSH-AWAY COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
14 M80, M81 SHOWER COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
15 M51, M59 AIR BLOW START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
16 M52, M58 DUST COLLECTOR AIR BLOW START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
17 M48, M49 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
18 M73, M74, M75, M76 MIRROR IMAGE ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
19 M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
20 M119 SPINDLE SPECIFIED-POSITION STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
21 M108, M109 IN-MACHINE FIXTURE CLAMP/UNCLAMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
22 M166, M167 Cs CONTOURING CONTROL (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45

M FUNCTIONS C-1
1 M CODE LIST
M codes are also called miscellaneous functions that control program flow, coolant discharge on/
off, etc. These functions are also used as supplementary functions to those called by the G
codes.
CAUTION M31 and M32 commands are provided for maintenance purpose and they must not be
used in cases other than occurrence of fault.
Before using the M31 and M32 commands, please contact Mori Seiki.
1. It is allowed to specify one M code in a block. Optionally, one block can contain up to
NOTE
three M codes.
2. This chapter gives explanation on general M code functions. On some types of
machine models, all of these functions may not be supported or some of the M
codes may be used for different functions or not described below. For details, refer
to the ladder diagram supplied with your machine or contact Mori Seiki.
*1
3. Only for U-axis control specification.
*2
In the case of U-axis control specification, the tool in the spindle and the one in
the waiting pot are returned to the magazine and the spindle cap tool (tool No.
1) is mounted to the spindle.
*3 Only for MH series (includes the U-axis control specification), SH-403, and 633.
*4 Standard for MH-503, 503/U, 633, 633/U, 1003, and SH series.
*5
Only for MH series (includes U-axis control specification), SH-403, and 633.
*6
Only for MH-503, 633, 1003, and SH series.
*7
Only for SH series.
*8 Standard for SH series and NH5000.
*9
Only for MH-403, 1003, SH-503, and 633.
C-2 M FUNCTIONS
Code Function Description
M00 Program stop Suspends program execution temporarily.

Suspends program execution temporarily (whether this
M01 Optional stop function is valid or not is selected by a switch on the
operation panel).
M02 Program end Ends program execution and resets the NC.
Starts the spindle in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
M03 Spindle start (normal)
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the
rear of the spindle.
Starts the spindle in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
M04 Spindle start (reverse)
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece
from the rear of the spindle.
M05 Spindle stop Stops the spindle rotation.
M06 Tool change Starts ATC cycle.
M07 Oil shot 1 ON Starts oil shot 1. (Oil shot 1 is optional.)
M08 Coolant discharge ON Starts coolant discharge.

Stops discharge of coolant, oil-shot 1 and 2, oil-mist,
M09 Coolant discharge OFF
and oil-hole drill coolant.
Clamps the rotary axis of the table.
M10 B-axis clamp
(Excludes HVM series.)
Unclamps the rotary axis of the table.
M11 B-axis unclamp
(Excludes HVM series.)
Used when adjusting the spindle orientation position
M12 2nd spindle orientation position*1 (tool unclamp position).
M19 Spindle orientation Spindle orientation (tool clamp position*1)
M20 Automatic power shut off Shuts off power automatically.
M21 External output
M22 External output
M23 External output
M24 External output
M25 External output
M26 External output
M27 External output
M28 External output
M29 Rigid tapping mode

Ends program executions, resets the NC and rewinds
M30 Program end and rewind
the program.
M FUNCTIONS C-3

Cancels the interlock.
CAUTION This M command is provided for
maintenance purpose and it must not
M31 Axis interlock bypass ON be used in cases other than
occurrence of fault.
Before using this M command, please
contact Mori Seiki.
M32 Axis interlock bypass OFF Cancels the M31 function.
Returns the tools from the spindle and the waiting pot to
M33 Tool return
the magazine.*2
M44 Table-mount sensor UP*3 Used for automatic tool breakage detection.
(The automatic tool breakage detection device is
M45 Table-mount sensor DOWN*3 optional.)
Used for automatic centering.
M46 Sensor selection signal ON
(The automatic centering device is optional.)
Used for automatic tool breakage detection.
M47 Sensor selection signal OFF (The automatic tool breakage detection device is
optional.)
M48 Override cancel OFF Makes the override cancel function invalid.
M49 Override cancel ON Makes the override cancel function valid.

Starts oil-hole drill.
M50 Oil-hole drill coolant ON
(Oil-hole drill coolant system is optional.*4)
M51 Air blow ON Starts the air blow. (Air blow is optional.*4)
Starts dust collector air blow.
M52 Dust collector air blow ON
(Dust collector air blow is optional.)
Turns sensor air blow ON.
M53 Sensor air blow ON
(Sensor air blow is optional.)
M55 Oil shot 2 ON Starts oil shot 2. (Oil shot 2 is optional.)
Stops air blow for dust collector and sensor.
Dust collector air blow OFF
(Dust collector air blow and sensor air blow are
M58 Sensor air blow OFF
optional.)
Measurement sensor air blow OFF*1
Stops air blow for measurement sensor.*1
M59 Air blow OFF Stops air blow. (Air blow is optional.*4)
M60 Pallet change command
M60 B-station loading command (Only for MH-1003)
M61 Pallet change command
M61 B-station unloading command (Only for MH-1003)
M62 A-station loading command (Only for MH-1003)
M63 A-station unloading command (Only for MH-1003)
M64 Work number search start (Only for MH-1003)

C-4 M FUNCTIONS
20000 min−1 specification

(Only for SH-503 and SH5000)
M65 Z-axis position check 15000 min−1 specification
(Only for MH-503, 633, SH-633 and SH8000)
13000 min−1 specification (Only for MH-1003)
M66 Tool skip ON Uses macro variable #1133.
M67 Tool life check (The tool life management function is optional.)
Clamps the tilting axis of the table.

M68 A-axis clamp
(Only for AFM2400)
Unclamps the tilting axis of the table.
M69 A-axis unclamp
(Only for AFM2400)
M70 Work counter
M72 Chip flush-away coolant ON (Chip flush-away coolant is optional.*9)
M73 Y-axis mirror image OFF Makes the Y-axis mirror image invalid
M74 Y-axis mirror image ON Makes the Y-axis mirror image valid
M75 X-axis mirror image OFF Makes the X-axis mirror image invalid
M76 X-axis mirror image ON Makes the X-axis mirror image valid
M77 Chip flush-away coolant OFF (Chip flush-away coolant is optional.*9)
M78 5th-axis clamp (5th-axis device is optional.)
M79 5th-axis unclamp (5th-axis device is optional.)
M80 Shower coolant ON

(Shower coolant is optional.*8)
M81 Shower coolant OFF
Load monitor (teaching, monitoring) Load monitor specification
M84
mode ON Uses macro variable #1133.
Load monitor (teaching, monitoring)
M85 mode OFF
Adaptive control mode OFF
M86 Adaptive control mode ON
M88 Through-spindle coolant ON

Through-spindle coolant specification
M89 Through-spindle coolant OFF
M92 Oil mist ON Starts discharging of oil mist. (Oil mist is optional.)
M93 Sensoring alarm ON Used when measuring the sensor.

M94 Sensoring alarm OFF (Sensor is optional.)
M96 Macro interrupt mode Macro interrupt mode ON
M97 Macro interrupt mode cancel Macro interrupt mode OFF
M98 Sub-program call

Sub-program end Returns the program flow from the current sub-program
M99
Repeat program to the main program.
M FUNCTIONS C-5
M108 In-machine fixture clamp For auto coupler type, available only for MDI mode.
M109 In-machine fixture unclamp (Auto-coupler specification)
M119 Spindle specified-position stop Spindle specified-position orientation
M120 External output

Turns sensor air blow ON.
M132 Sensor air blow ON In-machine measuring system (built-in type)
specification
Used for automatic centering operation.
Optical sensor power ON
M143 (Only for SH-403, SH5000, SH8000 and AFM2400)
Orientation
(Optical sensor is optional.)
Optical sensor power ON*6 Used for automatic centering operation.
M144
Sensor alarm check ON*1 (Optical sensor is optional.)*6
Optical sensor power OFF*6 Turning alarm of the wireless type spindle contact
M145 sensor.*1
Sensor alarm check OFF*1
M146 Stroke limit selection ON
M147 Stroke limit selection OFF
M148 Measuring sensor OUT*1

Used for automatic measuring of the boring hole
M149 Measuring sensor IN*1 diameter. (Measuring sensor is optional.)
M153 Measuring sensor air blow ON*1
M163 Tool life check 8-digit T code specification (Only for SH-503 and 633)
M166 Cs contouring control mode

Cs contouring control specification
M167 Cs contouring control mode cancel
Auxiliary output 1 ON
M180
(Fixture air blow ON*7)
Auxiliary output 1 OFF
M181
(Fixture air blow OFF*7)
M182 Auxiliary output 2 ON
M183 Auxiliary output 2 OFF

C-6 M FUNCTIONS
M184 Washing coolant discharge ON (Only for SH8000)

M185 Washing coolant discharge OFF (Washing coolant system is optional.)
M196 APC shutter open

(Only for MH-1003)
M197 APC shutter close
Subprogram call
M198 (Option)
(subprogram in memory card)
M200 Chip conveyor start (forward direction)
(Chip conveyor is optional.)
M201 Chip conveyor stop
M220 Automatic door open

Automatic door specification
M221 Automatic door close
M237 Small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode (Option)

M FUNCTIONS C-7
2 M00, M01 PROGRAM STOP AND OPTIONAL STOP
When the M00 command is executed during program

execution, the machine stops unconditionally.
The spindle, axis movement, and coolant discharge stop.
Enter the M00 command in a program at a block where
the operation must be suspended.
Differing from the M00 command, the M01 command is
M00
or M01 valid only when the optional stop switch on the operation
panel is pressed. In the condition that this switch is
pressed, the M01 command has the same effect as the
M00 command. That is, when the M01 command is
executed while the optional stop function is valid, spindle
rotation, axis movement, and coolant discharge stop.
Enter the M01 command in a program at a block where
the operation should be suspended occasionally as
required. For example, use the M01 command when
executing the program to machine the first workpiece or
for executing test cutting.
<Using the M00 or M01 command>
• To check the dimensions of the machined workpiece

• To check the tool nose
• To remove chips during machining
COMMAND
M00; . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the program stop function.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the optional stop function.
CAUTION After the operation is suspended temporarily by the M00 or M01 command, do not
change the tools or move an axis manually. If either or both of such manual operations
had to be carried out, return the turret head and the axes having been operated to the
previous state before manual operation. After that the automatic operation may be
restarted. If the automatic operation is restarted without restoring the previous state,
interference will occur between the tools or the tool holders and the workpiece or
fixture, or the workpiece will be machined by a wrong tool, causing tool to be broken.
C-8 M FUNCTIONS
1. Specify the M00 or M01 command in a block without other commands.

NOTE
2. The STATUS indicator [M00/M01] is lit when the M00 or M01 command is executed.
The program is continuously executed when the (ST) switch on the operation
panel is pressed.
3. When the M00 or M01 command is executed, the spindle start M codes (M03, M04)
and the coolant discharge M code (M08) are canceled. Therefore, when specifying
the M00 or M01 command, determine the position where these M codes are entered
taking this into consideration.
When restarting the program after suspending program execution by the M00 or
M01 command, specify the M03 or M04 command at the restart block. If coolant
discharge is required, specify the M08 command as well.
How the M01 command is executed is explained below in relation with the status of the
optional stop switch on the operation panel.
• Optional stop function is valid:
The M01 command is executed and the program stops after the execution of the
block where the M01 command is contained.
• Optional stop function is invalid:
The M01 command is ignored and the program is executed continuously.
M FUNCTIONS C-9
Programming using M00 or M01

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at (X0, Y0) at a rapid traverse rate in the work
Machining program
M01; or M00; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <M01> Optional stop
• If the optional stop switch on the

operation panel is ON:
The machine stops temporarily.
• If the optional stop switch on the

operation panel is OFF:
The M01 command is ignored and the
program is executed continuously.
<M00> Program stop
• Program execution is suspended and the
machine stops temporarily. After removing
chips and/or checking the machined
dimensions, press the (ST) switch, and

the program execution restarts from the next
block.
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S400 T3;
M03;
Machining program
M01; or M00;
M06;
C-10 M FUNCTIONS
3 M02, M30 PROGRAM END, PROGRAM END AND REWIND
When the M02 or M30 command is executed,

1. All machine operations stop.
• The spindle stops.
• Axis movement stops.
• Coolant discharge stops.
M02
or M30 2. The NC is reset.
• In the reset state, the G codes become the
same state when power is turned on.
However, G54 to G59, G20, or G21 mode
remains unchanged.
• F codes are canceled. However, S code is
stored without canceled.
+ 3. In the case of the M30 command, the cursor returns

to the start of the program.
O 0000 This is called the program rewind function.
G Power ON
M Canceled
The M30 command includes the program rewind
function in addition to the functions supported by
the M02 command. Since this feature is
+ convenient when machining the same kind of
workpieces continuously, the M30 command is
O0001 ; usually used at the end of a program. By using
G90 G00 M30 only the M30 command, the same program is executed
G43 Z
repeatedly by simply pressing the (ST)
switch.
For the machine equipped with the door interlock

NOTE
function, an alarm (EX1024) is displayed on the
screen unless the door is opened/closed after the
completion of the program.
COMMAND
M02; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the end of program.
The program execution ends and the NC is reset.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the end of program and program rewind.
The program execution ends, the NC is reset, and the program
is rewound.
1. Specify the M02 or M30 command in a block without other commands.

NOTE
2. The indicator in the (ST) switch goes off when the M02 or M30 command is
executed. At the same time, the STATUS indicator [M02/M30] is lit.
M FUNCTIONS C-11

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
Machining program
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
If the optional stop switch on the operation panel is

OFF:
The M01 command is ignored and the program is
executed continuously.
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S400 T3;
M03;
Machining program
M06;
M30; or M02; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <M02> Ends program execution and automatic
operation stops
Although the NC is reset, the cursor stays at this
position.
<M30> Ends program execution and automatic
operation stops
The NC is reset and the cursor returns to the
start of the program (O0001).
C-12 M FUNCTIONS
4 M03, M04, M05 SPINDLE START AND STOP
The M03 and M04 commands are used to start the

spindle at the speed specified using an S code.
G03 The M05 command is used to stop the spindle.
G04
COMMAND
M03; . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle start in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the
spindle
M04; . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle start in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear
of the spindle
M05; . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle stop.
Stops the spindle rotation.
CAUTION 1. Do not stop the spindle by specifying the M05 command while the cutting tool is
in contact with the workpiece. If the spindle is stopped while the cutting tool is in
contact with the workpiece, the tool will be chipped or the workpiece damaged.
2. Start the spindle by executing either the M03 or M04 command before the cutting
tool comes into contact with the workpiece (except high-speed deep hole rigid
tapping cycle, deep hole rigid tapping cycle, rigid tapping cycle, high-speed deep
hole reverse rigid tapping cycle, deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle, and
reverse rigid tapping cycle). If the cutting tool is brought into contact with the
workpiece while it stays stationary, the cutting tool will be chipped.
Before starting the spindle rotation with the M03 or M04 command, it is necessary to
NOTE
specify the required spindle speed using an S code.
For S code, refer to page F-11 (2).
M FUNCTIONS C-13
Programming using M03, M04, and M05

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
Use the M04 command to start the spindle in the

reverse direction.
Machining program
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle after the completion of second zero
return of the X- and Y-axes
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
If the optional stop switch on the operation panel is

OFF:
The M01 command is ignored and the program is
executed continuously.
C-14 M FUNCTIONS
5 M06 TOOL CHANGE
The M06 command is used to change the tool set in the spindle with the tool at the tool change
position. When the M06 command is executed while no tool is set in the spindle, the tool at the
tool change position is set to the spindle. The M06 command executes a series of tool change
cycle (ATC) including spindle orientation and tool clamp/unclamp.
COMMAND
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
CAUTION Pay attention to the following point if technical memory random method is used for tool
change.
(SH-403 <40-tool specification>)
ATC operation for changing the tools of different tool size groups differs from that for
changing the tools of the same tool size group.
For changing the tools belonging to different tool size groups, tool change cycle is
executed twice. Pay sufficient care when executing tool change operation in the MDI
mode in such cases.
1. If the M06 command is executed while the spindle is rotating, the spindle orientation
NOTE
is automatically executed and the tools are changed.
2. Before carrying out the tool change cycle by specifying the M06 command, it is
necessary to stop coolant supply.
3. Tool change position varies depending on the machine models.
For the tool change position of individual models, refer to page B-39 (11).
M FUNCTIONS C-15
Programming using M06

Ex.
Tool change cycle is executed for the SH-503.
O0001;
N1;
M03;
Machining program
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the X- and Y-axes to the second zero point (tool
change position) and stopping the spindle
Tool change position varies depending on the

NOTE
machine models.
Move the axes to the tool change position.
For the tool change position of individual

models, refer to page B-39 (11).
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the spindle tool with the tool (T2) at the tool
change position
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S400 T3;
M03;
Machining program
M01;
M06;
C-16 M FUNCTIONS
6 M08, M09 COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF
The M08 command is used to start coolant discharge.

The M09 command is used to stop coolant discharge.
COMMAND
M08; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies coolant discharge ON.
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies coolant discharge OFF.
1. Do not carry out tool change cycle while coolant is discharged.

NOTE
2. If coolant is used for automatic operation, it is necessary to make sure that the
coolant tank has sufficient volume of coolant.
For the functions of the coolant switches on the operation panel, refer to Chapter A,
"OPERATION PANELS" in the OPERATION MANUAL separately provided.
Coolant discharge control using the coolant switches on the operation panel in
combination with the M08 command is explained below:
Coolant switch (ON)
When the M08 command is specified, the indicator in the (ON) switch is lit and
coolant is supplied through the nozzles.
Coolant switch (OFF)
When the (OFF) switch is pressed while coolant is being supplied, the coolant
supply stops.
Pressing the (OFF) switch for 1 second or more while coolant is not being supplied
causes the indicator in the (ON) switch to blink.

In this state, the coolant is not supplied even if an M08 command is executed.
This feature is used when checking a program.
When the (ON) switch is pressed again, the indicator in the (ON) switch is lit.
M FUNCTIONS C-17
Programming using M08 and M09

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2 M08; . . . . . . . . Starting coolant discharge
M03;
Machining program
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant discharge

G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the spindle after the completion of second zero
return of the X- and Y-axes
Usually, the M09 command is specified before

stopping spindle rotation.
This is to spin off coolant from the tool by the
rotation of the spindle.
C-18 M FUNCTIONS
7 M33 TOOL STORING CYCLE
The M33 command is used to return the tools, the tool mounted in the spindle and the one in the
waiting pot, to an empty pot in the magazine. When a dummy tool is set up for the machine, the
dummy tool is mounted in the spindle after returning the tools to the magazine.
The M33 command is used to empty the spindle before shutting off the power.
A dummy tool is a tool explicitly designed for protecting the spindle taper during run-in
operation.
COMMAND
M33; . . . . . . . . . . . Tool return cycle command
1. In the case of U-axis control specification, the tool in the spindle and the one in the
NOTE
waiting pot are returned to the magazine and the spindle cap tool (tool No. 1) is
mounted to the spindle.
2. The M33 command cannot be executed unless the axes are located at the tool
change position.
For the tool change position of individual models, refer to Page B-39 (11).
3. NH4000 is equipped with a dummy tool and specifying M33 will mount the dummy
tool in the spindle after returning the tools to the magazine.
Magazine pot location for the dummy tool is No. 40 for 40-tool specification
magazines and No. 60 for 60-tool specification magazines.
A dummy tool is a tool explicitly designed for protecting the spindle taper
during run-in operation.

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
Machining program
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop

M33; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool return cycle command
The tool in the spindle and the one in the waiting pot are
returned to an empty pot in the magazine.
M30;
M FUNCTIONS C-19
8 M98, M99 SUB-PROGRAM CALL AND RETURN FROM

SUB-PROGRAM
Main program Sub-program By entering the M98 and M99 commands in

respective two programs, these programs are
O0100 ; O0200 ;
N1 . . . . . ; interrelated with each other as a main program and
N1 . . . . . . . . . . ;
N2 M98 P20200 ; N2 . . . . . ; a sub-program as illustrated on the left.
N3 . . . . . . . . . . ; N3 . . . . . ;
N4 M98 P200 ;
.
. When executing the same cutting (cutting position,
.
N5 . . . . . . . . . . ; . pattern) repeatedly, the part to be repeated may be
N20 M99 ; stored to the NC memory as a sub-program. In a
main program, the sub-program number and the
1st call 2nd call
number of times the sub-program is repeated
should be specified.
It is possible to specify sub-program call from one sub-program to the other as illustrated
NOTE
below. This is called nesting and allowable nesting level is four. If sub-program call
exceeds this limit, alarm number (No. 077) is displayed.
1st call 2nd call 3rd call 4th call

Main Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub-
program program 1 program 2 program 3 program 4
By storing the portion of the program to be executed repeatedly as a sub-program,

required memory capacity can be reduced and programming errors can be reduced
accordingly.
COMMAND 1. F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)
M98 P ;
• M98 . . . . . . . . Calls sub-program.
• P
Sub-program number
The number of sub-program calls; if omitted, the

specified sub-program is called one time.
2. F15 format
M98 P_ L_ ;
• M98 . . . . . . . . Calls sub-program.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies sub-program number.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
If it is omitted, the specified sub-program is called one time.
C-20 M FUNCTIONS
1. If the program number specified by address P is not found, an alarm message (No.
NOTE
078) is displayed on the screen.
2. If a P command is not specified in the M98 block, an alarm message (No. 076) is
3. For F16 format, a numeric value specified following address P may not always be in
seven digit number. If a sub-program is called only once, address P should be
followed only by a sub-program number.
• P1. . . . . . . . . . . Sub-program number 1
• P1200. . . . . . . . Sub-program number 1200
If a sub-program is repeated two or more times, the sub-program number should be
specified in four digits.
• P2 0200 . . . . . . Sub-program number 200 is repeated two times.
• P30 0002 . . . . . Sub-program number 2 is repeated 30 times.
The number of program repetition: Max. 999 for F16 format and max. 9999 for F15 format
COMMAND
M99 P_ ;
• M99 . . . . . . . . Specifies return from the sub-program to the main program.
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the sequence number in the main program, where the
program flow should return. (omissible)
1. If the program number specified by address P is not found, an alarm message (No.
NOTE
2. If address P is specified, the return sequence number is searched, which will take a
time. Therefore, this must be taken into consideration when specifying address P.
1. If a P command is omitted, the program flow returns to the block that follows the one
where jump to the sub-program has been made.
Address P is not normally specified in an M99 block.
2. If "M99 P_ ;" is specified in the main program:
The program flow jumps to the sequence number specified by P in the main
program.
If a P command is omitted, the program flow jumps to the start of the main program.
The main program is executed endlessly.
M FUNCTIONS C-21
Programming using M98 or M99 (1)

Ex.
Main program Sub-program
O0001; O0100;
N1 ; N101 ;
1 N2 M98 P100; N102 ;
N3 ; N103 M99;
N4 ;
2 N5 M98 P20200; O0200;
N6 ; N201 ;
... ... ...
N202 ;
N203 M99;
(Repeats twice)
N11;
3 N12 M98 P300; O0300;
N13 ; N301 ;
N14 ; N302 ;
N15 ; N303 M99 P15;
C-22 M FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To carry out tapping at positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 as indicated in the illustration below.
+Y
2 8 1
+X
−10 10
3 −8 4

O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S700 T2;
M03;
G99 G81 Z−25.0 R10.0 F120 K0;. . . . . Specifying the spot drilling cycle (G81) for the prepared
hole of tapping
Since K0 is specified, the spot drilling cycle is not

NOTE
carried out at the position (X0, Y0).
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O0002
The spot drilling cycle (G81) is executed at positions 1 to
4.
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05;
M01;
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S400 T3;
M03;
G99 G84 Z−20.0 R10.0 F600 K0;. . . . . Specifying the tapping cycle (G84)
Since K0 is specified, the tapping cycle is not

NOTE
carried out at the position (X0, Y0).
The tapping cycle (G84) is executed at positions 1 to 4.
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05;
M01;
M06;
M30;
M FUNCTIONS C-23
Sub-program (O0002)
O0002;
X10.0 Y8.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
X−10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y−8.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G80;
M99;

Ex.
From the sub-program called from the main program, another sub-program is called.
Main program Sub-program 1 Sub-program 2

O0001; O0100; O0200;
N1; ; ;
; ; ;
M98 P100; M98 P200; M99;
; ;
; ;
M30; M99;

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
N2;
/N7 M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the block delete function is invalid:

The "N7 M99;" command is executed and the program
flow returns to the start of the program. The program
is repeated endlessly between N1 and N7 blocks.
When the block delete function is valid:
The "N7 M99;" command is ignored and the program
is executed continuously to the following blocks.
N8;
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ends program.
If the M99 command is executed in a main program, execution returns to the start block of
that main program and the same main program is executed again. This programming is
used for executing the same program repeatedly in such as a warm up program.
C-24 M FUNCTIONS
9 M20 AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTOFF
When the M20 command is executed, power supply to the NC is automatically shut off.
COMMAND
M20; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the automatic power shutoff function.
NOTE 1. The automatic power shutoff switch on the operation panel has the same
function as the M20 command.
With the automatic power shutoff switch pressed to make the automatic power
shutoff function valid (the indicator in the switch is lit), power supply is automatically
shut off when the M02 or M30 command in the program is executed.
Whether the power is automatically shut off in response to the execution of the M00
or M01 command, or not, is determined by the setting for the proper parameter.
The default setting made before shipping the machine is "power is not shut off when
M00 or M01 is executed."
2. Specify the M20 command in a block preceding the M30 block.
Since the M30 command includes the function (rewind function) to return to the
beginning of the program, the M20 command cannot be executed if the example
program as given below is executed.
<Example> When M20 is specified in the block succeeding the M30 block
M30;
M20;
3. Power is not shut off while the following operation is carried out. Power is shut off
after the completion of the operation.
• During APC cycle (the machine equipped with APC)
• During ATC cycle
• During SBC cycle
• During magazine indexing
• During pallet pool indexing (pallet pool specification)
4. The main switch is placed in the position between ON and OFF after the power
supply is automatically shut off using the automatic power shutoff function.
Place the main switch in the OFF position first and then place it in the ON
position to turn on the power supply again.
M FUNCTIONS C-25

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . Executing the machining program of
the first process (N1)
Machining program
M06;
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the machining program of the second process
(N2)
Machining program
/M20;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If the M20 command is executed, power supply is

automatically shut off.
Since the slash (/) code is entered, execution of this block
is controlled by the setting of the block delete switch
on the operation panel.
If the block delete switch is active (the indicator in the

switch is lit):
Ignores this block and therefore the M20 command is not
executed. The M30 command in the next block is
executed.
If the block delete switch is not active (the indicator in

the switch is not lit):
Executes the M20 command. According to the execution
of the M20 command, power supply is automatically shut
off.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ends program execution and automatic operation stops.
The NC is reset and the cursor returns to the start of the
program (O0001).
C-26 M FUNCTIONS
10 M07, M55, M09 OIL SHOT START AND STOP
The M07 and M55 commands can be used in the machine

equipped with the oil shot system.
The oil shot system is optional.

NOTE
When the M07 and M55 commands are specified, cutting

fluid is discharged from the oil shot ports arranged around
the spindle for the time set for the parameter.
Oil shot is used in tapping operation carried out on casting
or other workpieces for which coolant is not used.
COMMAND
M07; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts oil shot 1
M55; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts oil shot 2
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Stops oil shot 1 and 2
1. Whether oil shot is called only to the block in which the M07 and M55 commands are
NOTE
specified or to every tapping cycle to be executed after the block in which M07 and
M55 are specified, is set for parameter K6.1 or K6.5.
Oil shot is called at the same time the spindle start command is executed at point R
level.
2. If the parameter is set so that oil shot is called for every tapping cycle to be executed
after the block in which M07 and M55 commands are specified, the M09 command is
used to cancel the oil shot. When supplying oil shot only in the block in which M07
and M55 are specified, it is not necessary to specify M09 command.
3. Cutting fluid discharge time is set for parameter T38.
4. Oil shot cannot be stopped by pressing the (OFF) switch on the operation
panel.
5. If both the M07 and M55 commands are specified, both of oil shot 1 and oil shot 2
are discharged.
M FUNCTIONS C-27

Ex.
To carry out tapping cycle (G84) at points 1, 2, 3, and 4. Cutting fluid is applied using the oil shot
function.
+Y
2 30 1
Normal rotation
Dwell at the hole
+X bottom
Reverse rotation
−50 50
Rapid traverse
3 −30 4
Cutting feed
Point R Initial
point
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y30.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G99 G84 Z−_ R_ P_ F_ M07;. . . . . . . . Oil shot or oil shot 1 is applied at the same time the
spindle start command is executed at point R level.
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84) at each of the specified
Y−30.0; positions
X50.0;
G80 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the tapping cycle mode with the G80 command
When it is set to apply oil shot at every tapping

cycle after the block in which M07 is specified, oil
shot must be canceled with M09.
When parameter setting is for "applying oil shot
only in the block in which M07 is specified", it is
not necessary to specify M09 in this block.
C-28 M FUNCTIONS
11 M50, M09 OIL-HOLE DRILL COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF
The M50 command can be used in the machine equipped

with the oil-hole drill coolant system.
The oil-hole drill coolant system is optional for

NOTE
MH-403.
If the M50 is executed, coolant passes through the drill
and is discharged from the drill tip.
If the M09 is specified, discharge of the oil-hole drill
coolant is stopped.
Since the coolant can be supplied correctly into the hole
being machined, this command effectively cools the tool,
prevents the tool from being worn, and discharges chips
out of the hole.
COMMAND
M50; . . . . . . . . . . . Turns ON the oil-hole drill coolant system.
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Turns OFF the oil-hole drill coolant system.
1. Discharge of coolant stops during ATC cycle.

NOTE
2. If the M50 command is specified while coolant is discharged by the execution of the
M08 command, coolant is stopped and oil-hole drill coolant is discharged.
3. If the M08 command is specified while oil-hole drill coolant is discharged by the
execution of the M50 command, oil-hole drill coolant is stopped and coolant is
discharged.
4. For the oil-hole drill coolant system, special tool holders are necessary.
M FUNCTIONS C-29

Ex.
To carry out drilling at points 1 and 2 using the oil-hole drill.
+Y
2 50 1
+X
−80 80
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X80.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2 M03; . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate; at the same
time the spindle starts rotating in the normal direction at
1000 min−1.
M50; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discharging oil-hole drill coolant
G99 G81 Z−12.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 1
Feedrate of the tool is 100 mm/min.
X−80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the spot drilling cycle mode (G81)
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the oil-hole drill coolant system
C-30 M FUNCTIONS
12 M92, M09 OIL MIST DISCHARGE ON/OFF
The M92 command can be used in the machine equipped the oil mist system.
The oil mist system is optional.

NOTE
Specify the M92 command to discharge the oil mist.

Specify the M09 command to stop the oil mist.
Oil mist means the coolant supplied in mist form.
COMMAND
M92; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts the oil mist system.
M09; . . . . . . . . . . . Stops the oil mist system.
NOTE Oil mist cannot be stopped by pressing the (OFF) switch on the operation panel.

Ex.
To carry out the tapping cycle (G84) at points 1 and 2 while supplying oil mist.
+Y
2 30 1
Normal rotation
Dwell at the hole
+X bottom Reverse rotation
−50 50
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Point R Initial
point
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y30.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G99 G84 Z−_ R_ P_ F_ M92;. . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84) at point 1
Discharging oil mist
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84) at point 2 in the same
cycle as executed at point 1
G80 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the tapping cycle mode (G84); command
discharge of oil mist is stopped.
M FUNCTIONS C-31
13 M72, M77 CHIP FLUSH-AWAY COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF
The M72 and M77 commands can be used in the machine equipped with the chip flush-away
coolant system.
The chip flush-away coolant system is optional.

NOTE
Specify the M72 command to discharge the chip flush-away coolant.

Specify the M77 command to stop the chip flush-away coolant.
The M72 and M77 commands (chip flush-away coolant discharge ON/OFF) can be used
NOTE
only for MH-403, 1003, SH-503, and 633.
COMMAND
M72; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts the chip flush-away coolant system.
M77; . . . . . . . . . . . Stops the chip flush-away coolant system.
NOTE The chip flush-away coolant cannot be stopped by pressing the (OFF) switch on the
operation panel.
C-32 M FUNCTIONS

Ex.
To machine the face using a 100 mm diameter face milling cutter.
+Y
4 80 3
+X
−100 100
1 2
−80
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X−160.0 Y−40.0; . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G01 Z0 F500 M72; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Z0 at a feedrate of 500 mm/min
The chip flush-away coolant discharge starts after the
completion of Z-axis at Z0.
The chip flush-away coolant is kept discharged

NOTE
until the M77 command is executed.
X160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y40.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X−160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
M77; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping discharge of the chip flush-away coolant
M FUNCTIONS C-33
14 M80, M81 SHOWER COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF
The M80 and M81 commands can be used in the machine equipped with the shower coolant
system.
The shower coolant system is optional.

NOTE
However, this system is standard for SH series and NH5000, NH4000.
Specify the M80 command to discharge the shower coolant.
Specify the M81 command to stop the shower coolant.
COMMAND
M80; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts the shower coolant system.
M81; . . . . . . . . . . . Stops the shower coolant system.
NOTE The shower coolant cannot be stopped by pressing the (OFF) switch on the operation
panel.

Ex.
+Y
4 80 3
+X
−100 100
1 2
−80
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G01 Z0 F500 M80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Z0 at a feedrate of 500 mm/min
The shower coolant discharge starts after the completion
of Z-axis at Z0.
The shower coolant is kept discharged until the

NOTE
M81 command is executed.
X160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y40.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X−160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
M81; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping discharge of the shower coolant
C-34 M FUNCTIONS
15 M51, M59 AIR BLOW START AND STOP
The M51 and M59 commands can be used in the machine equipped with air blow system.
The air blow system is optional for MH-403.

NOTE
Specify the M51 command to start air blow.

Specify the M59 command to stop air blow.
Air blow is used to blow off and discharge chips accumulated on the surface or groove of the
workpiece during machining.
COMMAND
M51; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts air blow.
M59; . . . . . . . . . . Stops air blow.

Ex.
+Y
4 80 3
+X
−100 100
1 2
−80
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G01 Z0 F500;
M51; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the air blow
Air blow is kept supplied until it is stopped by the

NOTE
execution of the M59 command.
X160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y40.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X−160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
M59; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the air blow
M FUNCTIONS C-35
16 M52, M58 DUST COLLECTOR AIR BLOW START AND STOP
The M52 and M58 commands can be used in the machine equipped with the dust collector.
The dust collector is optional.

NOTE
Specify the M52 command to start dust collector air blow.

Specify the M58 command to stop air blow.
Dust collector:
When the compressed air is applied through the dust collector port, which is set at a hole in
the workpiece, chips in the hole is forcibly fed into the dust collector with the air.
Chips generated during hole machining operation are removed from the holes.
COMMAND
M52; . . . . . . . . . . . Starts dust collector air blow.
M58; . . . . . . . . . . . Stops dust collector air blow.

C-36 M FUNCTIONS

Ex.
After the completion of drilling at point 1, chips generated during drilling are cleaned using the dust
collector.
+Y
80 1
+X
−100 100
O0001;
N1;
N2; (Drill)
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y80.0; . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H2 S1000 T3; (T3 = dust collector)
M03;
G99 G81 Z−20.0 R3.0 F100;
G80;
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05;
M01;
M06;
N3; (dust collector)
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y80.0; . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H3 T4; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 The dust collector (T3) moves to the machined
hole and it is moved to the workpiece surface by
G01 Z0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
the commands in point 2. After that the
Z−3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 commands in point 3, press the dust collector
against the workpiece surface by 3 mm.
2 3 1
Z0
M52; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the air blow for the dust collector

G04 X4.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the dust collector air blow for 4 seconds by the
dwell command
M58; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the air blow for the dust collector
M FUNCTIONS C-37
17 M48, M49 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL ON/OFF
The override setting for cutting feedrate during automatic

O0001; operation is canceled when the M49 command is
...
executed. In this mode, axis feedrate is fixed to the one

M49;
G01...F; programmed by the F code. Therefore, if the setting for
the feedrate override dial on the operation panel is not
100%, the setting is ignored and it is assumed to be
100% 100%.
In daily operation, the M48 and M49 commands are rarely
used. In test cutting, these M codes may be used. That
is, the M48 command is specified in a program so that
cutting feedrates may be adjusted to meet actual
machining status.
After determining proper feedrates, the M49 command
should be specified in a program so that mass production
may be executed by using the fixed feedrates.
COMMAND
M48; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate override cancel OFF.
M49; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies feedrate override cancel ON.
CAUTION When the M49 command is executed, the setting of the override dial is ignored and
actual movement commands are all executed at the programmed feedrates. In this
mode, actual feedrates cannot be set faster than the programmed feedrates.
However, if this command is specified in a program, it is impossible to lower the actual
feedrate by using the feedrate override dial even if the programmed feedrate seems
too fast.
1. During tapping, feedrate must be kept constant. The override function is

NOTE
automatically ignored if the G code calling tapping operation is executed. Therefore,
it is not necessary to specify the M48 and M49 commands in a program for tapping
operation.
2. The M48 and M49 commands are not valid for rapid traverse operation. Therefore,
the rapid traverse rate override switch is operative while the M49 command is valid.
C-38 M FUNCTIONS

Ex.
+Y
4 80 3
+X
−100 100
1 2
−80
The following program should be executed while the block delete switch on the operation
NOTE
panel is set OFF.
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
G01 Z0 F500;
/M49;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the override for cutting feed invalid
Since the slash (/) code is entered, execution of this block
is controlled by the setting of the block delete switch

on the operation panel.
If the block delete switch is active (the indicator in the

switch is lit):
Ignores this block and therefore the M49 command is not
executed. The following blocks are executed with the
feedrate override function valid.
If the block delete switch is not active (the indicator in

the switch is not lit):
Executes the M49 command. According to the execution
of the M49 command, the override for cutting feed is
made invalid and following blocks are executed with
100% of feedrate.
X160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate of points 1 → 2 is fixed at 200 mm/min.
Y40.0 F500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate of points 2 → 3 is fixed at 500 mm/min.
X−160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate of points 3 → 4 is fixed at 200 mm/min.
/M48;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making override for cutting feed valid
After the execution of this command, the override
switches on the operation panel are valid.
M FUNCTIONS C-39
18 M73, M74, M75, M76 MIRROR IMAGE ON/OFF
Shapes A and B shown at left is symmetrical in reference

to the Y-axis.
B
If a program for shape A or B is created and the mirror
image function called using the Y-axis as the axis of
A
symmetry is applied, the program for the other shape is
automatically created.
When there are graphics which are symmetric with each
other in reference to the X- or Y-axis of an axis parallel to
them, this mirror image function is effectively used to
create the programs.
COMMAND
M73; . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror image (Y-axis) OFF M74
+Y (Mirror image is
M74; . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror image (Y-axis) ON; applied in Y-axis
X-axis is used as the axis of direction.)
symmetry.
M75; . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror image (X-axis) OFF +X
M76; . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror image (X-axis) ON;

Y-axis is used as the axis of
symmetry.
M76
(Mirror image is
applied in X-axis
+Y direction.)
+X
CAUTION When specifying the M73 to M76 commands, move the cutting tool to the axis of
symmetry first.
If the M73 to M76 commands are specified while the cutting tool is not positioned at the
axis of symmetry, the coordinate system used for executing the following program is
shifted. If the program is executed under such state, interference occurs between the
cutting tool or tool holder with the workpiece or fixture. This would cause damage to
the machine.
C-40 M FUNCTIONS
Programming using M73, M74, M75 and M76

Ex.
To carry out hole machining operation at 16 positions (A to P). The program for holes A to D is first
created, and the program for other three sets of holes (E to H, I to L, and M to P) are created using
the mirror image function.
+Y
G H 50 D C
F E 15 A B
+X
−55 −20 20 55
J I −15 M N
K L −50 P O
Program the hole positions A to D with sub-program (O0002).

Sub-program (O0002)
O0002;
X20.0 Y15.0;
X55.0;
Y50.0;
X20.0;
M99;
Program the hole machining cycle at positions A to P with main program (O0001).
O0001;
G90 G99 G81 Z−3.0 R3.0 F80 K0; . . . . Calling the spot drilling cycle (G81)

NOTE
carried out at the position specified in this block.
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle at positions A to D by
calling sub-program (O0002)
+Y
A to D The cutting tool moves in the manner as shown in
NOTE
the left.
+X
M FUNCTIONS C-41
G00 X0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to the axis of symmetry, Y-axis
M76; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the mirror image (X-axis) function
G81 Z−3.0 R3.0 K0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the spot drilling cycle (G81)

NOTE
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle at positions E to H by
+Y The cutting tool moves in the manner as shown in

E to H NOTE
the left since the mirror image function is ON for
the X-axis.
+X
Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to the axis of symmetry, X-axis

M74; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the mirror image (Y-axis) function

NOTE
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle at positions I to L by

NOTE
the left since the mirror image function is ON for
the X- and Y-axes.
+X
I to L
X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to the axis of symmetry, Y-axis

M75; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling the mirror image (X-axis) function

NOTE
C-42 M FUNCTIONS
M98 P2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle at positions M to P by


NOTE
the left since the mirror image function is OFF for
the X-axis and ON for the Y-axis.
+X
M to P
Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to the axis of symmetry, X-axis

M73; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning off the mirror image (Y-axis) function
At the end of a program, the mirror image function must
be off for both of the X- and Y-axes.
The mirror image function is canceled for all axes

NOTE
by canceling the mirror image function for the
Y-axis.
M FUNCTIONS C-43
19 M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION
Specify the M19 command to stop the spindle rotation at the fixed position.
When mounting a boring bar which is used in the G76 or G87 boring cycle in the spindle, M19 is
used in the MDI mode. Since the canned cycle called by G76 or G87 includes the tool shift
movement in reference to the spindle orient stop position, the boring bar must be mounted in the
spindle while aligning the boring bit with the tool shift direction.
COMMAND
M19; . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle orientation.
Spindle orientation is automatically executed if tool change cycle (M06) or hole machining
NOTE
canned cycle (G76, G87) is executed. In this case, it is not necessary to specify the M19
command in a program.
20 M119 SPINDLE SPECIFIED-POSITION STOP
By setting, in the system variables, the angle of shift relative to the orientation angle at the spindle
fixed position attained by executing the M19 command, and then executing the M119 command,
you can orient the spindle to any required position.
The angle of shift relative to the fixed position is set for system variable #1133. One rotation of
360° is divided into 4096 units (1 = approx. 0.088°, 1024 = 90°). The amount of shift in the forward
direction of rotation must be set as a "plus" value.
COMMAND
#1133 = ; .... Setting of the amount of shift from the fixed position
M119; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle specified-position stop
How to use the M119 command

Ex.
A program for orienting the spindle to a position shifted 90° in the forward direction from the fixed
position as determined by M19 is shown below.
#1133 =1024;
M119;
C-44 M FUNCTIONS
21 M108, M109 IN-MACHINE FIXTURE CLAMP/UNCLAMP
The M108 and M109 commands can be used with the machine equipped with the auto-coupler.
The auto-coupler is optional.

NOTE
When the M108 command is executed, the fixture in the machine is clamped.
When the M109 command is executed, the fixture in the machine is unclamped.
1. The M108 and M109 commands can be used only for MH-1003 and SH series
NOTE
2. To operate (clamp/unclamp) the fixture installed in the setup station, use the
footswitch installed in front of the setup station.
COMMAND
M108; . . . . . . . . . Specifies in-machine fixture clamp.
M109; . . . . . . . . . Specifies in-machine fixture unclamp.
1. To execute the M108 or M109 command, the following conditions must be satisfied.
NOTE
• The STATUS indicator [MRDY] is lit.

• Both the table and the pallet are clamped.
• The MDI mode is selected.
• There is a pallet in the machine.
2. If the fixture in the machine is in the unclamped state, the following operation is not
possible.
• Axis movement (X-, Y-, Z-, and B-axes)
• Starting of automatic operation (alarm message (EX1598) is displayed on the
screen.)
• APC cycle (alarm message (EX0742 <SH series>, EX1639 <MH-1003>) is
displayed on the screen.)
3. The fixture in the setup station is operated by using the fixture clamp/unclamp
footswitch.
When the fixture clamp/unclamp footswitch is stepped on while the fixture is in the
clamped state, the fixture is unclamped.
When the fixture clamp/unclamp footswitch is stepped on while the fixture is in the
unclamped state, the fixture is clamped.
4. For the operation of the fixture in the setup station, the following conditions must be
satisfied.
• The STATUS indicator [MRDY] is lit.
• Not in the APC cycle.
• The indicator in the setup button (SETUP indicator) is not lit.
• The setup station door is open.
• The setup station door is not closing. (automatic door of the setup station)
5. If the APC cycle is executed while the fixture in the setup station is unclamped, an
alarm message (EX0742 <SH series>, EX1639 <MH-1003>) is displayed.
M FUNCTIONS C-45
22 M166, M167 Cs CONTOURING CONTROL (OPTION)
The Cs contouring control function allocates the C-axis to rotation of the spindle to allow the
spindle to be positioned at a desired angular position. To distinguish the state in which the spindle
is controlled as the C-axis from the normal spindle state, such a state is referred to as the Cs
mode. Operation that requires the spindle to be positioned at a desired angular position should be
performed in the Cs mode.
COMMAND <Cs mode>
M166; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the Cs mode.
G91 G28 C0; . . . . . . . Specifies C-axis zero return.
<C-axis positioning>
C_.; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the spindle angular position.
<Canceling the Cs mode>
M167; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the Cs mode.
1. After switching the mode to the Cs mode, it is necessary to execute zero return of
NOTE
the C-axis.
2. Tool change operation is not possible in the Cs mode. Before carrying out a tool
change operation, cancel the Cs mode.
3. C-axis angle is set as shown in the illustration below.
+X direction . . . . . . . . . . . 0°
+Y direction . . . . . . . . . . . −90°
−X direction . . . . . . . . . . . 180° or −180°
−Y direction . . . . . . . . . . . 90°
+Y
−90°
+X
180° 0°
90°
4. C-axis rotation direction is defined as below.

Positive (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle normal rotation direction
Negative (−) . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle reverse rotation direction
CHAPTER D
HOLE MACHINING
CANNED CYCLE
This chapter describes hole machining canned cycles.

Since different patterns of tool movement are available to cover various hole machining
requirements, choose the most proper cycle for intended operation.
A hole machining cycle specifies operation sequence to be specified in several blocks by
the commands in a single block containing a G code.
Explanation is also given on pattern cycles that simplify programming when executing a
hole machining cycle at positions which can be defined by a specific pattern as well as a
circle or frame cutting.
For details, refer to the instruction manuals supplied by the NC unit

manufacturer.
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
2 G80 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
3 G81 SPOT DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
4 G82 COUNTER BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
5 G85 BORING CYCLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
6 G86 BORING CYCLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
7 G88 BORING CYCLE (MANUAL TOOL EXTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
8 G89 BORING CYCLE (DWELL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
9 G73 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30
10 G83 DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32
11 M237 G83 SMALL-DIAMETER DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
12 G84 TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
13 G74 REVERSE TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
14 M29 G84, G84.2 RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45
15 M29 G84, G84.2 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE

(RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49
16 M29 G84, G84.2 DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE

(RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53
17 M29 G74, G84.3 REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . D-58
18 M29 G74, G84.3 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE
(LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-62
19 M29 G74, G84.3 DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE

(LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66
20 G76 FINE BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-71
21 G87 BACK BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-76

APPENDIX 1 PATTERN CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-1
1-1 G300 Arc (Equal Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-2

1-2 G301 Arc (Random Intervals). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-5
1-3 G302 Line-at-angle (Equal Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-8
1-4 G303 Line-at-angle (Random Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-11
1-5 G304 Rectangle/Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-14
1-6 G305 Staggered Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-18
1-7 Precautions on Using G300 to G305 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-22
1-8 G306 Circle Cutting Inside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-23
1-9 G307 Circle Cutting Outside (Finishing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-26
1-10 G308 Frame Cutting Inside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-29
1-11 G309 Frame Cutting Outside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-33
APPENDIX 2 MAXIMUM SPINDLE SPEED DURING

RIGID TAPPING OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-37
HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE D-1
1 GENERAL
Hole machining operation is programmed using several blocks of commands.

A hole machining canned cycle allows hole machining operation which requires several blocks of
commands to be programmed using one block of commands including an appropriate G code.
<Basic pattern of hole machining canned cycle>
Basic command format and movement of the hole machining canned cycle are explained below:
<Movement>
A hole machining canned cycle consists of movements 1
Movement 3 Movement 2 to 6 shown in the diagram.
Movements 1, 2, and 6 are common to all canned cycles
called by G73 to G89.
Movement 1
Movement 4 Point Z Movements 3 to 5 vary according to respective canned
Point Z Initial point cycles.
Rapid traverse
Workpiece
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
Z0
or cutting feed
−Z +Z
For a hole machining canned cycle, "initial point", "point R", and "point Z" indicate the
following positions:
• Initial point . . . . . . The position where a hole machining canned cycle starts in the
Z-axis direction
• Point R. . . . . . . . . The position where Z-axis feedrate changes from rapid traverse
rate to the programmed cutting feedrate in the called hole
machining canned cycle
• Point Z . . . . . . . . . The position of the hole bottom in the Z-axis direction
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining start position by the movements of X- and
Y-axes.
Movement 2: Moving to point R at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Hole machining (Hole machining is carried out.)
Movement 4: Movement at hole bottom
Specify dwell and/or spindle orientation if necessary.
Movement 5: Returning to point R level
Whether the Z-axis return movement is executed at a rapid traverse rate

NOTE
or cutting feedrate is determined by the G code specified for calling the
hole machining canned cycle.
Movement 6: Positioning at initial point at rapid traverse rate
D-2 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
COMMAND
G90(G91) G98(G99) G73 - G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ;
• G98 . . . . . . . . Calls the return to initial point level.

NOTE
to the initial point level and positioning is executed by the
X- and Y-axis at the next hole machining position.
(Movement 6)
• G99 . . . . . . . . Calls the return to point R level.

NOTE
to the point R level and positioning is executed by the X-
and Y-axis at the next hole machining position.
(Movement 5)
• G73 - G89 . . . Calls a hole machining canned cycle.
Operation mode from movement 3 to movement 5 is

NOTE
determined according the specified G code.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . Specifies the hole machining positions (in XY plane).
(Movement 1)
• Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the point Z (hole bottom).
the point R.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the point R where Z-axis feedrate changes from a
rapid traverse rate to a cutting feedrate.
the initial point.
• Q . . . . . . . . . . Specifies depth of cut per one infeed motion (G73, G83), or shift
amount (G76, G87). (incremental value)
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the period of dwell function executed at the hole
bottom.
P1500 → 1.5 sec

• K. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of repetitions.
If designation of address K is omitted, hole machining

NOTE
cycle is executed once after the positioning at the hole
position (equivalent to K1).
K0 . . . . . . . . . . . After the positioning at the specified
hole position, hole machining cycle is
not executed.
K1 to K9999 . . . Hole machining cycle is repeated by
the number of times specified by
address K.
Page D-5
Movement 1
Movement 4 Point R
Rapid traverse
Workpiece
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
Z0 or cutting feed
−Z +Z
1. Whether movement 5 is executed at a rapid traverse rate or a cutting feedrate is

NOTE
determined according to the G code specified to call the hole machining canned
cycle. (G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89)
2. When the power is turned on, the G98 mode (the return to the initial point level) is
selected.
3. G98 and G99 are valid only in a hole machining canned cycle and not valid for other
operation.
4. In the F15 format, shift amount (G76, G87) is specified using address I and J.
5. In the F15 format, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.
Using the hole machining canned cycle (G82)

Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y50.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1300 T2;
M03;
X30.0 Y40.0;
G99 G82 X20.0 Y30.0 Z−25.0 R3.0 P100 F100;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle (counter boring cycle)
Machining program
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the hole machining canned cycle
• Z30.0 . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the initial point

(X30.0 Y40.0 Z30.0) • G99. . . . . . . . . Return to the point R level return
mode
Movement 3
Movement 1 • G82. . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle
3
(counter boring cycle)
Movement 4 Initial point • X20.0 Y30.0 . . Hole machining position
Point R (X20.0 Y30.0 Z30.0)
(Z3.0) • Z−25.0 . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the point Z
Movement 5 Movement 2 (hole bottom)
• R3.0 . . . . . . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
Workpiece Rapid traverse
Cutting feed This has the same meaning
as Z3.0.
Z0
• P100 . . . . . . . . Dwell for 0.1 sec at the hole bottom

• F100 . . . . . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
One block of commands including G82 execute a series of operation from movement 1 to
movement 5.
Movement 1: Positioning at the hole machining position (X20.0, Y30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 2: Z-axis movement up to point R (Z3.0) at a rapid traverse rate
Movement 3: Cutting up to the hole bottom (point Z, Z−25.0) at the specified feedrate
100 mm/min
Movement 4: Dwell for 0.1 sec at the hole bottom
Movement 5: Rapid retraction to point R level, as determined by G99
In the G90 incremental mode, the same cycle is programmed as indicated below.
G91 G99 G82 X−10.0 Y−10.0 Z−28.0 R−27.0 P100 F100;
<Number of repetitions "K">
When machining the holes of the same dimensions, arranged in equal intervals, it is possible to
repeat the same hole machining canned cycle by specifying the number of repetitions following
address K. Therefore, the use of a K command can simplify programming.
K0
When K0 is specified, only the data of a hole machining canned cycle is stored.
At the position specified in the block containing K0, hole machining cycle is not executed.
This command is usually used with a sub-program (M98).
For details of a sub-program, refer to page C-19 (8).
(G90) G99 G81 X20.0 Y30.0 Z−25.0 R3.0 F100 K0;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Although positioning is executed at (X20.0, Y30.0), hole
machining is not executed.
X−25.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at (X−25.0, Y20.0), hole machining cycle
is executed.
X−30.0 Y−30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at (X−30.0, Y−30.0), hole machining
cycle is executed.
K1
When K1 is specified, hole machining cycle is executed once at the specified position.
"K1" is omissible. If no K command is specified, it is equivalent to the designation of "K1".
(G90) G99 G81 X20.0 Y30.0 Z−25.0 R3.0 F100 (K1);

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at (X20.0, Y30.0), hole machining cycle
is executed.
X−25.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After positioning at the specified position, hole machining
X−30.0 Y−30.0; cycle is executed.
K2 to K9999
When Kn (n = 2 to 9999) is specified, the specified hole machining cycle is repeated by the
specified number of times.
This is used for machining holes arranged in the same intervals.
If Kn (n = 2 to 9999) is specified, specify the position of the first hole in an incremental

NOTE
mode command.
If an absolute mode command is used to specify the position of the first hole, hole
machining cycle is repeated by the specified number of times at the first hole position.
+Y
C
45
B Hole machining position
35
A
25
15 Present position
+X
10 25 40 55
G90 G00 X10.0 Y15.0 Z30.0; . . . . . . . . Moving to X10.0, Y15.0 (the present position in the
illustration above) at a rapid traverse rate
G91 G99 G81 X15.0 Y10.0 Z−25.0 R−27.0 F100 K3;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The specified hole machining cycle is executed at A, B,
and C.
...
• G91. . . . . . . . . Calls the incremental dimensioning

Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
mode.
• G99. . . . . . . . . Return to the point R level return
Point R mode
Point C
• G81. . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle
• X15.0 Y10.0 . . Specifies the distance between the
holes (in incremental value).
Point B
• Z−25.0 . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction
from point R to point Z (hole bottom).
• R−27.0 . . . . . . Specifies the distance and direction
Point A from initial point to point R.
• F100 . . . . . . . . Feedrate (mm/min)
• K3 . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of times (3
times) the hole machining cycle
3
should be repeated.
The hole machining cycle is
Z−25.0 R-27.0
executed once at each of the three
Point Z Point R Initial point
(Z−22.0) (Z3.0) (Z30.0) positions A, B, and C.
<Operation methods in hole machining canned cycles (G codes)>
The patterns and operation methods called by the hole machining canned cycle G codes are
briefly explained below using diagrams. Typical applications and cautions are also described.
Rapid Semi-rapid Cutting Manual Shift Spindle

(rapid traverse) OSS
traverse traverse feed feed orientation
G73 High-speed deep hole G74 Reverse tapping M29 G74 High-speed deep hole
drilling (left-hand thread) reverse rigid tapping
(left-hand thread)
G98(G99) G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ ; G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle
Spindle reverse Spindle rotation stop
Spindle normal
rotation after dwell rotation rotation stop
Spindle
Q Q Q Q Q Q reverse
rotation
Point R Point Z Point R Point R

Point Z
G99 G98 G99

Initial point G98
G99 G98 Initial point
Initial point
Point Z d d
Spindle normal
rotation after dwell Spindle rotation
stop after dwell
Spindle reverse
rotation after dwell Parameter No. 5200.5 = 0
Deep hole drilling Tapping Deep hole tapping <F16 format>

Q: Depth of cut per pass (Tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
d: Retraction stroke Q: Depth of cut per pass
d: Retraction stroke
M29 G74 Deep hole reverse rigid M29 G74 Reverse rigid tapping G76 Fine boring
tapping (left-hand thread)
(left-hand thread)
M29 S_ ; M29 S_ ; 1. F16 format
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
G98(G99) G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ I_ J_ P_ F_
Spindle
Spindle reverse Spindle
Spindle rotation
Spindle rotation rotation stop rotation rotation stop
stop
stop
Q Q Q Spindle
reverse
rotation
Point R
Point Z Point R
Point Z Point R
G99 G99 G98

G98 Initial point
Initial point Initial point
G98
d Point Z (Spindle normal
Spindle normal Spindle rotation
rotation after dwell Spindle normal rotation
stop after dwell Dwell OSS rotation)
after dwell
Spindle rotation
stop after dwell
Parameter No. 5200.5 = 1 G99 (Spindle normal rotation)
(setting made before shipping the machine)
Deep hole tapping <F16 format> Tapping <F16 format> High precision boring
(No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.) (Boring bar is shifted before
Q: Depth of cut per pass retracting it.)
d: Clearance amount
G81 Spot drilling G82 Counter boring G83 Deep hole drilling
G98(G99) G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ; G98(G99) G82 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ ;
Q Q Q
Point R Point Z Point R Point R
Dwell
G99 G98 G99 G98

Initial point Initial point G99 G98
Point Z dd
Centering Spot facing Deep hole drilling

Drilling shallow holes Q: Depth of cut per pass
d: Clearance amount
M237 G83 Small-diameter deep G84 Tapping M29 G84 High-speed deep hole
hole drilling (right-hand thread) rigid tapping
(right-hand thread)
M237; G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ I_ ; G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle
Spindle reverse Spindle normal Spindle rotation rotation stop
rotationafter dwell rotation stop
Q Q Q Spindle
Q Q Q normal
rotation
Point R Point Z Point R Point Z Point R
G99 G98 G99

Initial point G98
G99 G98 Initial point
Initial point
Point Z d
d
Dwell
Spindle reverse Spindle rotation
Overload torque rotation after dwell stop after dwell
detection Spindle normal
rotation after dwell Parameter No. 5200.5 = 0
Small-diameter deep hole drilling Tapping Deep hole tapping <F16 format>
(The arbor with the overload torque (Tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
detection function is used.) Q: Depth of cut per pass
Q: Depth of cut per pass d: Retraction stroke
d: Clearance amount
<Option>
M29 G84 Deep hole rigid tapping M29 G84 Rigid tapping G84.2 High-speed deep hole
(right-hand thread) (right-hand thread) rigid tapping
(right-hand thread)
M29 S_ ; M29 S_ ; S_ ;
G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle Spindle rotation Spindle normal Spindle Spindle

Spindle rotation Spindle rotation
rotation stop stop rotation rotation stop rotation stop
stop stop
Q Q Q Spindle Spindle
Q Q Q normal
normal
rotation rotation
Point Z Point R Point Z Point R Point Z Point R
G99 G98 G99 G98 G99

Initial point G98
d d
Spindle rotation
Spindle reverse Spindle rotation Spindle reverse stop after dwell Spindle reverse Spindle rotation
rotation after dwell stop after dwell rotation after dwell rotation after dwell stop after dwell
Parameter No. 5200.5 = 1 Parameter No. 5200.5 = 0

Deep hole tapping <F16 format> Tapping <F16 format> Deep hole tapping <F15 format>
(No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
Q: Depth of cut per pass Q: Depth of cut per pass
d: Clearance amount d: Retraction stroke
G84.2 Deep hole rigid tapping G84.2 Rigid tapping G84.3 High-speed deep hole
(right-hand thread) (right-hand thread) reverse rigid tapping
(left-hand thread)
S_ ; S_ ; S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle Spindle
Spindle Spindle rotation normal Spindle Spindle rotation rotation stop
Spindle rotation
rotation stop stop rotation rotation stop stop
stop
Spindle
Q Q Q Spindle Q Q Q reverse
normal rotation
rotation
G99 G99 G98 G99 G98

G98 Initial point
d d
Spindle rotation Spindle normal Spindle rotation
Spindle reverse Spindle rotation Spindle reverse rotation
stop after dwell rotation after dwell stop after dwell
rotation after dwell stop after dwell after dwell
Parameter No. 5200.5 = 1

(setting made before shipping the machine) Parameter No. 5200.5 = 0
Deep hole tapping <F15 format> Tapping <F15 format> Deep hole tapping <F15 format>
(No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
Q: Depth of cut per pass Q: Depth of cut per pass
d: Clearance amount d: Retraction stroke
G84.3 Deep hole reverse rigid G84.3 Reverse rigid tapping G85 Boring
tapping (left-hand thread) (left-hand thread)
S_ ; S_ ; G98(G99) G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ; G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle
Spindle Spindle rotation reverse Spindle
Spindle rotation
rotation stop stop rotation rotation stop
stop
Q Q Q Spindle
reverse
rotation
G99 G99 G98

G98 Initial point G99 G98
d Spindle rotation
Spindle rotation Spindle normal stop after dwell
Spindle normal
rotation after dwell stop after dwell rotation after dwell
Parameter No. 5200.5 = 1

Deep hole tapping <F15 format> Tapping <F15 format> Reaming

(No tapper is used.) (No tapper is used.)
Q: Depth of cut per pass
d: Clearance amount
G86 Boring G87 Back boring G88 Boring (manual extraction)
G98(G99) G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ; 1. F16 format G98(G99) G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

G98 G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 format
G98 G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ I_ J_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle normal OSS OSS

rotation Dwell Spindle normal
rotation
Point R Point Z
Point Z Point R
Point R Point Z G99 G98

G99 G98 Manual return Spindle Spindle
Spindle Spindle normal normal
normal normal roatation roatation
Spindle rotation roatation roatation Spindle rotation
stop stop after dwell
Initial point
Intitial poit
Boring Boring from the back side Boring

(Boring bar is shifted before inserting
into and removing from the
workpiece.)
G89 Boring
G98(G99) G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Point Z Point R
G99 G98
Initial point
Dwell
Boring
WARNING During the execution of a hole machining canned cycle, if the operation is
stopped by pressing the emergency stop button or the RESET (RESET) key,
the hole machining mode and the hole machining data are cleared. To
restart the operation, pay sufficient care. If the operation is restarted
mistakenly, the machine operates unexpectedly causing serious injuries
CAUTION 1. For the tapping cycle called by G74 or G84, a tapper is used. In this case, the
return movement from the bottom of the machined hole to the point R is made
with the tapper extended. Therefore, the point R must be specified larger value
than tapper extending length. If the smaller value is specified, the cutting tool and
workpiece may collide or interfere with each other, and this could damage the
machine when moving to next machining position.
2. When the emergency stop button or RESET (RESET) key has been pressed to stop
the machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the axes after checking
the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes without
3. For the fine boring cycle called by G76 and the back boring cycle called by G87,
mount a boring bit at the position opposite to the boring bar shift direction. If the
boring bit is mounted in the same position as the boring bar shift direction, the
boring bit or boring bar will be hit against the workpiece causing machine
damage. This also causes the boring bit to be broken.
4. In the boring cycle called by G88, any manual operation is allowed after the
spindle has stopped rotating at the bottom of the hole. However, before changing
the operation mode from manual, the cutting tool must be positioned outside the
machined hole. If positioning is carried out to the next machining position before
cutting tool is extracted from the machined hole, the cutting tool will be hit against
the workpiece causing damage to the machine.
1. Generally, positioning for a hole machining canned cycle is executed in the XY plane
NOTE
and the hole machining cycle is executed along the Z-axis.
When changing the hole machining axis to X- or Y-axes, cancel the canned cycle
mode once.
2. The number of times the called hole machining canned cycle should be repeated is
required only when the cycle should be executed repeatedly. Although feedrate
value is retained when the hole machining canned cycle is canceled, the repeat
number data is not retained.
3. To call a hole machining canned cycle, the spindle should have been rotated by the
M03 or M04 command excluding the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle, deep
hole rigid tapping cycle, rigid tapping cycle, high-speed deep hole reverse rigid
tapping cycle, deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle and reverse rigid tapping cycle.
<Good example>
S_ M03;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle normal rotation
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;. . . . . . . . . . Good
<Bad example>
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle stop
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;. . . . . . . . . . Not good
4. In the hole machining canned cycle mode, if any data of X, Y, Z, R, or additional axis
is specified in a block, the called hole machining cycle is executed.
In the block that does not contain any of X, Y, Z, R, or additional axis, the hole
machining cycle is not executed.
However, even if an X command is specified, the hole machining cycle is not
executed if it is specified following the G04 command which calls the dwell function.
5. In the hole machining canned cycle (G74, G84, G76, or G86) which controls the
NOTE
mode of spindle rotation, if the cycle is executed continuously while the distance
from the hole position (X, Y) or initial point to point R is short, there may be cases
that the spindle fails to reach the required speed before it begins hole machining
Z-axis operation.
If such a problem is anticipated, enter the dwell command (G04) between machining
of two holes, without specifying the repeat number.
G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
G04 P _ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes dwell and suspends hole machining
operation
X_ Y_ ;
G04 P_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes dwell and suspends hole machining
operation
X_ Y_ ;
6. The hole machining canned cycle mode is canceled by the G80 command or a G
code of group 01 (G00, G01, G02, G03).
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
G00 X_ Y_ ;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Only X- and Y-axes are moved, the hole
machining canned cycle is not executed.
G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The called hole machining canned cycle is
executed.
7. Do not specify any of G codes of group 01 (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.) with a G code
which calls a hole machining canned cycle in the same block.
If a G code which calls a hole machining canned cycle is specified with a G code of
group 01 in the same block, the hole machining canned cycle is canceled.
8. After the completion of hole machining operation executed using a hole machining
canned cycle, cancel the hole machining canned cycle by specifying G80 or a G
code in 01 group (G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.).
9. When miscellaneous function is specified with a G code which calls a hole
machining canned cycle in the same block, the M code is output at the first
positioning. After the completion of positioning, the next hole machining cycle is
started after checking the M code completion signal (FIN).
If the number of repetitions is specified, the M code is output only in the first cycle
and is not output after that.
10. If the G43 or G44 command is specified in a hole machining canned cycle mode,
tool length offset is applied when positioning is made at the point R.
11. The tool position offset mode (G45 - G48) cannot be specified in a hole machining
canned cycle mode.
12. Do not specify G27 - G30 commands in a hole machining canned cycle mode.
If G27 - G30 commands are specified in a hole machining canned cycle mode, an
alarm message (No. 044) is displayed on the screen.
13. During the tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed override are fixed to
NOTE
100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is
changed during tapping cycle.
14. For the fine boring cycle called by G76 and the back boring cycle called by G87, if
shift amount Q or I and J is improper, the cutting tool will interfere with the workpiece
when it is moved up to be extracted from the workpiece.
15. If G80 is specified, point R and point Z data and hole machining data are canceled in
addition to the G code (G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89) calling for a hole machining
canned cycle.
16. In the back boring cycle called by G87, the point R return operation (G99) cannot be
specified.
17. Even when carrying out manual operation by specifying the G88 boring cycle
(manual extraction), point R and initial point do not vary.
2 G80 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL
The G80 command is used to cancel a hole machining canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89)
and to allow ordinary operation to be executed.
Since a hole machining canned cycle is modal, once it is specified, the canned cycle mode
remains valid until it is canceled with the G80 command. Therefore, after completing the process
to be executed in the hole machining canned cycle mode, specify the G80 command in the next
block before executing an axis movement command.
COMMAND
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels a hole machining canned cycle.
1. The hole machining canned cycle mode is also canceled if a G code of group 01
NOTE
(G00, G01, G02, G03, etc.) is executed.
2. If G80 is specified, point R and point Z data and hole machining data are canceled in
addition to the G code (G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89) calling for a hole machining
canned cycle.

Ex.
To carry out the spot drilling cycle (G81) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
(Point R) (Initial point)
Movement by G81 at points 1 and 2
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y30.0; . . . . . . . . . Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate in the work
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 1 with
depth of cut 5 mm
• Z−5.0 . . . Z coordinate value of the point Z
(hole bottom)
• R3.0 . . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
• F100 . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the spot drilling canned cycle mode (G81)
If "G00 X_ Y_ ;" is specified, the hole machining

canned cycle mode is canceled.
This is because the G00 command, a G code
belonging to 01 group, is specified.
3 G81 SPOT DRILLING CYCLE
The spot drilling cycle is a simple cycle in which drilling is

carried out in the -Z direction and then the cutting tool is
returned at a rapid traverse rate.
The G81 spot drilling cycle is used for machining a center
hole by a centering drill or drilling of comparatively shallow
hole.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;
• G98 . . . . . . Calls the initial point level return

operation.
• G99 . . . . . . Calls the point R level return
operation.
Point R
• G81 . . . . . . Calls the spot drilling canned cycle.
• X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the
G99 G98
Point Z
Initial point position where spot drilling cycle
should be executed in the XY plane.
• Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z.(hole
bottom)
Rapid traverse
Drilling (Cutting feed) • R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.
• F . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate (mm/min).
Specify address R in the block in which hole machining operation is specified.

NOTE
If it is specified in a block where hole machining operation is not specified, the data of
address R is not saved.

Ex.
To carry out the spot drilling cycle (G81) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at point 1
(hole bottom)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) cycle at point 2
4 G82 COUNTER BORING CYCLE
The counter boring cycle carries out drilling in the

negative (−) direction of Z-axis and returns the cutting tool
at a rapid traverse rate.
Although the G82 counter boring cycle calls the same
movement pattern as with the G81 mode (spot drilling
cycle), it includes dwell at the bottom of the machined
hole before the cutting tool is returned.
The term "dwell" means suspension of axis

movement for the specified period.
Since dwell is carried out at the hole bottom, accuracy of

hole depth in the blind hole machining is improved and
surface roughness at the hole bottom is improved as well.
The G82 counter boring canned cycle is usually used for
spot facing operation.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G82 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G82 . . . . . . Calls the counter boring canned cycle.
Dwell
G99 G98
Initial point position where counter boring cycle
should be executed in the XY plane.
• Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z. (hole
bottom)
Rapid traverse
Drilling (Cutting feed) • R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.
• P . . . . . . . . . Specifies dwell period at hole bottom.
P1000 → 1 second

NOTE
The time required for the spindle to make one turn is calculated by:
60 (sec)
t (sec) =
spindle speed (min−1)

Ex.
To carry out the counter boring cycle (G82) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Dwell at
2 1 hole bottom
30
for 0.1 sec
+X
5
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G82 Z−5.0 R3.0 P100 F100;. . . . . Executing the counter boring cycle (G82) at point 1
(hole bottom)
• P100 . . . . Dwell period at hole bottom for 0.1 sec
Spindle 1 turn time (sec)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
As known from the calculation above, the
spindle rotates more than one turn.
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the counter boring cycle (G82) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the counter boring canned cycle mode (G82)
5 G85 BORING CYCLE
The boring cycle carries out drilling in the negative (−)

direction of Z-axis and returns the cutting tool at a cutting
feedrate.
Although the G85 boring cycle calls the same movement
pattern as with the G81 mode (spot drilling cycle), its
return movement to the point R is executed at a cutting
feedrate.
The G85 boring canned cycle is usually used for reaming
and boring operation.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G85 . . . . . . Calls the boring canned cycle.
G99 G98 • X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the
Initial point
center of hole to be machined in the
XY plane.
bottom)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed • R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.

NOTE

Ex.
To carry out the boring cycle (G85) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50
Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X
10
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G85 Z−10.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . Executing the boring cycle (G85) at point 1
• Z−10.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z
(hole bottom)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the boring cycle (G85) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the boring canned cycle mode (G85)
6 G86 BORING CYCLE
The boring cycle carries out drilling in the negative (−)

feedrate.
pattern as with the G81 mode (spot drilling cycle), spindle
rotation stops at the hole bottom before the start of return
movement which is executed at a rapid traverse rate.
The G86 boring canned cycle is usually used for boring
operation.
Since the cutting tool returns while tool nose

NOTE
contacting with the machined surface, tool
retraction trace is left on the surface. Therefore,
this canned cycle is not appropriate for boring
operation which required high surface finishing
quality.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G86 . . . . . . Calls the boring canned cycle.
G99 G98
Spindle Spindle
normal normal
Spindle rotation roatation roatation
stop
XY plane.
Intitial poit
bottom)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed • R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.

NOTE

Ex.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Spindle stops
at the hole
2 1 30
bottom
+X
10
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G86 Z−10.0 R3.0 F100; . . . . . . . . Executing the boring cycle (G86) at point 1
(hole bottom)
7 G88 BORING CYCLE (MANUAL TOOL EXTRACTION)
In the G88 boring cycle mode, dwell is executed at the

bottom of the machined hole and then the spindle stops
rotating. The operation is suspended in this state.
Since the operation is suspended while the cutting tool is
at the bottom of the hole, it is possible to carry out manual
operation after selecting the manual mode.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

operation.
operation.
Point R Point Z
• G88 . . . . . . Calls the boring canned cycle (manual
G99 G98 tool extraction).
Manual return Spindle Spindle
normal normal • X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the
roatation roatation
Spindle rotation center of hole to be machined in the
stop after dwell
Initial point XY plane.
Rapid traverse • Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z. (hole

Cutting feed bottom)
Manual feed
• R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.
• P . . . . . . . . . Specifies dwell period.
P1000 → 1 second
CAUTION In the boring cycle called by G88, any manual operation is allowed after the spindle has
stopped rotating at the bottom of the hole. However, before changing the operation
mode from manual, the cutting tool must be positioned outside the machined hole. If
positioning is carried out to the next machining position before cutting tool is extracted
from the machined hole, the cutting tool will be hit against the workpiece causing
1. To restart the operation after extracting the cutting tool from the machined hole,
NOTE
select the memory mode and press the (ST) switch. The cutting tool returns to
the initial point level (G98) or the point R level (G99) according to the specified mode
(G98, G99).
After that the spindle starts rotating and the operation is carried out according to the
commands in the next block.
2. Even when carrying out manual operation by specifying the G88 boring cycle
NOTE
(manual extraction), point R and initial point do not vary.
3. Specify address R in the block in which hole machining operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where hole machining operation is not specified, the data
of address R is not saved.

Ex.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50
Cutting feed
Spindle Manual feed
rotation
stop after
2 1
dwell at
30
hole bottom
+X for 0.1 sec
15
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
(G98) G88 Z−15.0 R3.0 P100 F100; . . Executing the boring cycle (G88) at point 1
(hole bottom)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
8 G89 BORING CYCLE (DWELL)
The boring cycle carries out boring in the negative (−)

feedrate.
pattern as with the G85 mode (boring cycle), its patterns
includes dwell at the bottom of the machined hole. The
accuracy of the bottom of the hole is improved by dwell
operation.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G89 . . . . . . Calls the boring canned cycle (dwell).
Initial point
Dwell
XY plane.
Rapid traverse bottom)
Cutting feed
P1000 → 1 second

NOTE

Ex.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50
Cutting feed
Dwell at
hole bottom
2 1 for 0.1 sec
30
+X
15
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G89 Z−15.0 R3.0 P100 F100;. . . . Executing the boring cycle (G89) at point 1
(hole bottom)
60 (sec)
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
9 G73 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE
In the G73 high-speed deep hole drilling cycle, drilling

cycle in intermittent feed is executed.
As shown in the illustration below, after the infeed of a drill
by "Q", it is returned by "d", then the next infeed is
repeated.
By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is
possible to drill a deep hole without applying excessive
force to the drill.
When carrying out drilling on mild or tough

workpieces, long chips are apt to entangle on the
drill. In such operation, this mode of drilling cycle
is used to break chips.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ ;

operation.
Q Q Q • G99 . . . . . . Calls the point R level return
operation.
Point R
• G73 . . . . . . Calls the high-speed deep hole drilling
canned cycle.
G99 G98
Initial point • X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the
Point Z d position where drilling cycle should be
executed in the XY plane.
Rapid traverse • Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z. (hole
Drilling (Cutting feed) bottom)
• Q . . . . . . . . Depth of cut per infeed cycle
1. The return amount "d" is set for parameter No. 5114.

NOTE
The default setting is "100" (= 0.1 mm).
2. Specify addresses R and Q in the block in which hole machining operation is
specified.
If they are specified in a block where hole machining operation is not specified, the
data of addresses R and Q is not saved.
3. If a negative value is specified for address Q, it is invalid. Always specify a positive
value for address Q.

Ex.
To carry out the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G73) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 5 5 5 5
Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X d
17
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G73 Z−17.0 R3.0 Q5.0 F100; . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G73) at
point 1
(hole bottom)
• Q5.0 . . . . Depth of cut per infeed cycle of 5 mm
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G73) at
point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the high-speed deep hole drilling canned cycle
mode (G73)
10 G83 DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE
In the G83 deep hole drilling cycle, drilling cycle in

intermittent feed is executed.
As shown in the illustration in the left, after the infeed of a
drill by "Q", the drill is returned to the point R at a rapid
traverse rate. In the next infeed, the drill is moved to the
point which is above the depth drilled in the previous
operation by clearance amount "d" at a rapid traverse
rate, then it is fed by "Q".
By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is
possible to drill a deep hole without applying excessive
force to the drill.
When carrying out drilling a deep hole where

coolant cannot be supplied satisfactorily or drilling
a workpiece which generates entangling chips,
this drilling pattern can be effectively used.
COMMAND
G98(G99) G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ ;

operation.
Q Q Q
operation.
Point R
• G83 . . . . . . Calls the deep hole drilling canned
cycle.

Point Z dd Initial point position where drilling cycle should be
executed in the XY plane.
Rapid traverse
Drilling (Cutting feed) bottom)
1. The clearance amount "d" is set for parameter No. 5115.

NOTE
The default setting is "1000" (= 1 mm).
specified.

Ex.
To carry out the deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 5 5 5 5
Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X d
17
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G83 Z−17.0 R3.0 Q5.0 F100; . . . . Executing the deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at point 1
(hole bottom)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole drilling cycle (G83) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the deep hole drilling canned cycle mode (G83)
11 M237 G83 SMALL-DIAMETER DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE
In the M237 G83 small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle,

drilling cycle in intermittent feed is executed. Infeed and
retraction are controlled based on a fixed amount of depth
of cut per pass and overload torque detection.
As shown in the illustration in the left, if overload torque
detected signal is received during infeed by the
programmed amount Q or when a drill is fed as much as
the programmed amount Q, the drill is returned to the
point R at the semi-rapid traverse rate specified by
address I. In the next infeed, the drill is moved to the
point which is away from the depth drilled the previous
operation by clearance amount "d" at the semi-rapid
traverse rate specified by address I, then is fed by "Q".
It is possible to change the cutting condition at each detection of overload torque or each infeed by
"Q" by setting an appropriate parameter.
By repeating this infeed and retract pattern, it is possible to drill a small-diameter deep hole
without applying the load exceeding the preset level to the small-diameter drill.
This cycle is used for drilling with a small-diameter drill that is easily broken.
1. This cycle needs the use of an arbor that has the overload torque detection function.
NOTE
Note that the arbor with the overload torque detection function should be arranged
by the user.
2. The M237 G83 small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle is an optional function.
COMMAND
M237;
G98(G99) G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ I_ ;
• M237 . . . . . Calls the small-diameter deep hole

Q Q Q drilling cycle mode.
operation.
Point R
operation.
G99 G98
Initial point
Point Z d • G83 . . . . . . Calls the deep hole drilling canned
Dwell cycle.
Overload torque
detection • X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the
position where drilling cycle should be
Rapid traverse
Semi-rapid traverse executed in the XY plane.
Drilling (Cutting feed) • Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z. (hole
bottom)

P1000 → 1 second
• F . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting feedrate

(mm/min).
• I . . . . . . . . . Specifies the semi-rapid traverse rate
to be used in the small-diameter deep
hole drilling cycle (mm/min).
This feedrate is applied to tool
retraction from the hole bottom to the
point R level and also to tool approach
from the point R level to the cutting
start position.
I500 → 500 mm/min
1. The clearance amount "d" is set for parameter No. 5174

NOTE

specified.
4. If designation of address I is omitted, the values set for the parameters below are
used for the semi-rapid traverse rate.
No. 5172: Feedrate for tool retraction from the hole bottom to the point R or initial
point level.
No. 5173: Feedrate for tool approach from the point R level to the cutting start
position.
5. The M code number to be used for this function may set for parameter No. 5163.
Before shipping the machine "237" is set. When changing the setting for this
parameter, make sure to use an M code number that is not used in your machine.
<Changing the cutting conditions>
In the small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle, it is possible to change the cutting conditions
gradually at each detection of overload torque or at each infeed by depth Q. The parameters used
for this function are explained below.
1. Whether or not the cutting conditions are changed
No. 5106 #1 0: Changes the cutting conditions at each detection of overload torque
1: Does not change the cutting conditions after the detection of overload
torque
No. 5160 #2 0: Changes the cutting conditions at each infeed by depth Q.
1: Does not change the cutting conditions after the infeed by depth Q.
2. Changing spindle speed (S code command)
No. 5164 Sets the spindle speed change ratio before and after the detection of
overload torque in percents.
No. 5165 Sets the spindle speed change ratio before and after the infeed by depth Q
in percents.
3. Changing feedrate (F code command)
No. 5166 Sets the feedrate change ratio before and after the detection of overload
torque in percents.
No. 5167 Sets the feedrate change ratio before and after the infeed by depth Q in
percents.
4. Lower limit in changing the cutting condition
No. 5168 Sets the lower limit of the feedrate in changing the cutting condition in the
ratio (percents) to the F code specified in the program.
If the feedrate reaches this lower limit, spindle speed and feedrate are not
changed any more.
Values to be set for parameters No. 5164 to No. 5167:

NOTE
If "100" is set, the cutting conditions are not changed. Setting of value "90", for example,
reduces the cutting conditions while setting of value "110", for example, increases cutting
conditions.
Programming using M237 G83

Ex.
To carry out the small-diameter deep hole drilling at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50 5 5 5 5
Semi-rapid traverse
Cutting feed
2 1
30
+X d
17
Z3.0 Z30.0
Movement by M237 G83 at points 1 and 2
O0001;
N1;
M237;
G99 G83 Z−17.0 R3.0 Q5.0 F100 I1000;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the small-diameter deep hole drilling at point 1
(hole bottom)
• F100 . . . . Cutting feedrate of 100 mm/min
• I1000 . . . Semi-rapid traverse rate of 1000 mm/min
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the small-diameter deep hole drilling at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the small-diameter deep hole drilling canned
cycle mode
12 G84 TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD)
The right-hand tapping canned cycle called by G84 is

used for machining right-hand thread using a tap.
When a cutting tool rotating in the normal direction
reaches the specified bottom position, the cutting tool
rotating direction is reversed automatically to return to the
specified level.
To use this tapping cycle, a tapper is used.

NOTE
COMMAND
G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

Spindle reverse Spindle normal
rotationafter dwell rotation
operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G84 . . . . . . Calls the tapping canned cycle.
G99 G98 (right-hand thread)
Initial point
center of the hole to be machined in
the XY plane.
Spindle normal
rotation after dwell • Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z.
Rapid traverse • R. . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point R.

Drilling (Cutting feed)
• P . . . . . . . . . Specifies dwell period at point Z, or
after returning to point R.
P1000 → 1 second

(spindle speed × pitch)
CAUTION 1. For the tapping cycle called by G84, a tapper is used. In this case, the return
movement from the bottom of the machined hole to the point R level is made with
the tapper extended. Therefore, the point R level must be specified larger value
than tapper extending length. If the smaller value is specified, the cutting tool and
workpiece may collide or interfere with each other, and this could damage the
machine when moving to next machining position.
2. When the emergency stop button or RESET

(RESET) key has been pressed to stop
the machine during a tapping operation, carefully move the axes after checking
the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes without
1. During the tapping cycle called by G84, feedrate override and spindle speed
NOTE
override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or
spindle speed is changed during tapping cycle.
2. If the (SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during tapping cycle,
tapping cycle does not stop until the Z-axis returns to the point R or initial point level
is completed.
3. Specify address R in the block in which tapping operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where tapping operation is not specified, the data of

Ex.
To carry out the tapping cycle (G84) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20 mm) at points 1 and 2.
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Dwell at Normal rotation

2 1 hole bottom Z30.0
Reverse rotation
30
(Initial point)
+X Z15.0
20 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point level (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse
rate
G99 G84 Z−_ R15.0 P1000 F800; . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84) at point 1
Tapping is executed up to 20 mm depth.
Feedrate F
= Spindle speed (min−1) × Pitch (mm)
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
For the Z-axis point, specify "Z− (20 − tapper
elongation in normal rotation)".
For dwell period P, refer to page D-43.
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84) at point 2

G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the tapping canned cycle mode (G84)
13 G74 REVERSE TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD)
The left-hand tapping canned cycle called by G74 is used

for machining left-hand thread using a tap.
When a cutting tool rotating in the reverse direction
reaches the specified bottom position, the cutting tool
rotating direction is reversed to normal automatically to
return to the specified level.
To use this tapping cycle, a tapper is used.

NOTE
COMMAND
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;

Spindle normal rotation Spindle reverse
after dwell rotation operation.
operation.
Point Z Point R
• G74 . . . . . . Calls the reverse tapping canned
G99 G98 cycle. (left-hand thread)
Initial point
XY plane.
Spindle reverse
rotation after dwell • Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z.
Cutting feed
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION 1. For the reverse tapping cycle called by G74, a tapper is used. In this case, the
return movement from the bottom of the machined hole to the point R level is
made with the tapper extended. Therefore, the point R level must be specified
larger value than tapper extending length. If the smaller value is specified, the
cutting tool and workpiece may collide or interfere with each other, and this could
damage the machine when moving to next machining position.
2. When the emergency stop button or RESET

(RESET) key has been pressed to stop
the machine during a reverse tapping operation, carefully move the axes after
checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the
axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with
each other, and this could cause damage to the machine.
1. During the reverse tapping cycle called by G74, feedrate override and spindle speed
NOTE
spindle speed is changed during reverse tapping cycle.
2. If the (SP) switch on the operation panel is pressed during reverse tapping
cycle, reverse tapping cycle does not stop until the Z-axis returns to the point R or
initial point level is completed.
3. Specify address R in the block in which reverse tapping operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where reverse tapping operation is not specified, the data
of address R is not saved.
Ex.
To carry out the reverse tapping cycle (G74) (pitch: 2 mm, depth: 20 mm) at points 1 and 2.
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Normal rotation
Dwell at
2 1 hole bottom Z30.0
Reverse rotation
30
(Initial point)
+X Z15.0
20 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the reverse direction at 400 min−1
G99 G74 Z−_ R15.0 P1000 F800; . . . . Executing the reverse tapping cycle (G74) at point 1
Reverse tapping is executed up to 20 mm depth.
Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
For the Z-axis point, specify "Z− (20 − tapper
elongation in reverse rotation)".
For dwell period P, refer to page D-43.
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the reverse tapping cycle (G74) at point 2

G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the reverse tapping canned cycle mode (G74)
<Cautions on programming using G84 and G74>
<Dwell command>
The following explains in what situation the dwell command should be used in the G84 tapping
cycle and the G74 reverse rigid tapping cycle.
Dwell To Be Specified Not Required

Blind hole Through hole
Tap hole shape
Tapper Built-in depth sizing device No special restriction

Tapper is pulled into the hole Tapper is extended from the feed
from the feed stop point of Z-axis stop point of Z-axis.
by the amount of tapper Tapper has allowance to extend
extension. When the tapper is 20 to 30 mm. But, actual
Tapper extension extended by the set amount, the extension amount cannot be
amount depth sizing device built in the judged.
tapper functions and rotation is
not transmitted to the tap, then
tapping of specified depth is
carried out.
<Precautions on using the tapper>
When carrying out tapping in a through hole, extension of tapper tip at the hole bottom can be
ignored. However, in the case of a blind hole, if the tapper should extend beyond the depth of the
prepared hole, it will cause the tap to be damaged.
To avoid such a problem, use the tapper with built-in depth sizing device for tapping a blind hole.
Value of Z Can be ignored Tap will be damaged

in the Program (through hole) (blind hole)
Z−20.0 R15.0
Z−20.0 Z−20.0
The following distances of F1, F2, and F3 are specified in the catalog of the tapper with built-in
depth sizing device.
F3 F2 F1
Necessary if the tap fails to be engaged with the workpiece

F1 Contraction
positively at the start of tapping.
Extension amount at the hole bottom. This is an extension
F2 Extension amount amount of a tapper in normal spindle rotation (right-hand
thread) and in reverse spindle rotation (left-hand thread).
For right-hand thread, this is the extension amount when
the tapper leaves the workpiece while the spindle is
Extension amount rotating in the reverse direction.
F3 when the tap is pulled
For left-hand thread, this is the extension amount when the
out.
tapper leaves the workpiece while the spindle is rotating in
the normal direction.
<To finish tapping at correct depth in blind hole>
When machining a threaded hole with the tapper equipped with depth sizing device, obtain the
point R and point Z to be specified in a program as indicated below:
Note that the explanation given below shows the theoretical value. The depth of tapped hole will
vary depending on workpiece material and prepared hole diameter in actual operation.
The following explanation is given assuming right-hand thread cutting. For left-hand
NOTE
thread cutting operation, pay attention to the rotation direction which is reversed from the
explanation.
Point R • Position of point R

R > F2 (extension amount at normal rotation)
+ F3 (extension amount at reverse rotation)
Greater than "F2 + F3"
Tap bottom Point Z • Position of point Z

Determine the point Z position as:
Z = "Depth of tap specified in the drawing"
− "F2 (extension amount at normal rotation)"
F2
Ex.
To carry out tapping of M8 P = 1.25, and 20 mm deep threaded hole in the tapping cycle (G84).
Prepared hole: 6.8 mm dia., depth 25 mm
Tapper to be used: F2 = 5 mm, F3 = 7 mm
S300 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the normal direction at 300 min−1
G99 G84 X_ Y_ Z−15.0 R15.0 P800 F375;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84)
• Z−15.0 . . . . . Z = "Depth of tap" − "F2 (extension amount at the normal rotation)"
=20 − 5 = 15 (mm)
• R15.0 . . . . . . R > F2 (extension amount at the normal rotation) + F3 (extension amount
at the reverse rotation)
=5 + 7 = 12 (mm)
Because the value to be set for the point R must be larger than 12 mm, R15.0
is specified.
• F375 . . . . . . F = Spindle speed (min−1) × pitch (mm)

= 300 × 1.25 = 375 (mm/min)
60 (sec) × F2
• P800 . . . . . . Dwell =
F (mm/min)
60 × 5
= = 0.8 (sec)
375
To machine the thread to the depth of 20 mm correctly,

calculate the dwell period, specified by P, as indicated
above.
When the tapper is extended by F2 (extension amount at
normal rotation), set by the built-in depth sizing device,
the tap reaches "Z−20" mm and further cut is not made.
F2 However, if the spindle stops before the tapper is
Z−20.0 Z−15.0 extended by F2 and returns in the reverse rotation, it
causes the thread shallower than the specified depth is
cut.
Accordingly, it is necessary to specify dwell for a proper
period so that the tapper is extended by F2 correctly.
14 M29 G84, G84.2 RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD)
When executing the tapping operation, Z-axis feed

amount per spindle rotation must be equal to the pitch of
the thread to be cut.
In rigid tapping cycle, accurate tapping operation is
possible since the spindle rotation and the Z-axis feed are
constantly synchronized.
COMMAND 1. F16 Format (setting made before shipping the machine)

M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
• M29 . . . . . . Specifies the rigid tapping.
Spindle rotation Spindle normal Spindle
rotation rotation stop
S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
stop
•
operation.
Point Z Point R
G99 G98
Initial point operation.
• G84 . . . . . . Calls the tapping cycle. (right-hand
Spindle rotation
Spindle reverse
stop after dwell thread)
rotation after dwell
• G84.2 . . . . . Calls the rigid tapping cycle.
Rapid traverse (right-hand thread)
Cutting feed
• X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value of the
the XY plane.
• Z . . . . . . . . . Specifies the position of point Z.
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
When the emergency stop button or RESET
(RESET) key has been pressed to stop the
machine during a rigid tapping operation, carefully move the axes after checking the
workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes without due
care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each other, and this
could damage the machine.
1. During rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed override are fixed to
NOTE
100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is
changed during rigid tapping cycle.
2. If the (SP) switch is pressed during rigid tapping cycle, the cycle does not stop
until the cutting tool returns to the initial point level (G98) or the point R level (G99).
3. Call the rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is stopped.
4. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the rigid tapping
mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
5. Specify address R in the block in which rigid tapping operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where rigid tapping operation is not specified, the data of
For the maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping operation, refer to page
APPENDIX D-37 (APPENDIX 2).

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 20 mm at points 1 and 2 in the rigid tapping cycle
(M29 G84) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Spindle
rotation Normal rotation
stops at Z30.0
2 1 Reverse rotation
30
the hole (Initial point)

bottom
+X Z5.0
20 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;
G43 Z30.0 H1 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
The spindle remains stopped.

NOTE
M29 S400; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the rigid tapping

G99 G84 Z−20.0 R5.0 F800; . . . . . . . . Executing the rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
2. The spindle is stopped between the initial
point and the point R.
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84)
Programming using G84.2

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 20 mm at points 1 and 2 in the rigid tapping cycle
(G84.2) <F15 format>
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Spindle
rotation Normal rotation
2 1 stops at Z30.0
Reverse rotation
30

bottom
+X Z5.0
20 (Point R)
Movement by G84.2 at points 1 and 2
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.2 Z−20.0 R5.0 F800; . . . . . . . Executing the rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the rigid tapping cycle (G84.2)
15 M29 G84, G84.2 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING

CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD)
In the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle called by

M29 G84 or G84.2, right-hand rigid tapping cycle in
intermittent feed is executed.
As shown in the illustration below, after the infeed of a tap
by "Q" with the spindle rotating in the normal direction, it
returns by "d" in the reverse rotation of the spindle, then
the next infeed is repeated in the normal rotation of the
spindle.
By repeating this infeed and return pattern, it is possible to
execute deep hole tapping without applying excessive
force to the tap.
1. Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping
NOTE
cycle.
2. The return amount "d" is set for parameter #5213.
When carrying out tapping on mild or tough workpieces, long chips are apt to entangle on
the tool. In such operation, this mode of tapping cycle is used to break chips.

M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
• M29 . . . . . . Specifies the rigid tapping
Spindle rotation Spindle
rotation stop
stop
• S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
Spindle
Q Q Q normal
rotation • G98 . . . . . . Calls the initial point level return
operation.
Point Z Point R
G99 G98 operation.
Initial point
d • G84 . . . . . . Calls the high-speed deep hole

Spindle reverse Spindle rotation tapping cycle (right-hand thread)
rotation after dwell stop after dwell
• G84.2 . . . . . Calls the high-speed deep hole rigid
Rapid traverse tapping cycle (right-hand thread).
Cutting feed
the XY plane.

P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
machine during a high-speed deep hole rigid tapping operation, carefully move the
axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move
the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with
each other, and this could damage the machine.
1. During high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle
NOTE
speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if
feedrate or spindle speed is changed during high-speed deep hole rigid tapping
cycle. If "1" is set for parameter No. 5200.4, however, the axis returns by clearance
amount "d" in the spindle reverse rotation with the override value set for parameter
No. 5211 applied to axis feedrate. Whether the override value is set in units of 1% or
10% is set for parameter No. 5201.3.
2. Call the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is stopped.
3. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the high-speed deep
hole rigid tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
4. Specify addresses Q and R in the block in which high-speed deep hole rigid tapping
operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where high-speed deep hole rigid tapping operation is not
specified, the data of addresses Q and R is not saved.
6. If address Q is omitted or "Q0" is specified, a normal rigid tapping cycle is executed
but a high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle is not executed.
For the maximum spindle speed during high-speed deep hole rigid tapping operation,
refer to page APPENDIX D-37 (APPENDIX 2).
Programming using M29 G84 (High-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle)
Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 45 mm at points 1 and 2 in the high-speed deep hole
rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle.
NOTE
+Y Rapid traverse
Normal rotation
50 50 Cutting feed
10 10 10 10 10
Z30.0
2 1
30
(Initial point)
Reverse rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
• S400 . . . . Spindle speed of 400 min−1

G99 G84 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800; . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(M29 G84) at point 1
• Q10.0 . . . Depth of cut per infeed cycle of 10 mm
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(M29 G84) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(M29 G84)
Programming using G84.2 (High-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle)

Ex.
rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) <F15 format>
Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle.
NOTE
+Y Rapid traverse
Normal rotation
50 50 Cutting feed
10 10 10 10 10
Z30.0
2 1
(Initial point)
30
Reverse rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.2 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(G84.2) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(G84.2) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the high-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle
(G84.2)
16 M29 G84, G84.2 DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE

(RIGHT-HAND THREAD)
In the deep hole rigid tapping cycle called by M29 G84 or

G84.2, right-hand rigid tapping cycle in intermittent feed is
executed.
tap by "Q" in the spindle normal rotation, the tap is
returned to the point R in the spindle reverse rotation. In
the next infeed, the tap is moved to the point which is
above the depth tapped in the previous operation by
clearance amount "d" in the spindle normal rotation, then
it is fed by "Q" in the spindle normal rotation.
force to the tap.
1. Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (setting
NOTE
made before shipping the machine).
2. The clearance amount "d" is set for parameter #5213.
When tapping a deep hole where coolant cannot be supplied satisfactorily or carrying out
tapping on a workpiece which generates entangling chips, this mode of tapping cycle can
be effectively used.
M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G84 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.2 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle • M29 . . . . . . Specifies the rigid tapping

Spindle rotation
rotation stop
S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
stop
•
Q Q Q Spindle
normal
Point R
operation.
Point Z

G99 G98
Initial point operation.
d • G84 . . . . . . Calls the deep hole tapping cycle

Spindle reverse
Spindle rotation (right-hand thread)
rotation after dwell
stop after dwell
• G84.2 . . . . . Calls the deep hole rigid tapping cycle
Rapid traverse (right-hand thread).
Cutting feed
the XY plane.
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
machine during a deep hole rigid tapping operation, carefully move the axes after
checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes
without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each
other, and this could damage the machine.
1. During deep hole rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed override
NOTE
are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle
speed is changed during deep hole rigid tapping cycle. If "1" is set for parameter No.
5200.4, however, the axis returns to the R-point level in the spindle reverse rotation
with the override value set for parameter No. 5211 applied to axis feedrate. After
that the axis moves to the point, which is away from the previously machined
position by clearance amount "d", in the normal rotation of the spindle. Whether the
override value is set in units of 1% or 10% is set for parameter No. 5201.3.
2. Call the deep hole rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is stopped.
3. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the deep hole rigid
tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
4. Specify addresses Q and R in the block in which deep hole rigid tapping operation is
specified.
If it is specified in a block where deep hole rigid tapping operation is not specified,
the data of addresses Q and R is not saved.

NOTE
6. If address Q is omitted or "Q0" is specified, a normal rigid tapping cycle is executed
but a deep hole rigid tapping cycle is not executed.
For the maximum spindle speed during deep hole rigid tapping operation, refer to page
Programming using M29 G84 (Deep hole rigid tapping cycle)

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 45 mm at points 1 and 2 in the deep hole rigid
tapping cycle (M29 G84) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (setting made
NOTE
before shipping the machine).
+Y
Normal rotation Rapid traverse
50 50
10 10 10 10 10 Cutting feed
Z30.0
2 1
30
(Initial point)
Reverse rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE

G99 G84 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800; . . . Executing the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84) at
point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84) at
point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (M29 G84)
Programming using G84.2 (Deep hole rigid tapping cycle)

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 45 mm at points 1 and 2 in the deep hole rigid
tapping cycle (G84.2) <F15 format>
Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (setting made
NOTE
before shipping the machine).
+Y
Normal rotation Rapid traverse
50 50
Z30.0
2 1
30
(Initial point)
Reverse rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.2 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) at
point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (G84.2) at
point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the deep hole rigid tapping cycle (G84.2)
17 M29 G74, G84.3 REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND

THREAD)
When executing the reverse tapping operation, Z-axis

feed amount per spindle rotation must be equal to the
pitch of the thread to be cut.
In reverse rigid tapping cycle, accurate reverse tapping
operation is possible since the spindle rotation and the
Z-axis feed are constantly synchronized.

M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Spindle • M29 . . . . . . Specifies the rigid tapping.

Spindle rotation reverse Spindle
stop rotation rotation stop • S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
operation.
Point Z Point R
G99 G98 operation.
Initial point
• G74 . . . . . . Calls the reverse tapping cycle.
Spindle rotation (left-hand thread)
Spindle normal rotation
stop after dwell
after dwell
• G84.3 . . . . . Calls the reverse rigid tapping cycle.
Rapid traverse (left-hand thread)
Cutting feed • X, Y . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value of the
the XY plane.
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
machine during a reverse rigid tapping operation, carefully move the axes after
checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the axes
without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each
1. During reverse rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed override are
NOTE
fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed
is changed during reverse rigid tapping cycle.
2. If the (SP) switch is pressed during reverse rigid tapping cycle, the cycle does
not stop until the cutting tool returns to the initial point level (G98) or the point R level
(G99).
3. Call the reverse rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is stopped.
4. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the reverse rigid
tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
5. Specify address R in the block in which reverse rigid tapping operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where reverse rigid tapping operation is not specified, the
data of address R is not saved.
For the maximum spindle speed during reverse rigid tapping operation, refer to page

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 20 mm at points 1 and 2 in the reverse rigid tapping
cycle (M29 G74) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Spindle
rotation Reverse rotation
2 stops at Z30.0
1 30 Normal rotation
bottom
+X Z5.0
20 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE

G99 G74 Z−20.0 R5.0 F800; . . . . . . . . Executing the reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74) at
point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74) at
point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74)
Programming using G84.3

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 20 mm at points 1 and 2 in the reverse rigid tapping
cycle (G84.3) <F15 format>
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Spindle
rotation Reverse rotation
2 1 stops at Z30.0
Normal rotation
30

bottom
+X Z5.0
20 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.3 Z−20.0 R5.0 F800; . . . . . . . Executing the reverse rigid tapping cycle (G84.3) at point
1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the reverse rigid tapping cycle (G84.3) at point
2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the reverse rigid tapping cycle (G84.3)
18 M29 G74, G84.3 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID

TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD)
In the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle

called by M29 G74 or G84.3, left-hand rigid tapping cycle
in intermittent feed is executed.
As shown in the illustration below, after the infeed of a tap
by "Q" with the spindle rotating in the reverse direction, it
returns by "d" in the normal rotation of the spindle, then
the next infeed is repeated in the reverse rotation of the
spindle.
force to the tap.
1. Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid
NOTE
tapping cycle.
2. The return amount "d" is set for parameter #5213.
When carrying out tapping on mild or tough workpieces, long chips are apt to entangle on
the tool. In such operation, this mode of tapping cycle is used to break chips.

M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;

Spindle rotation stop
rotation stop • S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
Spindle
Q Q Q reverse • G98 . . . . . . Calls the initial point level return
rotation
operation.
Point Z Point R
G99 G98 operation.
Initial point
• G74 . . . . . . Calls the high-speed deep hole
d
Spindle normal reverse tapping cycle (left-hand
rotation after dwell Spindle rotation
stop after dwell thread)
• G84.3 . . . . . Calls the high-speed deep hole
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed reverse rigid tapping cycle (left-hand
thread).

the XY plane.
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
machine during a high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping operation, carefully move
the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you
move the axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere
with each other, and this could damage the machine.
1. During high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and
NOTE
spindle speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut
if feedrate or spindle speed is changed during high-speed deep hole reverse rigid
tapping cycle. If "1" is set for parameter No. 5200.4, however, the axis returns by
clearance amount "d" in the spindle normal rotation with the override value set for
parameter No. 5211 applied to axis feedrate. Whether the override value is set in
units of 1% or 10% is set for parameter No. 5201.3.
2. Call the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is
stopped.
3. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the high-speed deep
hole reverse rigid tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
4. Specify addresses Q and R in the block in which high-speed deep hole reverse rigid
tapping operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
operation is not specified, the data of addresses Q and R is not saved.
6. If address Q is omitted or "Q0" is specified, a normal reverse rigid tapping cycle is
executed but a high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle is not executed.
For the maximum spindle speed during high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
operation, refer to page APPENDIX D-37 (APPENDIX 2).
Programming using M29 G74 (High-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle)
Ex.
reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
NOTE
cycle.
+Y Rapid traverse
Reverse rotation
50 50 Cutting feed
10 10 10 10 10
Z30.0
2 1 30
(Initial point)
Normal rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE

G99 G74 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800; . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (M29 G74) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (M29 G74) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (M29 G74)
Programming using G84.3 (High-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle)
Ex.
reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Set "0" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
NOTE
cycle.
+Y
Rapid traverse
Reverse rotation
50 50 Cutting feed
10 10 10 10 10
Z30.0
2 1
30
(Initial point)
Normal rotation
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.3 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (G84.3) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (G84.3) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the high-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping
cycle (G84.3)
19 M29 G74, G84.3 DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE

(LEFT-HAND THREAD)
In the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle called by M29

G74 or G84.3, left-hand rigid tapping cycle in intermittent
feed is executed.
tap by "Q" in the spindle reverse rotation, the tap is
returned to the point R in the spindle normal rotation. In
the next infeed, the tap is moved to the point which is
above the depth tapped in the previous operation by
clearance amount "d" in the spindle reverse rotation, then
it is fed by "Q" in the spindle reverse rotation.
force to the tap.
1. Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle
NOTE
(setting made before shipping the machine).
2. The clearance amount "d" is set for parameter #5213.
When tapping a deep hole where coolant cannot be supplied satisfactorily or carrying out
tapping on a workpiece which generates entangling chips, this mode of tapping cycle can
be effectively used.
M29 S_ ;
G98(G99) G74 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
S_ ;
G98(G99) G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ Q_ R_ P_ F_ ;

Spindle rotation
rotation stop
stop
• S . . . . . . . . . Specifies spindle speed (min−1).
Q Q Q Spindle
reverse
operation.
Point Z Point R
G99 G98
Initial point
operation.
d • G74 . . . . . . Calls the deep hole reverse tapping

Spindle normal
rotation after dwell cycle (left-hand thread)
Spindle rotation
stop after dwell • G84.3 . . . . . Calls the deep hole reverse rigid
Rapid traverse tapping cycle (left-hand thread).
Cutting feed
the XY plane.
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION
machine during a deep hole reverse rigid tapping operation, carefully move the axes
after checking the workpiece and cutting tool carefully for damage. If you move the
axes without due care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or interfere with each
1. During deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle speed
NOTE
spindle speed is changed during deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle. If "1" is set
for parameter No. 5200.4, however, the axis returns to the R-point level in the
spindle normal rotation with the override value set for parameter No. 5211 applied to
axis feedrate. After that the axis moves to the point, which is away from the
previously machined position by clearance amount "d", in the reverse rotation of the
spindle. Whether the override value is set in units of 1% or 10% is set for parameter
No. 5201.3.
2. Call the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle in the state the spindle is stopped.
3. Since the spindle rotation and Z-axis feed are synchronized in the deep hole reverse
rigid tapping mode, it is not necessary use a tapper.
4. Specify addresses Q and R in the block in which deep hole reverse rigid tapping
NOTE
operation is specified.
If it is specified in a block where deep hole reverse rigid tapping operation is not
specified, the data of addresses Q and R is not saved.
value for address Q
6. If address Q is omitted or "Q0" is specified, a normal reverse rigid tapping cycle is
executed but a deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle is not executed.
For the maximum spindle speed during deep hole reverse rigid tapping operation, refer
to page APPENDIX D-37 (APPENDIX 2).
Programming using M29 G74 (Deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle)
Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 45 mm at points 1 and 2 in the deep hole reverse
rigid tapping cycle (M29 G74) <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle (setting
NOTE
+Y
Reverse rotation Rapid traverse
50 50
10 10 10 10 10
Cutting feed
2 1 Z30.0
30
Normal rotation
(Initial point)
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE

G99 G74 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800; . . . Executing the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29
G74) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29
G74) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle (M29
G74)
Programming using G84.3 (Deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle)

Ex.
To carry out tapping of pitch 2 mm and depth 45 mm at points 1 and 2 in the deep hole reverse
rigid tapping cycle (G84.3) <F15 format>
Set "1" for parameter No. 5200.5 to use the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle (setting
NOTE
+Y
Reverse rotation Rapid traverse
50 50
2 1 Z30.0
30
Normal rotation
(Initial point)
+X
d
45
Z5.0 (Point R)
O0001;
N1;

NOTE
S400;
G99 G84.3 Z−45.0 Q10.0 R5.0 F800;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle
(G84.3) at point 1
1. Feedrate F
= 400 × 2 = 800 (mm/min)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle
(G84.3) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle
(G84.3)
20 G76 FINE BORING CYCLE
In the fine boring cycle, the spindle stops at the orient stop
position at the bottom of the machined hole, the spindle is
shifted in the direction opposite to the boring bit position,
then the boring tool is returned to point R level at a rapid
traverse rate.
Since the boring tool is returned while the boring bit is
away from the machined surface, accurate boring without
leaving scratch on the finished surface is possible.
For details of spindle orientation, refer to page

C-43 (19).
G98(G99) G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
G98(G99) G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ I_ J_ P_ F_ ;

operation.
Point R operation.
• G76 . . . . . . Calls the fine boring canned cycle.
Initial point
G98 center of the hole to be machined in
(Spindle normal
Point Z
OSS rotation)
the XY plane.
Dwell
bottom)
G99 (Spindle normal rotation)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed • Q . . . . . . . . Specifies the shift amount of tool
Shift (rapid traverse)
• I . . . . . . . . . Specifies the direction of shift amount
OSS Spindle orientation
in X-axis direction.
• J . . . . . . . . . Specifies the direction of shift amount
in Y-axis direction.
• P . . . . . . . . . Specifies dwell period (dwell at point
Z).
P1000 → 1 second

CAUTION For the fine boring cycle called by G76, mount a boring bit at the position opposite to
the boring bar shift direction. If the boring bit is mounted in the same position as the
boring bar shift direction, the boring bit or boring bar will be hit against the workpiece
causing machine damage. This also causes the boring bit to be broken.
1. For the fine boring cycle called by G76, if shift amount Q or I and J is improper, the
NOTE
tool will interfere with the workpiece when it is moved up to be extracted from the
workpiece.
Specify addresses Q or I, J and R in the block in which boring operation is specified.
2. If they are specified in a block where boring operation is not specified, the data of
addresses Q or I, J and R is not saved.
4. The tool bit retracts by the shift distance specified with address Q or I and J after the
return to the point R or initial point level.
5. The direction of shift and the axis to be shifted are set for parameters No. 5101.4 and
No. 5101.5.
These are set for "+X" before the shipping of the machine.
<Spindle Shift>
If the boring bar is extracted from the machined hole while the boring bit contacting the machined
surface, the boring bit will leave scratch on the machined surface. To avoid such scratch, it is
necessary to shift the spindle to move the boring bit away from the machined surface before
extracting the boring bar.
<F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Bored hole
+Y
+X
<F15 format>
Bored hole
+J
I, J
−I +I
+Y
−J
+X X and Y components of shift amount
Programming using G76 <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Ex.
To carry out the fine boring cycle (G76) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
50 50 Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Dwell at
hole bottom
2 1 Shift after
30
spindle
orientation
+X
25
Z5.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G76 Z−25.0 R5.0 Q0.3 P100 F100;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76) at point 1
• Z−25.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z (hole
bottom)
• Q0.3 . . . . Shift amount of tool: 0.3 mm
(Shifting tool nose by 0.3 mm in the +X
direction)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the fine boring canned cycle mode (G76)
Programming using G76 <F15 format>

Ex.
To carry out the fine boring cycle (G76) at points 1 and 2.
+Y
Rapid traverse
50 50
Cutting feed
Dwell at
hole bottom
2 1 Shift after
30 spindle
orientation
+X
25
Z5.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
G99 G76 Z−25.0 R5.0 I0.3 P100 F100;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76) at point 1
• Z−25.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z (hole
bottom)
• I0.3 . . . . . Shifting tool nose by 0.3 mm in the +X
direction
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the fine boring canned cycle mode (G76)
21 G87 BACK BORING CYCLE
In the back boring cycle, boring is carried out at the back

side of a workpiece.
The operation is indicated below.
<Operation>
1) Positioning on the XY plane.

Spindle normal rotation
2) Spindle orientation and shift in the direction opposite
OSS
to the boring bit position.
Dwell OSS
Spindle
3) Positioning at the point R at a rapid traverse rate.
normal Shift Q
4) Retraction of the spindle by the shifted amount and
rotation
the spindle starts rotating in the normal direction.
Point R Point Z
Back boring is carried out by the movement in the
Rapid traverse +Z-axis direction up to the point Z.
Cutting feed
5) Spindle orientation and shift in the direction opposite
Shift (rapid traverse)
to the boring bit position. Then, the boring bar is
OSS Spindle orientation
returned to the initial point level.
6) The boring bar returns by the shift distance, the
spindle starting rotating in the normal direction and
the operation specified in the next block starts.

G98 G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15 Format
G98 G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ I_ J_ P_ F_ ;

operation.
Spindle normal OSS OSS The G99 command cannot be

rotation Dwell Spindle normal
NOTE
rotation specified.
• G87 . . . . . . Calls the back boring canned cycle.
Point R Point Z
the XY plane.
Cutting feed
Shift (rapid traverse) In the G87 mode, R value
NOTE
Spindle orientation must always be given in a
OSS
negative value.
• Q . . . . . . . . Specifies the shift amount of tool.
• I . . . . . . . . . Specifies the direction of shift amount
in X-axis direction.
• J . . . . . . . . . Specifies the direction of shift amount
in Y-axis direction.
• P . . . . . . . . . Specifies dwell period (dwell at point
Z).
P1000 → 1 second
CAUTION For the back boring cycle called by G87, mount a boring bit at the position opposite to
the boring bar shift direction. If the boring bit is mounted in the same position as the
boring bar shift direction, the boring bit or boring bar will be hit against the workpiece
causing machine damage. This also causes the boring bit to be broken.
1. For the back boring cycle called by G87, if shift amount Q or I and J is improper, the
NOTE
tool will interfere with the workpiece when it is moved up to be extracted from the
workpiece.
2. Specify addresses Q or I, J and R in the block in which back boring operation is
specified.
If they are specified in a block where back boring operation is not specified, the data
of addresses Q or I, J and R is not saved.

NOTE
4. The direction of shift and the axis to be shifted are set for parameters No. 5101.4 and
No. 5101.5.
These are set for "+X" before the shipping of the machine.
<Spindle Shift>
<F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Bored hole
+Y
+X
<F15 format>
Bored hole
+J
I, J
−I +I
+Y
−J
+X X and Y components of shift amount
Programming using G87 <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)>
Ex.
To carry out the back boring cycle (G87) at points 1 and 2.
+Y Rapid traverse
50 50 Cutting feed
Shift
2 1
30
+X
Z–40.0 Z–25.0 Z30.0

O0001;
N1;
G98 G87 Z−25.0 R−40.0 Q4.0 F100; . . Executing the back boring cycle (G87) at point 1
• Z−25.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z level
• R−40.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point R level
• Q4.0 . . . . Shift amount of tool: 4.0 mm
(Shifting tool nose by 4.0 mm in the +X
direction)
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the back boring cycle (G87) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the back boring canned cycle mode (G87)
Programming using G87 <F15 format>

Ex.
To carry out the back boring cycle (G87) at points 1 and 2.
+Y Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
50 50
Shift
2 1
30
+X
Z–40.0 Z–25.0 Z30.0

O0001;
N1;
G98 G87 Z−25.0 R−40.0 I4.0 F100; . . . Executing the back boring cycle (G87) at point 1
• Z−25.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z level
• R−40.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point R level
• I4.0 . . . . . Shifting tool nose by 4.0 mm in the +X
direction
X−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the back boring cycle (G87) at point 2
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the back boring canned cycle mode (G87)
APPENDIX D-1
APPENDIX 1 PATTERN CYCLES
APPENDIX 1 describes pattern cycles.

A pattern cycle simplifies programming when executing a hole machining cycle at positions which
can be defined by a specific pattern as well as a circle or frame cutting.
By using a pattern cycle, hole positions arranged in a certain pattern, or circle or frame cutting can
be specified by one block commands of a G code.
The pattern cycle includes the following:
• G300 . . . . . . . Arc (equal intervals)
• G301 . . . . . . . Arc (random intervals)
• G302 . . . . . . . Line-at-angle (equal intervals)
• G303 . . . . . . . Line-at-angle (random intervals)
• G304 . . . . . . . Rectangle/grid
• G305 . . . . . . . Staggered grid
• G306 . . . . . . . Circle cutting inside (finishing)
• G307 . . . . . . . Circle cutting outside (finishing)
• G308 . . . . . . . Frame cutting inside (finishing)
• G309 . . . . . . . Frame cutting outside (finishing)
D-2 APPENDIX
1-1 G300 Arc (Equal Intervals)
With the G300 command, hole positions arranged on an

H 3
arc in equal intervals are defined.
2 Center of arc: (A, B)
Radius of arc: R
Q Start hole position: Angle C from the X-axis
Q 1
Q Number of equally spaced holes: H
C +X Equally spacing angle: Q
Center of circle (A, B)

R
COMMAND
G90(G91) G300 A_ B_ C_ R_ Q_ H_ I1_ . . . I10_ ;
• G300 . . . . . . . Calls the arc (equal intervals) pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the center of arc to be defined
(G91): X component of distance and direction of the center of
arc to be defined from the present position
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the center of arc to be defined
(G91): Y component of distance and direction of the center of
• C. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle made between the first hole machining
position and the X-axis.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of the arc (without a sign)
• Q . . . . . . . . . . Pitch angle between the two adjacent holes
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes.
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the omit position numbers.
APPENDIX D-3
1. If addresses A and B are omitted, the center of arc is defined at the present position.
NOTE
2. Addresses R and H must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No. 3101) is
3. For address R, specify a positive value. If R0 is specified or a negative value is
specified for address R, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.
4. If address C is omitted, the angle of the first position from the X-axis is set to 0°.
5. If address Q is omitted, intervals between holes are set at 360°.
6. When specifying address Q, do not specify Q0. If Q0 is specified, an alarm
7. For address H (number of hole positions), specify a value of "1" or greater. If a value
of "0" or smaller is specified, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the
screen.
8. With address I, up to ten omission point numbers can be specified.
9. For address I, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is ignored.

Ex.
To carry out spot drilling cycle (G81) at positions 1 to 8, arranged on the arc in equal intervals. At
positions 5 and 7, spot drilling cycle is not carried out.
NOTE
1. In the illustration below, ( , ) indicates the coordinate values of (X, Y).
2. In the illustration below, indicates the positions where spot drilling cycle is not
carried out.
+Y
Rapid traverse
5 4
6 3 Cutting feed
7 2
20° 20°
20° 20° 1
8 20° 20°
20°
15° 5
+X
(80, 50) Z3.0 Z30.0
50 (Point R) (Initial point)
Movement by G81 at points 1 to 8
D-4 APPENDIX
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at X0, Y0 in the work coordinate system called
by G54
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 M03;. . . . . . . . . . Positioning at initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid traverse rate
Starting the spindle in the normal direction at 1000 min−1
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F100 K0; . . . . . . Specifying the spot drilling cycle (G81)
Hole machining data is stored since "K0" is specified.
In the F15 format, specify "L0" instead of "K0".

NOTE
• Z−5.0 . . . . Z coordinate value of the point Z

(hole bottom)
• R3.0 . . . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
• F100 . . . . . Feedrate of 100 mm/min
G300 A80.0 B50.0 C15.0 R50.0 Q20.0 H8.0 I5.0 I7.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the arc (equal intervals) pattern
Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81) at points 1 to 8
• A80.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the center of arc
• B50.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the center of arc
• C15.0 . . . . Angle from the X-axis: 15°
• R50.0 . . . . Radius of arc: 50 mm
• Q20.0 . . . . Pitch angle between the two adjacent
holes: 20°
• H8.0 . . . . . Number of equally spaced holes: 8
• I5.0 I7.0 . . Omit hole position number
(hole positions 5 and 7 are omitted.)
APPENDIX D-5
1-2 G301 Arc (Random Intervals)
With the G301 command, the hole positions arranged on

2 1
an arc at random are defined.
J1 Center of arc: (A, B)
J2
Radius of arc: R
I2 1 Number of holes and angular intervals from the X-axis:
I2 I2
I1 J1 holes in intervals of I1
I1
+X J2 holes in intervals of I2
Center of arc (A, B)

R
COMMAND
G90(G91) G301 A_ B_ R_ I1_ J1_ . . . I10_ J10_ ;
• G301 . . . . . . . Calls the arc (random intervals) pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the center of arc to be defined
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the center of arc to be defined
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of the arc (without a sign)
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch angle between the two adjacent holes
• J . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes.
NOTE
2. Addresses R, I, and J must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No. 3101)
3. For address R, specify a positive value. If R0 is specified or a negative value is
specified for address R, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.
4. For address J (number of hole positions), specify a value of "1" or greater. If a value
screen.
5. Concerning addresses I and J, up to ten pairs of them can be specified.
6. If a value other than "1" is specified for J (number of holes) with "0" specified for I
(angular interval), an alarm message (No. 3103) is displayed.
7. For address J, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is ignored.
D-6 APPENDIX

Ex.
To carry out spot drilling cycle (G81) at positions 1 to 6, arranged on the arc.
In the illustration below, ( , ) indicates the coordinate values of (X, Y).

NOTE
+Y
Rapid traverse
4 3
Cutting feed
2
5 35° 1
35° 35°
15° 20°
6
20° 5
+X
(80, 50) Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
by G54

NOTE

(hole bottom)
APPENDIX D-7
G301 A80.0 B50.0 R50.0 I20.0 J2.0 I35.0 J3.0 I15.0 J1.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the arc (random intervals) pattern
• A80.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the center of arc
• B50.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the center of arc
• R50.0 . . . . Radius of arc: 50 mm
• I20.0 . . . . . Angular interval for defining hole
positions 1 and 2: 20°
• J2.0. . . . . . Two holes in angular intervals of 20°
• I35.0 . . . . . Angular interval for defining hole
positions 3, 4, and 5: 35°
• J3.0. . . . . . Three holes in angular intervals of 35°
• I15.0 . . . . . Angular interval for defining hole position
6: 15°
• J1.0. . . . . . One hole in angular intervals of 15°
D-8 APPENDIX
1-3 G302 Line-at-angle (Equal Intervals)
+Y
With the G302 command, hole positions arranged on a
line in equal intervals are defined.
Reference point: (A, B)
Q
Start point: R (distance from the reference
Q H point)
Q 3 Angle to X-axis: C
R 2
Number of holes: H
1
Interval: Q
C
+X
Reference point (A, B)
COMMAND
G90(G91) G302 A_ B_ C_ R_ Q_ H_ I1_ . . . I10_ ;
• G302 . . . . . . . Calls the line-at-angle (equal intervals) pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the reference point to be defined
(G91): X component of distance and direction of the reference
point to be defined from the present position
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the reference point to be defined
(G91): Y component of distance and direction of the reference
• C. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle of the line referenced to the X-axis.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the distance from the reference point to the start point.
• Q . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the interval between holes (pitch).
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes.
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the omit position numbers.
1. If addresses A and B are omitted, the reference point is defined at the present
NOTE
position.
2. Addresses Q and H must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No. 3101) is
3. If address C is omitted, the angle to X-axis is 0°.
4. If address R is omitted, the start point is defined on the reference point (A, B).
5. When specifying address Q, do not specify Q0. If Q0 is specified, an alarm
6. For address H (number of hole positions), specify a value of "1" or greater. If a value
screen.
7. With address I, up to ten omission point numbers can be specified.
8. For address I, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is ignored.
APPENDIX D-9

Ex.
To carry out spot drilling cycle (G81) at positions 1 to 5, arranged on the line in equal intervals. At
position 4, spot drilling cycle is not carried out.
NOTE
1. In the illustration below, ( , ) indicates the coordinate values of (X, Y).
2. In the illustration below, indicates the positions where spot drilling cycle is not
carried out.
+Y
Rapid traverse
20
20 Cutting feed
5
20
20 4
3
40 2
1
30°
+X 5
(50, 30)
Z3.0 Z30.0
O0001;
N1;
by G54

NOTE

(hole bottom)
D-10 APPENDIX
G302 A50.0 B30.0 C30.0 R40.0 Q20.0 H5.0 I4.0;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the line-at-angle (equal intervals) pattern
• A50.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the reference point
• B30.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the reference point
• R40.0 . . . . Distance from the reference point to the
start point: 40 mm
• Q20.0 . . . . Interval between the two adjacent holes
(pitch): 20 mm
• H5.0 . . . . . Number of equally spaced holes: 5
• I4.0 . . . . . . Omit hole position number
(hole position 4 is omitted.)
APPENDIX D-11
1-4 G303 Line-at-angle (Random Intervals)
+Y With the G303 command, hole positions arranged on a

line at random are defined.
I2
I2
Start point: R (distance from the reference
J2 point)
I1
1
Angle to X-axis: C
J1
I1
Number of holes and angular intervals:
1
C
J1 holes in intervals of I1
+X
J2 holes in intervals of I2
Reference point (A, B)
COMMAND
G90(G91) G303 A_ B_ C_ I1_ J1_ . . . I10_ J10_ ;
• G303 . . . . . . . Calls the line-at-angle (random intervals) pattern.
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the interval between holes (pitch).
• J . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes.
NOTE
position.
2. Addresses I and J must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No. 3101) is
4. For address J (number of hole positions), specify a value of "1" or greater. If a value
screen.
5. Concerning addresses I and J, up to ten pairs of them can be specified.
6. If a value other than "1" is specified for J (number of holes) with "0" specified for I
(angular interval), an alarm message (No. 3103) is displayed.
7. For address J, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is ignored.
D-12 APPENDIX

Ex.
To carry out spot drilling cycle (G81) at positions 1 to 6, arranged on the line.

NOTE
+Y
Rapid traverse
20
20 Cutting feed
20 6
30 5
4
30 3
2
30°
+X 5
1
(50, 30) Z3.0 Z30.0

O0001;
N1;
by G54

NOTE

(hole bottom)
APPENDIX D-13
G303 A50.0 B30.0 C30.0 I0 J1.0 I30.0 J2.0 I20.0 J3.0;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the line-at-angle (random intervals) pattern
• A50.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the reference point
• B30.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the reference point
• I0 . . . . . . . Interval to position 1: 0 mm
• J1.0. . . . . . One hole is machined in interval of 0 mm
• I30.0 . . . . . Intervals to positions 2 and 3: 30 mm
• J2.0. . . . . . Two holes are machined in intervals of
30 mm
• I20.0 . . . . . Intervals to positions 4, 5, and 6: 20 mm
• J3.0. . . . . . Three holes are machined in intervals of
20 mm
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Canceling the spot drilling canned cycle mode (G81)
D-14 APPENDIX
1-5 G304 Rectangle/Grid
<On rectangle (W1.0)>
With the G304 command, hole positions arranged on a

U
rectangle or grid are defined.
+Y
Start point: A, B
2
V I
4
3
R 2
1 C
+X
Start point (A, B)
<On grid (W2.0)>
U
+Y
2
V I
4
3
R 2
1 C
+X
Start point (A, B)

APPENDIX D-15
COMMAND 1. Points on rectangle

G90(G91) G304 A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ I_ J_ R_ (W1.0);
2. Points on grid
G90(G91) G304 A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ I_ J_ R_ W2.0;
• G304 . . . . . . . Calls the points on rectangle/grid pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the start point to be defined
(G91): X component of distance and direction of the start
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the start point to be defined
(G91): Y component of distance and direction of the start
• U. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the length in the X-axis direction.
• V. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the length in the Y-axis direction.
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes arranged in the X-axis direction.
• J . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of holes arranged in the Y-axis direction.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the angle made between the line in the X-axis direction
and the line in the Y-axis direction (corner angle).
• W1.0. . . . . . . . Specifies the rectangle pattern.
• W2.0. . . . . . . . Specifies the grid pattern.
1. If addresses A and B are omitted, the start point is defined at the present position.
NOTE
2. Addresses U, V, I, and J must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No.

4. If address R is omitted, the angle made between the line in the X-axis direction and
the line in the Y-axis direction (corner angle) becomes 90°.
5. When defining points on rectangle, address W can be omitted.
6. When specifying addresses U and V, do not specify U0 and V0. If U0 and V0 are
specified, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.
7. For the number of holes (I in the X-axis direction and J in the Y-axis direction), a
value of "2" or greater must be specified. If a value of "1" or smaller is specified for I
or J, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.
8. For address R, values must be specified in the following range.
0 < R < 180
If a value outside this range is specified, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed
on the screen.
9. For addresses I and J, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is
ignored.
D-16 APPENDIX

Ex.
To carry out the spot drilling cycle (G81) at 12 positions 1 to 12, arranged on a grid.

NOTE
+Y
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
9 10 11 12
60
8 7 6 5
70°
5
+X
1 2 3 4
Z3.0 Z30.0
120
(50, 30) (Point R) (Initial point)
O0001;
N1;
by G54

NOTE

(hole bottom)
APPENDIX D-17
G304 A50.0 B30.0 (C0) U120.0 V60.0 I4.0 J3.0 R70.0 W2.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the grid pattern (G304)
Commands in ( ) can be omitted.

NOTE
• A50.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the start point

• B30.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the start point
• (C0) . . . . . Angle from the X-axis: 0°
• U120.0 . . . Length in the X-axis direction: 120 mm
• V60.0 . . . . Length in the Y-axis direction: 60 mm
• I4.0 . . . . . . Number of holes arranged in the X-axis
direction: 4
• J3.0. . . . . . Number of holes arranged in the Y-axis
direction: 3
• R70.0 . . . . Angle made between the lines (the line in
the X-axis direction and the line in the
Y-axis direction)
(corner angle): 70°
• W2.0 . . . . . On grid
D-18 APPENDIX
1-6 G305 Staggered Grid
<W1.0 (with hole at start point)>
+Y With the G305 command, hole positions arranged on a

X staggered grid is defined.
U
Start point: A, B
Y
V C
+X
Start point (A, B)
<W2.0 (without hole at start point)>
+Y
X
Y V
C
+X
Start point (A, B)

APPENDIX D-19
COMMAND 1. Staggered grid with a hole at the start point

G90(G91) G305 A_ B_ C_ X_ Y_ U_ V_ I_ J_ (W1.0);
2. Staggered grid without a hole at the start point
G90(G91) G305 A_ B_ C_ X_ Y_ U_ V_ I_ J_ W2.0;
• G305 . . . . . . . Calls the points on staggered grid pattern
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the start point to be defined
(G91): X component of distance and direction of the start
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the start point to be defined
(G91): Y component of distance and direction of the start
• X. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the interval between the two adjacent holes in the
X-axis direction (pitch).
• Y. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the interval between the two adjacent holes in the
Y-axis direction (pitch).
• U. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the grid stagger distance in the X-axis direction
• V. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the grid stagger distance in the Y-axis direction
• I . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of rows in the X-axis direction
• J . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the number of rows in the Y-axis direction
• W1.0. . . . . . . . Specifies the hole at the start point.
• W2.0. . . . . . . . Specifies without the hole at the start point.
1. If addresses A and B are omitted, the start point is defined at the present position.
NOTE
2. Addresses X, Y, U, V, I, and J must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message

4. For the staggered grid with a hole at the start point, address W can be omitted.
5. When specifying addresses X, Y, U, and V, do not specify X0, Y0, U0, and V0. If X0,
Y0, U0, and V0 are specified, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the
screen.
6. For the number of rows (I in the X-axis direction and J in the Y-axis direction), a
value of "3" or greater must be specified. If a value of "2" or smaller is specified for I
or J, an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.
7. For addresses X, Y, U, and V, if the values that satisfy the following are specified, an
alarm message (No. 3104) is displayed on the screen.
|X| ≤ |U| or |Y| ≤ |V|
8. For addresses I and J, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is
ignored.
D-20 APPENDIX

Ex.
To carry out the spot drilling cycle (G81) at positions 1 to 13, arranged on a staggered grid.

NOTE
+Y
Rapid traverse
11 12 13
Cutting feed
9 10
6 7 8
5
4 5
40
Z3.0 Z30.0
1 2 3
+X Movement by G81 at points 1 to 13
30
(50, 30) 60
O0001;
N1;
by G54

NOTE

(hole bottom)
APPENDIX D-21
G305 A50.0 B30.0 (C0) X60.0 Y40.0 U30.0 V20.0 I5.0 J5.0 (W1.0);
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the staggered grid pattern (G305)

NOTE
• A50.0 . . . . X-coordinate of the start point

• B30.0 . . . . Y-coordinate of the start point
• X60.0 . . . . Interval between the two adjacent holes
in the X-axis direction (pitch): 60 mm
• Y40.0 . . . . Interval between the two adjacent holes
in the Y-axis direction (pitch): 40 mm
• U30.0 . . . . Staggered distance in the X-axis
direction: 30 mm
• V20.0 . . . . Staggered distance in the Y-axis
direction: 20 mm
• I5.0 . . . . . . Number of rows in the X-axis direction: 5
• J5.0. . . . . . Number of rows in the Y-axis direction: 5
• (W1.0). . . . Specifies the hole at the start point.
D-22 APPENDIX
1-7 Precautions on Using G300 to G305 Commands
The pattern cycles (G300 - G305) are used in combination with the hole machining canned cycles
(G73, G74, G76, G81 - G89).
In a program, a G code calling a hole machining canned cycle and the related machining data
should be specified first. Following these commands, a G code defining hole position pattern
(pattern cycle) and the hole position data should be specified.
(G90) G99 G81 Z−18.5 R2.0 F100 K0;

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a hole machining canned cycle (G81)
Storing the hole machining data
1. Since "K0" is specified, the specified hole

NOTE
machining canned cycle is not executed and
only the hole machining data is stored.
2. In the F15 format, specify "L0" instead of
"K0".
G300 A10.0 B50.0 C30.0 R80.0 Q15.0 H9.0 I5.0 I7.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a pattern cycle (G300)
Specifying the hole position data
Executing the hole machining canned cycle (G81)
according to the specified hole position data.
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the hole machining canned cycle (G81)
1. If a pattern cycle (G300 - G305) is used, specify "K0" in the block where a hole
NOTE
machining canned cycle is specified. If a hole machining canned cycle is executed
without a K0 command, the specified cycle is executed at the present position.
2. A pattern cycle (G300 - G305) should be specified in a hole machining canned cycle
mode. If a pattern cycle (G300 - G305) is specified in other than the hole machining
canned cycle mode, hole machining is not executed although positioning is
executed.
3. A hole machining canned cycle is valid even after the execution of a pattern cycle
(G300 - G305). Therefore, if positioning data is specified, the hole machining cycle
is executed at the specified position.
4. A pattern cycle (G300 - G305) is valid only in the specified block. Therefore, the
hole position data is not stored.
5. Positioning from a defined hole position to the next is executed at a rapid traverse
rate.
APPENDIX D-23
1-8 G306 Circle Cutting Inside (Finishing)
+Y With the G306 command, finish cutting of the inside of the

J circle is carried out.
Center of circle: (A, B)
T
Radius: R
C
+X
R Center of circle
(A, B)
COMMAND
G90(G91) G306 A_ B_ C_ R_ T_ D_ J_ E_ F_ ;
• G306 . . . . . . . Calls the circle cutting inside (finishing) pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the center of circle to be defined
circle to be defined from the present position
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the center of circle to be defined
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of circle.
• T . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting allowance.
• J . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the approach relief amount.
• E. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the approach feedrate.
• F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting feedrate.
NOTE

3. If address T is omitted, cutting allowance is 0.
4. If address J is omitted, approach relief amount is 5 mm.
5. If address E is omitted, approach feedrate is five times the feedrate specified with F.
6. If address F is omitted, the feedrate of modal value is used.
7. Addresses R and D must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No. 3101) is
D-24 APPENDIX
8. Meaning of the sign of address R is indicated below.

NOTE
R>0 Cutting direction: Clockwise

R<0 Cutting direction: Counterclockwise
9. When specifying address R, do not specify R0. If R0 is specified, an alarm message

10. For address T, a value smaller than "0" must not be specified. If specified, an alarm
11. For address J, a value smaller than "0" must not be specified. If specified, an alarm
12. For address D, a value smaller than "1" must not be specified. If specified, an alarm
13. For address D, a value greater than the available number of tool offset data pairs or
the available number of tool offset data must not be specified. If specified, an alarm
14. For address D, the value must include a decimal point; decimal fraction is ignored.

Ex.
To carry out finish cutting of inside of the circle by using a 20 mm diameter end mill.

NOTE
50
6
45°
(0, 0)
O0001;
N1;
by G54
G43 Z30.0 H1 S700 M03;. . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate
Z10.0;
APPENDIX D-25
G01 Z−10.0 F1000;

G306 (A0) (B0) C45.0 R−50.0 T1.0 D1.0 (J5.0) E500.0 F200.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the circle cutting inside (finishing) pattern

NOTE
• (A0). . . . . . X-coordinate of the center of circle

• (B0). . . . . . Y-coordinate of the center of circle
• R−50.0 . . . Radius of arc: 50 mm (cutting in the
counterclockwise direction)
• T1.0 . . . . . Cutting allowance: 1 mm
• D1.0 . . . . . Tool offset number: 1
• (J5.0) . . . . Approach relief amount: 5 mm
• E500.0 . . . Approach feedrate: 500 mm/min
• F200.0 . . . Feedrate of 200 mm/min
G00 Z50.0;
D-26 APPENDIX
1-9 G307 Circle Cutting Outside (Finishing)
+Y With the G307 command, finish cutting of the outside of

the circle is carried out.
Center of circle: (A, B)
Q Radius: R
C J
+X
R
COMMAND
G90(G91) G307 A_ B_ C_ R_ T_ D_ Q_ J_ E_ F_ ;

• G307 . . . . . . . Calls the circle cutting outside (finishing) pattern.
• A. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): X-coordinate of the center of circle to be defined
• B. . . . . . . . . . . (G90): Y-coordinate of the center of circle to be defined
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the radius of circle.
• Q . . . . . . . . . . Specifies approach relief circle radius
NOTE

APPENDIX D-27
7. Addresses R, D, and Q must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message (No.

NOTE
R>0 Cutting direction: Clockwise

R<0 Cutting direction: Counterclockwise
9. When specifying address R, do not specify R0. If R0 is specified, an alarm message

11. For addresses J and Q, a value smaller than "0" must not be specified. If specified,
an alarm message (No. 3102) is displayed on the screen.

Ex.
To carry out finish cutting of outside of the circle by using a 20 mm diameter end mill.

NOTE
+Y
11
(100, 30)
R20
25
30°
+X
(0, 0)
7
D-28 APPENDIX
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y30.0; . . . . . . . . Positioning at X100.0, Y30.0 in the work coordinate
system called by G54
G00 Z−10.0;
G307 (A0) (B0) C30.0 R25.0 T4.0 D1.0 Q20.0 J7.0 (E500.0) F100.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Specifying the circle cutting outside (finishing) pattern

NOTE
• (A0). . . . . . X-coordinate of the center of circle

• (B0). . . . . . Y-coordinate of the center of circle
• R25.0 . . . . Radius of arc: 25 mm (cutting in the
clockwise direction)
• Q20.0 . . . . Approach relief circle radius: 20 mm
• J7.0. . . . . . Approach relief amount: 7 mm
• (E500.0) . . Approach feedrate: 500 mm/min
G00 Z50.0;
APPENDIX D-29
1-10 G308 Frame Cutting Inside (Finishing)
+Y With the G308 command, finish cutting of the inside of the

frame is carried out.
U Length in the X-axis direction: U
Length in the Y-axis direction: V
V
R C +X
Reference
point (A, B)
T Q
J
H−2.0 H2.0
H3.0 H−1.0
H−3.0 H1.0
H4.0 H−4.0
COMMAND
G90(G91) G308 A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ R_ H_ T_ D_ Q_ J_ E_ F_ ;
• G308 . . . . . . . Calls the frame cutting inside (finishing) pattern.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the corner rounding R
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting start position and direction
D-30 APPENDIX
NOTE
position.
3. If address R is omitted, the offset amount of the tool offset number specified by
address D is used for corner rounding.
8. Meaning of the sign of address H is indicated below.
H>0 Cutting direction: Clockwise

H<0 Cutting direction: Counterclockwise
9. For address H, only the following values can be specified.

±1.0, ±2.0, ±3.0, ±4.0
If other value is specified, an alarm message (No. 3103) is displayed on the screen.
10. For address H, the value must include a decimal point. If not, an alarm message
11. Addresses U, V, H, D, and Q must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message
(No. 3101) is displayed.
13. For addresses U, V, J, and Q, a value smaller than "0" must not be specified. If
APPENDIX D-31

Ex.
To carry out finish cutting of inside of the frame by using a 20 mm diameter end mill.

NOTE
90
+Y
R10
25
(50, 50)
+X 50
8 5
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X50.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . Positioning at X50.0, Y50.0 in the work coordinate system
called by G54
Z10.0;
G01 Z−10.0 F1000;
D-32 APPENDIX
G308 (A50.0) (B50.0) (C0) U90.0 V50.0 R10.0 H−4.0 T3.0 D1.0 Q25.0 (J5.0) E200.0 F100.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the frame cutting inside (finishing) pattern

NOTE
• (A50.0) . . . X-coordinate of the reference point

• (B50.0) . . . Y-coordinate of the reference point
• U90.0 . . . . Length in the X-axis direction: 90 mm
• R10.0 . . . . Corner rounding R: 10 mm
• H−4.0 . . . . Cutting start position and direction
(cutting in the counterclockwise
direction)
• E200.0 . . . Approach feedrate: 200 mm/min
G00 Z50.0;
APPENDIX D-33
1-11 G309 Frame Cutting Outside (Finishing)
+Y With the G309 command, finish cutting of the outside of

the frame is carried out.
U Length in the X-axis direction: U
Length in the Y-axis direction: V
R
V
C +X
Reference
point (A, B)
T
J
H−2.0 H2.0
H3.0 H−1.0
H−3.0 H1.0
H4.0 H−4.0
COMMAND
G90(G91) G309 A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ R_ H_ T_ D_ Q_ J_ E_ F_ ;
• G309 . . . . . . . Calls the frame cutting outside (finishing) pattern.
• R. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies corner rounding/corner chamfering
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the cutting start position and direction
D-34 APPENDIX
1. If addresses A and B are omitted, the reference point is defined at (0, 0).
NOTE

3. If address R is omitted, corner rounding radius/chamfering size becomes "0".
R>0 Corner rounding

R<0 Corner chamfering
9. Meaning of the sign of address H is indicated below.
H>0 Cutting direction: Clockwise

H<0 Cutting direction: Counterclockwise
10. For address H, only the following values can be specified.

±1.0, ±2.0, ±3.0, ±4.0
If other value is specified, an alarm message (No. 3103) is displayed on the screen.
11. For address H, the value must include a decimal point. If not, an alarm message
12. Addresses U, V, H, D, and Q must not be omitted. If omitted, an alarm message
(No. 3101) is displayed.
14. For addresses U, V, J, and Q, a value smaller than "0" must not be specified. If
APPENDIX D-35

Ex.
To carry out finish cutting of outside of the frame by using a 20 mm diameter end mill.

NOTE
+Y
6
R10 25
50 +X
(0, 0) (80, 0)
5
50
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X80.0 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at X80.0, Y0 in the work coordinate system
called by G54
G00 Z10.0;
D-36 APPENDIX
G309 (A0) (B0) (C0) U50.0 V50.0 R10.0 H1.0 T1.0 D1.0 Q25.0 (J5.0) (E500.0) F100.0;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the frame cutting outside (finishing) pattern

NOTE
• (A0). . . . . . X-coordinate of the reference point

• (B0). . . . . . Y-coordinate of the reference point
• U50.0 . . . . Length in the X-axis direction: 50 mm
• R10.0 . . . . Corner rounding R: 10 mm
• H1.0 . . . . . Cutting start position and direction
(cutting in the clockwise direction)
• (E500.0) . . Approach feedrate: 500 mm/min
G00 Z50.0;
APPENDIX D-37
APPENDIX 2 MAXIMUM SPINDLE SPEED DURING RIGID TAPPING

OPERATION
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping operation is indicated below.

Note that even if the maximum spindle speed indicated in the table is specified, actual speed may
not reach the specified speed if the distance from the operation start point and the workpiece is
not sufficient for the spindle to accelerate to the specified speed.
Maximum Spindle Speed

Machine Model Specification
for Rigid Tapping
12000 min−1 3000 min−1

SH-403
20000 min−1 2500 min−1
12000 min−1 3200 min−1
SH-503/40 12000 min−1 (High output) 3000 min−1
20000 min−1 2500 min−1
SH-503/50 10000 min−1 3000 min−1
10000 min−1 1500 min−1

SH-633
15000 min−1 2400 min−1
12000 min−1 2500 min−1
SH5000/40 14000 min−1 2500 min−1
20000 min−1 2500 min−1
6000 min−1 2000 min−1
6000 min−1 (High output) 1500 min−1

SH8000
10000 min−1 1500 min−1
15000 min−1 2400 min−1
7000 min−1 2600 min−1

MH-403
10000 min−1 2600 min−1
6000 min−1 1700 min−1
MH-503 6000 min−1 (High output) 2000 min−1
15000 min−1 2400 min−1
6000 min−1 2000 min−1
MH-633 6000 min−1 (High output) 1500 min−1
15000 min−1 2400 min−1
6000 min−1 1500 min−1

MH-1003
13000 min−1 1500 min−1
D-38 APPENDIX
Maximum Spindle Speed

Machine Model Specification
for Rigid Tapping
AFM2400 12000 min−1 3000 min−1
NH5000 14000 min−1 4200 min−1
ULTIMILL H3000 15000 min−1 4000 min−1

CHAPTER E
CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
This chapter describes the cutter radius offset function.

The cutter radius offset means shifting of the tool paths to the right or left by the radius from
the programmed paths.
This function is mainly used for pocket cutting or contouring with an end mill.
Since there are a number of tool patterns which will be used for actual machining
NOTE
and they will differ among users, it is not possible to explain all of the tool patterns in
this manual. The explanation given in this chapter is concentrated on the basic
programming so that the readers will be able to acquire basic knowledge of the
cutter radius offset function.
For more details, please refer to the instruction manuals supplied by the NC unit
manufacturer.
CONTENTS
E : CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
2 REQUIREMENT FOR USING THE CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . E-3
3 TECHNICAL TERMS
USED IN THE EXPLANATION OF THE CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET FUNCTION. . . . . E-4
3-1 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

3-2 Offset Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
3-3 Cancel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
4 GENERAL CAUTIONS ON THE OFFSET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
4-1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11

4-2 Changing the Cutter Radius Offset Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
4-3 Positive (+) and Negative (−) Designation
for Cutter Radius Offset Amount and Tool Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
4-4 Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
5 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20

CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET E-1
1 GENERAL
Generally, when cutting a pocket or carrying out contouring operation using an end mill, the cutter
radius offset function is used to finish the workpiece in the shape specified in the drawing.
How the shape in Fig. 1 is finished using the cutter radius offset function is briefly explained below.
3 4 Specify the required shape to be finished in the program:
Point 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
Workpiece
1
Fig. 1
3 4 Since the center of a cutting tool moves along the defined

paths, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in
Fig. 2 if the program is created without using the cutter
radius offset function.
2 The workpiece is finished to the shape indicated by
broken line in Fig. 2, which is smaller than the required
Workpiece
shape indicated in Fig. 1 by the radius of the cutting tool
( ).
1
Fig. 2
Tool
To shift the tool paths from the programmed paths, input

the radius of the cutting tool for the cutter radius offset
3 4 data at the TOOL OFFSET screen.
If the cutter radius offset function is used, the tool paths
are shifted outside from the programmed paths by the
2
input offset amount as shown in Fig. 3 to finish the
Workpiece required shape.
In this manner, by shifting the tool paths from the
programmed paths by using the cutter radius offset
1 function, it is not necessary to obtain the coordinate
Fig. 3
values using complicated calculation to generate the tool
Workpiece viewed from the
spindle head paths to finish the workpiece to the required shape.
E-2 CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET
COMMAND 1. Cutter radius offset in the XY plane

G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
2. Cutter radius offset in the ZX plane
G18 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Z_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
3. Cutter radius offset in the YZ plane
G19 G01(G00) G41(G42) Y_ Z_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
• G17, G18, G19. . . . . . Selects the plane where cutter radius offset is executed.
• G01(G00) . . . . . . . . . . Selects the interpolation mode in which the cutter radius
offset function is executed.
G00 . . . . . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . . . . . Cutting feed
• G41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset <G41>
mode (offset to the left). Workpiece
The tool paths are

programmed paths to the Tool advancing
direction
left in reference to the tool
• G42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset
Tool advancing
mode (offset to the right). direction
The tool paths are
programmed paths to the Workpiece
right in reference to the tool <G42>
• G40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancels the cutter radius offset mode.
• X, Y, Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
• I, J, K . . . . . . . . . . . . . When making a setting that represents the direction of the
workpiece shape in the following block, the direction ratio
for this setting is specified as a vector.
• D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset number.
CAUTION
The programmer must thoroughly understand the nature of the G41 and G42 functions
as well as the tool paths to be generated. If the G41 and G42 commands are used
improperly, the cutting tool might be fed into or hit against the workpiece to be
machined to cause breakage of the cutting tool or defective machining.
2 REQUIREMENT FOR USING THE CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET

FUNCTION
To use the cutter radius offset function (G40, G41, or G42), how the cutter radius offset data is
input must be understood correctly.
<Input of cutter radius offset amount>
End mill and

R other tools
R
Cutter radius offset amount (Cutter radius value)
Input the cutter radius offset amount on the TOOL OFFSET screen corresponding to the offset
number which is specified following address D.
3 TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THE EXPLANATION OF THE

CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET FUNCTION
The technical terms special to the cutter radius offset function and items to be observed when
using the cutter radius offset function are explained below.
Term Description
The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified
In the start-up operation, the center of the cutting tool is offset at the
Start-up
stopped position in right angle to the movement in the next block by
its radius.
The mode in which the tool nose radius offset function is valid after
Offset mode
the start-up
The state in which the tool nose radius offset function is canceled by
executing G40
Cancel mode The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes
the G40 block. The center of the cutting tool is positioned right angles
to the tool path programmed in the preceding block.
For the start-up and cancel mode operation, two types of operation are provided (type A
NOTE
and type B).
The following explanation is given for type A.
For the start-up and cancel mode operation of type B, refer to the instruction manuals
prepared by the NC unit manufacturer.
Ex.
Offset mode
Offset mode Workpiece Offset mode
Start-up
Offset mode
Cancel mode
G41(G42) G00 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up
In the case of the operation as shown in the

NOTE
illustration above, offset should be made to the left
and, therefore, the G41 command should be
used.
G01 X_ Y_ F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset mode
X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel mode
3-1 Start-up
The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified is called the start-up block.
In the start-up operation, the center of the cutting tool is offset at the stopped position in right angle
to the movement in the next block by its radius.
Ex.
1
+Y
Start-up
(This distance must be larger
than the cutter radius.)
3 2
50
Start point of the next block (X80.0, Y50.0)
+X
45 80 This distance must be larger

than the cutter radius.
G00 X100.0 Y100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

G42 X80.0 Y50.0 D_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
G01 X−45.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
When specifying the start-up, the following conditions must be satisfied.

NOTE
• The start-up block must include an axis movement command; the called distance
must be larger than the offset amount (radius of a tool).
• The start-up must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion) mode.
Do not specify the start-up in the G02 or G03 mode. If the start-up is specified in
such a mode, an alarm is generated, the corresponding alarm message (No. 034) is
displayed on the screen and the machine stops operating.
• Do not specify "D0" in a program. If "D0" is executed, the cutter radius offset
function is canceled.
3-2 Offset Mode
The mode in which the cutter radius offset function is valid, after the start-up, is called the offset
mode.
1. Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is not changed
The tool moves along the workpiece shape with its periphery in contact with the shape.
Ex.1
5 (X20.0, Y90.0) 4
(X45.0, Y90.0)
R25.0
(X70.0, Y65.0)
2 (X70.0, Y40.0) 1 (X100.0, Y40.0)
G42 G00 X100.0 Y40.0 D_ ;. . . . . . . . . 1 (Start-up)

G01 X70.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Y65.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G03 X45.0 Y90.0 R25.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Offset mode
G01 X20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
X_ Y_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. At the start-up and in the offset mode, two blocks of commands are buffered. In the
NOTE
offset mode, blocks not containing an axis movement command, a block only with an
M command or G04 dwell block, for example, must not be specified continuously. A
block containing 0 axis movement is not allowed, either. If such blocks are specified,
it will cause excessive or insufficient cutting since two blocks of commands cannot
be buffered. It will also cause overload to the tool and the tool might be damaged.
2. If an attempt is made to cut the inside of an arc whose radius is smaller than the
radius of the tool or to cut a groove whose width is smaller than the radius of the tool,
an alarm message is displayed to avoid excessive cutting. If this occurs while the
program is executed in the single block mode, excessive cutting occurs to produce a
defective workpiece since the program is executed to the end of the block causing
the alarm before it stops.
3. Do not change the plane with G17, G18, or G19 in the offset mode.
If changed, an alarm occurs, and an alarm message (No. 037) is displayed on the
screen and the machine stops operating.
2. Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is changed
If the direction of offset changes in a program, as illustrated below, i.e., if the G code calling
the cutter offset function changes between G41 and G42, the periphery will come into
contact with the workpiece shape that is defined in the two consecutive blocks where the G
code changes from G41 to G42, or vice versa.
Ex.2
2
1
(X70.0, Y40.0)
G41 X70.0 Y60.0;

Y40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G42 X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CAUTION
Changing the G code mode between G41 and G42 cannot be specified in the start-up
and the next block.
3-3 Cancel Mode
The G40 command, specified in the offset mode, cancels the cutter radius offset function.
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that precedes the G40 block. The center of
the cutting tool lies at right angles to the tool path programmed in the preceding block.
Ex.
(X60.0, Y50.0) 1 (X100.0, Y50.0)
Cancel mode
(X40.0, Y20.0)
2
(G41) X100.0 Y50.0;

X60.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G40 G00 X40.0 Y20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (Cancel mode)
In the cancel mode, the following items must be carefully attended to:
NOTE
1. The cutter radius offset function is canceled by pressing the RESET

(RESET) key on
the operation panel in addition to the execution of the G40 command.
And also, it is canceled by specifying D0.
2. The cancel command must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion) mode.
Do not specify the cancel command in the G02 or G03 mode. If the cancel
command is specified in such a mode, an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm
message (No. 034) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops operating.
3. Designation of "G40;" or a cutter radius offset cancel command associated with
position command of the present position, meaning no axis movements, when
exiting the cutter radius offset mode, the tool stays at the start point of cancel mode
and axis movements for cancellation do not take place. In such cases, cancel
movements take place when the command that calls for actual axis movements
(movements in the same plane as used for the cutter radius offset) is specified next.
If the program ends without axis movement commands after the designation of the
cancel command such as "G40;" that does not cause actual movements, the cutter
radius offset mode remains active. To cancel the cutter radius offset mode, in such a
case, it is necessary to press the RESET
(RESET) key. However, pressing the RESET
(RESET) key to cancel the cutter radius offset mode does not call for cancel
movements.
For the axis movement commands to be specified for canceling the cutter radius
offset mode, it is necessary to specify the position other than the present position in
the G00 or G01 mode so that axes actually move in the execution of the cancel
command.
4 GENERAL CAUTIONS ON THE OFFSET FUNCTION
4-1 If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting
If the workpiece wall lies in a direction independent of the direction of tool motion specified by the
commands in the G40 block:
Specify the workpiece wall's direction (workpiece shape) with vectors (I, J). Use incremental
values for I and J commands.
The following gives an explanation assuming that the cutter radius offset function is used
NOTE
in the XY plane (G17). When executing the cutter radius offset function in the ZX plane
(G18) or YZ plane (G19), specify the direction of wall (workpiece shape) using vector (I, K)
or (J, K), respectively.
Wall
I,J G40
(100, 30)
(G42) Actual tool motion commands
+J 5 G40 G00 X100.0 Y30.0 I−4.0 J5.0;
+I
The workpiece is cut until the cutter periphery comes into contact with the wall.
1. The workpiece is cut until the cutter periphery comes into contact with the wall. The
NOTE
I and J commands, used to define the vectors that represent the workpiece wall
direction, should be specified in the G40 block that appears first after entry into the
offset mode.
• Valid • Invalid
G42 X_ Y_ ; G42 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
Offset mode
Offset mode G40 X_ Y_ ;
Cancel mode
G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ;

Ignored
2. If "I_ J_" is not specified in the G40 block, the offset mode cancel point is set at the
end point of the preceding block; at this end point, the center of the tool lies at right
angles to the tool path generated by the commands in the preceding block. This
causes an overcut on the wall.
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ;
G40
(G42)
Overcuts occur
Calculating the wall direction (blank workpiece shape)

Ex.
(G40)
(G42)
60°
+Y
80
50
35
+X
B 1. Value "J" is indicated below, based on the

illustration on the left.
30°
J = 15
J = 15 Because it is measured in the positive direction of Y,
60°
the designation should be "J15.0".
C A
Next, value "I" is calculated as:
I 80 I = AC = 15 × tan30° = 8.660
50
35
Because it is measured in the negative direction on

the X-axis, the designation should be "I−8.66".
30° 2. Since I and J commands are used to define the

direction of the wall, the ratio between the sides of a
A triangle may be used instead of calculating actual
J=C
lengths.
60° The ratio of three sides of the triangle given on the
left is known as
I=B
A:B:C = 2:1: 3 (= 1.732)
Therefore, the designation should be "I−1.0 J1.732".
I and J commands may be specified in either method as described above.
G01 X−80.0;
G40 G00 X−50.0 Y100.0 I−8.66 J15.0;
(I−1.0 J1.732)
Interchangeable
4-2 Changing the Cutter Radius Offset Amount
The cutter radius offset amount is usually changed when the cutting tool is changed in the cancel
mode.
If the cutter radius offset amount is changed while in the cutter radius offset mode, positioning at
the end point of a block is made using the cutter radius offset amount specified in that block.
Offset is made according to the cutter radius

offset amount specified in block N6.
Offset is made according to the cutter radius

offset amount specified in block N7.
N7
N8
N6
Ex.
When machining a mold, fine adjustment on taper can be made by changing the cutter radius
offset amount.
3 (X0, Y60.0)
+Y 2 (X50.0, Y40.0)
1 (X50.0, Y20.0)
+X
G42 G01 X50.0 Y20.0 D1 F200;. . . . . . Point 1

Y40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point 1 → Point 2
The cutter radius offset is made using the cutter radius
offset amount set for offset number 1.
X0 Y60.0 D2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point 2 → Point 3
The cutter radius offset is made using the cutter radius
offset amount set for offset number 2.
By changing the cutter radius offset amount,

adjustment is possible on the tapered portion.
4-3 Positive (+) and Negative (−) Designation for Cutter Radius Offset Amount
and Tool Paths
Generally, a program is created assuming that the cutter radius offset amount is set in a positive
value.
If an offset amount is set in a negative value, tool paths are generated as if G41 and G42 are
entirely exchanged with each other. The paths having been generated outside the programmed
profile will be generated inside the profile and those having been generated inside the
programmed profile will be generated outside the profile.
If a negative value is set for the offset amount while the tool paths as shown in Fig. 1 are specified
in a program, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 2.
Conversely, if a negative value is set for the offset amount when the tool paths shown in Fig. 2 are
specified in a program, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
4-4 Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode
1. Cutting the inside of arc whose radius is smaller than the cutter radius
If the specified arc radius is smaller than the cutter radius, offsetting inside the arc causes
overcut.
The alarm message is displayed on the screen just after the start of the block which
precedes the block containing the arc command, and the machine stops.
If a single block function is called during the execution of the preceding block, the axes are
NOTE
fed to the end point of that block, causing overcuts.
Tool center path
Machine stops due to the alarm
Programmed tool path

Alarm-stop in a single block stop operation
Overcuts occur if the axes are moved as programmed
2. Cutting a groove whose width is narrower than the cutter radius

If the tool path is generated in the direction opposite to the programmed path due to
offsetting, it causes overcut.
The alarm message is displayed on the screen just after the start of the block which
precedes such a block, and the machine stops.
If the single block function is called during the execution of the preceding block, the axes
NOTE
are fed to the end point of that block, causing overcuts.
Alarm/stop point in a single block stop operation

Tool center path
Machine stops
due to the alarm
Overcuts occur if the axes move as programmed

3. Cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than the cutter radius
The tool path to be generated in ordinary offset processing might be reversed at the stepped
portion.
In such a case, the first vector is ignored and the tool path is generated for a second vector
that will move along a straight line.
Although the operation is continued without causing an alarm, undercut portion is left in the
workpiece.
Tool motion along a straight line
Tool center path
Arc
Undercut portion
4. No X- and Y-axis movement is specified in more than two blocks

When the XY plane is selected, for example, the cutter radius offset function is valid only for
the X- and Y-axes.
The cutter radius offset function is valid only for the X- and Z-axes in the ZX plane, and for
NOTE
the Y- and Z-axes in the YZ plane.
If there are two or more blocks, which contains neither X- nor Y-axis movement commands,
given in succession, overcut may occur since buffering is not possible.
(G42 mode)
X30.0 Y35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]
Y55.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
3 2 X10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0) Offset is made correctly because two blocks of
commands can be buffered
1
(X30.0 Y35.0)
Overcut (G42 mode)

X30.0 Y35.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]
Y55.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
3 2
M_ ; No X- or Y-axis movement commands in
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0)
Z−_ ; two or more blocks
X10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
1
(X30.0, Y35.0)
Overcuts occur as illustrated above. This is because the center of the tool is positioned, when the
preceding block [2] is executed, at the right angle to the tool path called by the commands in this
block.
Pay attention when a sub-program is called from a main program.

NOTE
<Main program>
G41 G01 X_ Y_ D_ ;
M98 P1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [1]
<Sub-program (O0001)>
O0001; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
M99;
By the call of a sub-program from a main program, two blocks [1] and [2] are executed in
succession; these blocks do not contain X- or Y-axis movement commands.
Therefore, the program should be created in the following manner.
<Main program>
X_ Y_ ;
M98 P1 D_ ;
<Sub-program (O0001)>
O0001;
G41 G01 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
G40 X_ Y_ ;
M99;
5 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
Several examples of programs where the cutter radius offset function (G40, G41, G42) is used are
given below.
Use these programs for your reference when creating a program.
Programming using G40, G41, and G42 (1)

Ex.
(X0, Y250.0) 3
(X200.0, Y250.0) 4
R125
Workpiece
(X−40.0, Y0) 6
(X0, Y0) (X200.0, Y0) 5
2 (X0, Y−40.0)
1 , 7
(X−100.0, Y−100.0)
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X−100.0 Y−100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [1]
G43 Z30.0 H1 S300 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [2]
M03;
Z−30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [3]
(G17) G41 G01 X0 Y−40.0 D1 F300; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 [4]
Y250.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
X200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
[5]
G02 Y0 R125.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
G01 X−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G40 G00 X−100.0 Y−100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 [6]
[1] Positioning at point 1 at a rapid traverse rate in the work coordinate system called by G54.
[2] Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate
[3] Positioning of a cutting tool from Z30.0 to Z−30.0 at a rapid traverse rate
[4] Point 2: Start-up

• G41 . . . . . Offset to the left in reference to the
tool advancing direction
40
2
• D1 . . . . . . Tool offset number where the
cutter radius is set.
Start-up
[5] Points 3 to 6: Offset mode

3 4
Machining is carried out along the programmed
shape.
6 5
40
[6] Point 7: Cancel mode
In the block just preceding the cancel mode block,
positioning at the end point 6 is made at a position
located right angle to the tool path in that block.
After that, positioning is made at (X−100.0, Y−
Cancel mode
100.0).
7

Ex.
To carry out accurate circle cutting (I.D.)
The example program is created for cutting the I.D. of the circle shown below using a 40 mm
diameter end mill.
When cutting the I.D. of a circle, approach is generally made along an arc (3 → 4, in this example)
to the cutting start point D. After the completion of circle cutting, escape from the cut circle is
made along an arc (4 → 5), in this example.
This approach and escape are necessary to avoid an overcut.
3
4
2 r = 40
6 5
1 45°
R60 X100.0, Y100.0
<Machining sequence>
Point 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → (circle cutting) → 4 → 5 → 6

<Reason of setting of r = 40>
Arcs used for approach (3 → 4) and escape (4 → 5) must satisfy the following conditions.
Cutter radius < r (approach/escape circle radius) < R (radius of circle to be machined)
20 < r < 60
From the requirement indicated above, r is determined to be "40".
(r = 40)
<Calculating the coordinate values of points 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6>
60 sin45° × 60
= 42.426
60 - 40 = 20 sin45° × 20
= 14.142
45° 45°
1 1
(X100.0, Y100.0) cos45° × 20 (X100.0, Y100.0) cos45° × 60
= 14.142 = 42.426
Point 2, 6 X = 100.0 + 14.142 = 114.142

Y = 100.0 + 14.142 = 114.142
Point 3 X = 114.142 (X coordinate value of point 2)
Y = 114.142 + r
= 114.142 + 40 = 154.142
Point 4 X = 100.0 + 42.426 = 142.426
Y = 100.0 + 42.426 = 142.426
Point 5 X = 114.142 + r
= 114.142 + 40 = 154.142
Y = 114.142 (Y coordinate value of point 2)
3
4
2 r = 40
6 5
1 45°
R60 X100.0, Y100.0
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y100.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03;
G01 Z−_ F100;
X114.142 Y114.142; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 [1]
G42 Y154.142 D1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 [2]
G02 X142.426 Y142.426 R40.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 [3]
I−42.426 J−42.426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Full circle) [4]
X154.142 Y114.142 R40.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 [5]
G40 G01 X114.142; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 [6]
[1] Moving at point 2 at feedrate of 100 mm/min

3
[2] Point 3: Start-up
• G42 . . . . . Offset to the right in reference to
the tool advancing direction
• D1 . . . . . . Tool offset number where the
2 cutter radius is set
[3] Point 3 → 4
3
Approach along an arc to cut a circle
4
[4] Full circle
Execute cutting of a circle
[5] Point 4 → 5
Escape from a circle along an arc
4
[6] Point 6: Cancel mode
In the block just preceding the cancel mode block,
positioning at the end point 5 is made at a position
located right angle to the tool path in that block.
6 5 After that, positioning is made at (X114.142,
Y114.142).

Ex.
To cut the following two pockets with an 8 mm diameter end mill
The pockets have been machined to the specified depth (5 mm) and 0.3 mm of finishing
allowance is left at the inside of the pocket face.
R10
7 10
6
Point X Y
−15.0 0
45
1
3 2 2 −15.0 10.0
R10
90 3 −50.0 10.0
1
4 −50.0 −10.0
X0, Y0
5 −15.0 −10.0
4 5
35 15 30 6 30.0 45.0
7 20.0 45.0
8 20.0 −45.0
8 9 9 40.0 −45.0
10 40.0 45.0
<Machining sequence>
• Pocket cutting
Point 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 2 → 1
• Pocket cutting
Point 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 10 → 7 → 6
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X−15.0 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [1]
G43 Z30.0 H1 S500 T2;
M03;
G01 Z3.0 F3000;
Z−5.0 F80;
G41 Y10.0 D1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 [2]
X−50.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 [3]
G03 Y−10.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 [4]
G01 X−15.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 [5]
G03 Y10.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 [6]
G40 G01 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [7]
G00 Z3.0;
X30.0 Y45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 [8]
G01 Z−5.0;
G41 X20.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 [9]
Y−45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 [10]
G03 X40.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 [11]
G01 Y45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 [12]
G03 X20.0 R10.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 [13]
G40 G01 X30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 [14]
G00 Z30.0;
7 10
3 2 6
4 5
8 9
If "G40" is not specified in block [7]:

NOTE
There are cases that a programmer does not specify the G40 command in block [7]
because it is misunderstood that start-up and cancel of the cutter radius offset are
necessary only once because a single workpiece is being machined.
If the G40 command is not specified in block [7], undercut occurs at point 2 as shown in
the illustration below.
Undercut portion
If the program is executed without G40 in block [7], operation stops after the execution of block [6]
and the corresponding alarm message is displayed.
6
2 (8)
(6) G01 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 [7]

G00 Z3.0;
1
X30.0 Y45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 [8]
When block [7] is going to be executed, offset is made to position (8) in the illustration because
offset is made to the left side for both "point 2 → 1" (block [7]) and "point 1 → 6" (block [8]) due to
two-block buffering function.
However, since this motion causes overcut, an alarm occurs at position (6) and the corresponding
alarm message is displayed on the screen and machine stops.
CHAPTER F
T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the T function which calls a tool, the S function which specifies a
spindle speed, and the F function which specifies a feedrate.
CONTENTS
F : T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
1 T FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
1-1 Technical Memory Random Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

1-2 Fixed Address Shorter Route Access Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
2 S FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
3 F Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
3-1 Table of Rapid Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16

T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS F-1
1 T FUNCTION
T function calls a specified tool to the tool change position. A four-digit tool number entered
following address T specifies the tool to be called. In response to the specification of a tool
number, the magazine rotates to bring the specified tool to the tool transfer position and the
waiting pot receiving the called tool brings it to the tool change position.
The ATC (automatic tool changer) operation consists of:
Tool Selection (T function) + Tool Change (M06)
A required tool is called in the following two methods.

1. Technical memory random method
• ULTIMILL H3000 <24-tool specification>
• NH5000 <30, 40, 60-tool specification>
• SH-403 <40-tool specification>
• SH5000 <40-tool specification>
2. Fixed address shorter route access method
• MH-403, 503, 633, 1003
• NH4000 <40, 60-tool specification>
• NH5000 <120, 150, 240, 330-tool specification>
• SH-403 <60, 120-tool specification>
• SH-503, 633
• SH5000 <60, 120, 150, 240, 330-tool specification>
• SH8000
• HVM630
COMMAND <4-digit tool number specification>
T ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number
Programmable range: T1 to T9999
<8-digit tool number specification>
T ; . . . . . . Tool number
CAUTION 1. With the 8-digit tool number specification, the settings to distinguish large,
medium, and small diameter tools and heavy tools are made on the tool
registration (sub-item) screen so there are none of the restrictions on tool
numbers that apply with 4-digit tool number specification.
Note that a tool for which the large tool diameter number "9000" has been set
using the technical memory random method with the 4-digit tool number
specification will not be recognized as a large diameter tool in the 8-digit tool
number specification.
F-2 T, S, AND F FUNCTIONS
CAUTION 2. When using the used tool list screen and conversational function, use tool
numbers with no more than 4 digits.
3. When checking the cutting tools stored in the magazine during setup, do not
change large diameter cutting tools continuously.
If tool change is attempted from a large diameter tool to another large diameter
tool, it causes overload to the ATC motor and the thermal relay may be tripped.
4. With the NH4000, NH5000, SH-633, SH5000, SH8000, and MH-1003, tool
change cycle time differs according to tool weight if the flag setting is changed to
achieve high-speed ATC operation.
Therefore, when registering the tools, it is necessary to add the attribute to
classify them according to tool weight (light, heavy) in addition to the tool size
group attribute. If a program presently used for the machining centers is used for
this machining center, there will be cases that a medium diameter, heavy tool is
changed at a faster speed. If this occurs, the ATC parts may be damaged.
Change the present program, referring to the information below to ensure safety.
When the machine is installed, the parameter is set so that tool change cycle is
executed at a low speed for all tools.
Tool No (T)
(when using
Tool Diameter Tool Weight ATC Speed
4-digit
specification)
0001 to 0999 Small diameter tool
Light tool High
1000 to 7999
Medium diameter tool
8000 to 8999
Heavy tool Low
9000 to 9999 Large diameter tool
<Tool weight classification>

<NH4000>
Light tool Less than 3 kg

Heavy tool 3 kg or more, 8 kg or less
<NH5000>

<SH5000>

<SH-633, SH8000>

<MH-1003>

Tool change cycle speed is automatically selected according to the weight of the
tools to be changed:
a. Tool change between light tools High-speed
b. Tool change between light tool and heavy tool Low-speed
c. Tool change between heavy tools Low-speed
1. An entry of a tool number following address T is often misunderstood as a command

NOTE
to complete a tool change operation. It must be understood that a "T" command only
rotates the magazine and brings the specified tool from the magazine to the waiting
pot. The tool is mounted to the spindle by the M06 command which follows the "T"
command.
2. With the U-axis control specification machines, if the "T0;" command is executed,
the tool in the waiting pot is returned to the magazine and an empty pot is indexed.
Therefore, the following commands cause an alarm (EX0139):
T0;
. . . . . . . Tool change → Alarm EX0139
(no new tool to be (no tool)
M06;
mounted to the spindle)
3. The dimensions and mass of the tools used with the machine are restricted by
mainly the capacity of magazine. Use the tools which are within the limits.
For the limits on length, diameter, and mass, refer to the MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(MAINTENANCE INFORMATION) separately provided.
With the U-axis control specification machines, if the following commands are executed,
the adapter is indexed to the standby station and then the adapter is mounted to the
spindle. The same operation is executed by the M33 command.
T1 is the tool number assigned for the adapter.
T1;
(= M33;)
M06;
1-1 Technical Memory Random Method
In the technical memory random method, the tools are first classified into one of the following tool
size groups when they are registered - large, medium, and small diameter tools.
In the tool change cycle, the magazine rotates to index an empty pot, which meets the tool size
group of the tool to be returned, located nearest to the tool change position. That is, when a large
diameter tool is returned from the spindle, the empty pot assigned to store a large diameter tool
and located nearest to the tool change position is indexed.
This method is adopted to shorten the tool change cycle time.
CAUTION 1. When mounting tools, check the restrictions on tools thoroughly and make sure
that the arrangement of tools will not cause interference at tool changes. If you
fail to observe the restrictions on tools, tools may interfere with each other when
tool changes are performed, and this will cause damage to the machine.
2. With the ATC of technical memory random method, make sure to set the pots at
both sides of the pot where a large-diameter tool that requires an empty pot at
both sides. If a tool change cycle is carried out with a tool stored in the pot next
to the large-diameter tool pot, an interference occurs between the large-diameter
tool and the tool stored in the pot, causing damage to the machine.
T ;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number
• part
T9 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Large-diameter tools (T9000 to T9999)
T8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium-diameter, heavy tools (T8000 to T8999)
T1 to T7 ; . . . . . . . . Medium-diameter, light tools (T1000 to T7999)
T0 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Small-diameter tools (T0001 to T0999)
• part
T 001 to T 499; . . . . . . . . . . Taper-contact tools (ordinary tools)
T 500 to T 999; . . . . . . . . . . Face-contact tools (two-face constrained tools)

T ; . . . . . . . . Tool number (T1 to T99999999)
Make tool-related settings on the tool

NOTE
registration (sub-item) screen.
CAUTION ATC operation for changing the tools of different tool size groups differs from that for
changing the tools of the same tool size group.
For changing the tools belonging to different tool size groups, tool change cycle is
executed twice. Pay sufficient care when executing tool change operation in the MDI
mode in such cases.
If a large diameter tool mounted in the spindle is changed with a small diameter tool, for
example, the tool change operation is carried out in the following sequence:
a. Magazine rotation
(to index the empty pot where a large diameter tool is returned)
b. Tool change cycle
(large diameter tool is returned to the empty pot)
c. Magazine rotation
(to index the small diameter tool to be mounted to the spindle)
d. Tool change cycle
(small diameter tool is mounted to the spindle)
1. For face-contact tools (two-face constrained tools), face air blow is executed during
NOTE
tool change cycle (some models require timer setting for this type of air blow).
2. The 8-digit T code specification cannot be used for the technical-memory-random
specification ATC.
<Determining tool size group>
As explained above, the tools must be classified into large, medium, or small diameter tool to
avoid interference between tools stored in the magazine. Use the following to determine the tool
size group for individual tools.
• Large diameter > The maximum tool diameter with adjacent tools
The maximum diameter
of the tools to be used + Small diameter The maximum tool diameter
• ≤
2 with adjacent tools
• Small diameter < Medium diameter < Large diameter
Classification of a specific tool varies depending on the combination of the tools to be

NOTE
used.
The allowable maximum tool diameter of the tool that can be stored in a pot without
interference is indicated below. Set the tool in pot taking this maximum diameter into
consideration.
Max. Tool Diameter

Machine Model
With Adjacent Tool Without Adjacent Tool
ULTIMILL H3000 60 mm dia. 125 mm dia.

NH5000 80 mm dia. 180 mm dia.
SH-403 80 mm dia. 125 mm dia.
SH5000 80 mm dia. 150 mm dia.
Programming for the technical memory random method

Ex.
To create a program for SH-403 (40-tool specification) by classifying tools according to size (large
diameter tools, medium diameter tools, and small diameter tools).
Process Used Tool Tool Diameter
N1 100 mm dia. face mil 120 mm dia.

N2 3 mm dia. center drill 30 mm dia.
N3 20 mm dia. end mill 60 mm dia.
N4 5 mm dia. drill 40 mm dia.
N5 10 mm dia. chamfer mill 60 mm dia.
N6 M6 tap 60 mm dia.
The diameter indicated above is the limit of the largest diameter of the tool including the
NOTE
tool holder.
<Determining tool size group>
With SH-403 (40-tool specification), the maximum tool diameter with adjacent tools is 80 mm.
Therefore, a tool exceeding 80 mm diameter is classified into the large diameter tool group.
Whether a tool is classified into the medium diameter group or small diameter group is determined
according to the diameter of the large diameter tool.
120 mm dia. +Small diameter

≤ 80 mm dia.
2
From the inequality above, it is known that tools of smaller than 40 mm diameter are classified into
the small diameter tool group.
Then, the range of each tool size group is determined as indicated below:
• Small diameter tools (T0001 to T0999) . . . . . . Tools of 40 mm diameter or smaller
• Medium diameter tools (T1000 to T8999) . . . . Tools of over 40 mm diameter and 80 mm
diameter or smaller
• Large diameter tools (T9000 to T9999) . . . . . . Tools of over 80 mm diameter and 120 mm
diameter or smaller
<Determining tool number>
Process Used Tool Tool Diameter
N1 100 mm dia. face mil T9001 (L)

L: Large diameter tool
N2 3 mm dia. center drill T0002 (S)
M: Medium diameter tool
N3 20 mm dia. end mill T1003 (M)
S: Small diameter tool
N4 5 mm dia. drill T0004 (S)
N5 10 mm dia. chamfer mill T1005 (M)
N6 M6 tap T1006 (M)
<Registering the tools>
Register the tool numbers which are determined according to the tool size group for the six tools.
The tools can be registered in the following two methods.
• When an empty pot can be set.
If it is possible to set empty pots in the magazine, leave the pots on both side of the pot
storing a large diameter tool empty or allocate these pots to small diameter tools. Set tool
number "0" when registering the tools, and the pot is set as an empty pot which is not used
in tool change operation.
• When an empty pot cannot be set.
If it is not possible to set an empty pot in the magazine, use the pots on both sides of the pot
storing a large diameter tool for storing small diameter tools.
<Program>
Execute the program indicated below, with T9001 (large diameter tool) mounted in the spindle.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S_ T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T2 (small diameter tool) to the tool change
position
M03;
Machining program
G91 G30 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Z-axis; stopping the spindle rotation
G30 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing T9001 (large diameter tool) in the spindle with
T2 (small diameter tool)
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X_ Y_ ;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S_ T1003; . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T1003 (medium diameter tool) to the tool change
position
M03;
Machining program
G91 G30 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Z-axis; stopping the spindle rotation
G30 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing T2 (small diameter tool) in the spindle with
T1003 (medium diameter tool)
1-2 Fixed Address Shorter Route Access Method
In this method, the tool number is registered in relation with the pot number of the tool pot where
the tool is set. The tool and the pot are handled in a pair, therefore, the tool is always returned to
the same pot.
This means, if the tools stored in adjacent pots do not cause interference when storing them, it is
not necessary to worry about tool interference during automatic operation.
CAUTION When mounting tools, check the restrictions on tools thoroughly and make sure that the
arrangement of tools will not cause interference at tool changes. If you fail to observe
the restrictions on tools, tools may interfere with each other when tool changes are
performed, and this will cause damage to the machine.
1. With MH-403, SH-403 (60- and 120-tool specification), SH-503/40 and HVM630,
NOTE
although the tool is always returned to the magazine position where it was removed,
the pot position in the magazine changes as tool change cycle is executed (free-pot
fixed address method).
2. The allowable maximum tool diameter of the tool that can be stored in a pot without
interference is indicated below. Set the tools in pot taking this maximum diameter
into consideration.
Max. Tool Diameter

Machine Model
With Adjacent Tool Without Adjacent Tool

SH-403 80 mm dia. 125 mm dia.
SH5000 80 mm dia. 150 mm dia.
MH-403, SH-503/40 100 mm dia. 150 mm dia.
MH-503, 503/U 120 mm dia. 240 mm dia.
SH-503/50 120 mm dia. 250 mm dia.
MH-633, 633/U, SH-633 120 mm dia. 300 mm dia.
MH-1003 120 mm dia. 360 mm dia.
SH8000 <60-tool
125 mm dia. 300 mm dia.
specification>
SH8000
<Over 150-tool 125 mm dia. 320 mm dia.
specification>
HVM630 100 mm dia. 200 mm dia.
3. For the U-axis control specification, since tool number 1 in pot number 1 is special
for the cap tool, this tool number must not be changed.
On the TOOL ENTRY (detail information) screen, the tool numbers which are the same as
the pot numbers are set for the pot numbers.
Although the tool numbers can be changed, it is recommended to set the same tool
numbers to the pot numbers to facilitate setting as well as to avoid operation errors.
T ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool number
T ;. . . . . . . . . . .Tool number
Make tool-related settings on the tool

NOTE
registration (sub-item) screen.
Programming for the fixed address shorter route access method

Ex.
With SH-503, execute the program indicated below with T1 mounted in the spindle.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T2 tool to the tool change position
M03;
Machining program
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd zero return of X- and Y-axes; stopping the spindle
rotation
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the spindle tool from T1 to T2
N2;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H2 S500 T3; . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T3 tool to the tool change position
M03;
Machining program
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2nd zero return of X- and Y-axes; stopping the spindle
rotation
M01;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the spindle tool from T2 to T3
2 S FUNCTION
The S function controls the spindle speed. The spindle

speed is directly specified by a required spindle speed
following address S.
COMMAND
S_ M03(M04);
• S. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a spindle speed (min−1).
• M03(M04). . . . Specifies spindle rotation.
M03: Normal rotation.
M04: Reverse rotation.
1. Spindle speed can be specified in units of 1 min−1.

2. Spindle speed is calculated using the following formula.
1000V N: Spindle speed (min−1)

N=
πD V: Cutting speed (m/min)
π: Circumference constant (3.14)
D: Tool diameter (mm)
Using S function
Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y50.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2;
M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the spindle in the normal direction at 1000 min−1
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping spindle rotation

S1500; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the spindle in the normal direction at 1500 min−1
Calculating the spindle speed

Ex.
To calculate the spindle speed when machining a workpiece at the cutting speed of 26 m/min with
a 20 mm dia. end mill.
<Spindle speed>
1000V
N=
πD
N: Spindle speed (min−1)

V: Cutting speed (m/min)
π: Circumference constant (3.14)
D: Tool diameter (mm)
<Cutting speed>
πDN
V=
1000
Calculating the spindle speed using the equation above.
1000 × 26
N= = 414 (min−1)
3.14 × 20
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X80.0 Y70.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S414 T2;
3 F Function
The F function is used to control the feedrate of a tool.

Tool travel per minute is specified following address F.
COMMAND
F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the feedrate of a tool. (mm/min)
1. The F function is a modal function. Therefore, once a feedrate is specified, it

NOTE
remains valid until the next feedrate is specified.
2. A cutting feedrate specified in a program is the value when the feedrate override dial
on the operation panel is set at 100%.
1. The F function is used with G01, G02, G03, and the hole machining canned cycles.
2. Programmed cutting feedrate can be adjusted using the feedrate override dial on the
operation panel.
Note that the feedrate is fixed while the M49 command is executed in automatic
mode. In this case, it is not allowed to adjust the feedrate by using the feedrate
override dial.
3. Feedrate is calculated using the following formula.
F = fZN F: Feedrate (mm/min)
f: Feed per tooth (mm/tooth)
Z: Number of teeth (flutes)
4. Feedrate for tapping is calculated using the following formula.
F = PN F: Feedrate (mm/min)
P: Pitch (mm)
Calculating the feedrate (1)

Ex.
To calculate the feedrate when carrying out machining in the following conditions.
End mill: 20 mm dia. (2-flute)
Feed: 0.08 mm/tooth
Spindle speed: 450 min−1
<Feedrate>
F = fZN
F: Feedrate (mm/min)
f: Feed per tooth (mm/tooth)
Z: Number of teeth (flutes)
Calculate the feedrate using the equation above.
F = 0.08 × 2 × 450 = 72 (mm/min)
Calculating the feedrate (2)

Ex.
To calculate the feedrate when carrying out tapping in the following conditions
Tap: M8 × P1.25
Spindle speed: 400 min−1
<Feedrate in tapping>
F = PN
F: Feedrate (mm/min)
P: Pitch (mm)
Calculate the feedrate using the equation above.
F = 1.25 × 400 = 500 (mm/min)
Using F function
Ex.
+Y
2 1
F200
160
F200
+X
−160 160
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X160.0 Y160.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2;
M03;
G01 Z0 F3000; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At point 1, moving down to Z0 at feedrate of 3000
mm/min
X−160.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to point 2 at feedrate of 200 mm/min
F200 (200 mm/min) remains valid for the following

blocks until another F value is specified.
Y−160.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving to point 3 at feedrate of 200 mm/min
N5;
G90 G00 G54 X160.0 Y160.0;
G43 Z30.0 H5 S1000 T6;
M03;
G99 G81 Z−20.0 R3.0 F50; . . . . . . . . . In the hole machining canned cycle G81 (spot drilling
cycle), cutting feed along the Z-axis is executed at
feedrate of 50 mm/min.
X−160.0;
If the G00 command is specified, axes are moved at a rapid traverse rate. An F command
is valid only in the cutting feed mode.
Even if the G00 mode is specified, the F value is not cleared or changed.
3-1 Table of Rapid Traverse Rates
The rapid traverse rates of the individual axes are indicated below.
Rapid Traverse Rate

Machine Model X-axis Y-axis Z-axis U-axis
mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min
MH-403 20000 20000 20000 -

MH-503
20000 20000 20000 2000
MH-503/U
MH-633
20000 20000 20000 2000
MH-633/U
MH-1003 20000 20000 20000 -
42000 42000 32000
SH-403 -
(60000) (60000) (60000)
SH-503 42000 42000 42000 -
32000 32000 32000
SH-633 -
(42000) (42000) (42000)
NH4000
NH5000 50000 50000 50000 -
SH5000
SH8000 42000 42000 42000 -
HVM630 80000 80000 80000 -
AFM2400 42000 42000 42000 -
ULTIMILL H3000 48000 48000 48000 -
Values in ( ) are for option.

NOTE
CHAPTER G
D AND H FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the D and H functions which are used to specify an offset number.
D code is used for cutter radius offset and tool position offset, while H code is used for tool
length offset.
CONTENTS
G : D AND H FUNCTIONS
1 D FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
2 H FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
D AND H FUNCTIONS G-1
1 D FUNCTION
The D function is the address to specify the offset number

used for the cutter radius offset function (G41, G42).
The offset function specified in the program offsets the
tool paths so that they are always generated to obtain the
programmed shape, without changing the program.
The cutter radius offset amount is input on the TOOL

OFFSET screen.
A D number specifies the No. on this screen of the offset
data to be used by a number.
Although D numbers are used for the tool position offset
function (G45 - G48) in addition to the cutter radius offset
function (G41, G42), G45 - G48 commands are rarely
used in a program.
For details of G45 - G48 commands, refer to
page B-70 (20).
G-2 D AND H FUNCTIONS
Cutter radius offset in the XY plane

Ex.
COMMAND
G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ D_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
• G17 . . . . . . . . Selects of the plane where cutter radius offset is executed.
• G01(G00) . . . . Selects the interpolation mode in which the cutter radius offset
function is executed.
G00 . . . . . . . . Rapid traverse
G01 . . . . . . . . Cutting feed
• G41 . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset mode <G41>
(offset to the left). Workpiece
The tool paths are generated by

shifting the programmed paths to
the left in reference to the tool Tool advancing
direction
• G42 . . . . . . . . Calls the cutter radius offset mode
Tool advancing
(offset to the right). direction
The tool paths are generated by
shifting the programmed paths to
the right in reference to the tool Workpiece
advancing direction by the <G42>
• G40 . . . . . . . . Cancels the cutter radius offset mode.
• X, Y . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate values of the end point.
• I, J . . . . . . . . . When making a setting that represents the direction of the
workpiece shape in the following block, the direction ratio for this
setting is specified as a vector.
• D. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset number.
Specifies the offset number to be used.
For details, refer to CHAPTER E "CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET".
1. On the TOOL OFFSET screen, the geometry and wear offset amount can be set
separately for the D function.
2. The cutter radius offset amount, when D0 is specified, is always zero.
When the power is turned on, the NC is in the same state as D0 is specified.
Using D function
Ex.
To machine the following shape 1 → 2 → 3 using a 10 mm dia. end mill.
+Y
80
3
40
2 1
+X
30 60 100 120
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X150.0 Y120.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2;
M03;
Z−5.0;
G42 X120.0 Y40.0 D1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Executing the cutter radius offset function using the offset
amount D No. 1 on the TOOL OFFSET screen.
The cutter radius offset amount is the total amount of the
offset amount D (GEOMETRY) and offset amount D
(WEAR) set on the TOOL OFFSET
In this example, 5.000 mm + 0.015 mm = 5.015 mm is the
cutter radius offset amount.
G01 X60.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X30.0 Y80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
G-4 D AND H FUNCTIONS
2 H FUNCTION
The H function is the address to specify the offset number

used for the tool length offset function (G43, G44).
By specifying the offset function in the program, it is
h1 possible to offset the tool position so that the tool is
h2 always located at the programmed position without
changing the contents of the program.
h: Tool length offset amount
The tool length offset amount is input on the TOOL

OFFSET screen.
An H number specifies the No. on this screen of the offset
data to be used by a number.
COMMAND
G43 Z_ H_ ;
G49;
• G43 . . . . . . . . Calls the tool length offset function.
• G49 . . . . . . . . Cancels the tool length offset mode.
• Z . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the coordinate value for positioning in the Z-axis
direction.
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the offset number to be used.
1. If the G44 command is used for tool length offset, the sign for the tool length offset
amount should be reversed from the sign used with the G43 command.
Mori Seiki uses G43 instead of G44.
2. The tool length offset amount is always "0" when H0 is specified.
When the power is turned on, the NC is in the same state as H0 has been specified.
3. On the TOOL OFFSET screen, the geometry and wear offset amount can be set
separately for the H function.
Using H function
Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y80.0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S1000 T2; . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the tool length offset function using the offset
amount H No. 1 on the TOOL OFFSET screen.
The tool length offset amount is the total amount of the
offset amount H (GEOMETRY) and offset amount H
(WEAR) set on the TOOL OFFSET screen.
In this example, −150.000 mm + 0.135 mm = −149.865
mm is the tool length offset amount.
M03;
CHAPTER H
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION (OPTION)
This chapter describes the tool life management function. The tool life management
function automatically selects an available tool in a registered tool group if the tool called in
the same group has been used to the preset life.
NOTE
1. The tool life management function is an optional function.
2. Two tool life management function types, tool life management type A and tool
life management type B, are available.
Differences between these two types are described in 1 "GENERAL".
3. It is not allowed to use type A and type B by switching over them.
CONTENTS
H : TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (OPTION)
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
2 SETTING THE TOOL LIFE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
2-1 Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3

2-1-1 Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
2-1-2 Tool Life Management Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7
2-1-3 Re-registration of Tool Life Data with All Group Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . H-11
3 SPECIFICATION IN MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-12
3-1 Group Command (T Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-12

3-2 Tool Offset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-14
4 COUNTING THE TOOL LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15
5 SKIP COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-16
6 NEW TOOL SELECTION FLAG, TOOL LIFE EXPIRED FLAG,

AND TOOL LIFE-EXPIRATION WARNING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
6-1 New Tool Selection Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17

6-2 Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
6-3 Tool Life-Expiration Warning Signal (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (OPTION) H-1
1 GENERAL
If a tool, registered as a group tool, has been used to the preset life (life-expiration status), the
function selects a spare tool in the same group. There are two tool life management function
types, type A and type B. Use of two types by switching over between the two types is not
allowed.
Type B differs from type A in the following points.
1. Setting range of tool usable life is expanded.
See the table given in <The tool usable life (tool life data)>.
2. A tool group command (T command) is specified by a desired T code, 1 - 999999999,

registered to each group.
This designation is valid for the 8-digit T code specification.

NOTE
3. If a value, other than "0", is set for REST CNT that is introduced newly, a signal
(life-expiration warning signal) is output to the PMC when the value of "SETTING -
CURRENT" reaches the set REST CNT value.
The tool usable life (tool life data) and the registration number of tools are shown below.
<The tool usable life (tool life data)>
TIMES
[Number of Times] TIME
Item (Number of Times the Tool [Length of Tool Use Time]
is Mounted to the Spindle (Tool Used Time)
or Used)
Unit Times Minutes
Type A 1 - 9999 times 1 - 4300 minutes
Setting range
Type B 1 - 999999 times 1 - 100000 minutes
<Max. number of tool groups and max. number of tools>
Tool Life Management Tool Life Management

NC NC Pairs: 128 Pairs Pairs: 512 Pairs (Option)
Parameter Parameter
No. 6800#1 No. 6800#0 Max. Max.
(Bit 1) (Bit 0) Max. Group Number Max. Group Number
GS2 GS1 Number of Tools/ Number of Tools/
Group Group
0 0 16 16 64 32
0 1 32 8 128 16
1 0 64 4 256 8
1 1 128 2 512 4
H-2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION (OPTION)
1. Combinations of "max. group number" and "max. number of tools/group" may be

NOTE
selected by the setting for NC parameters GS1 and GS2.
If the setting for GS1 and/or GS2 is changed to change the combination of "max.
group number" and "max. number of tools/group", delete the presently registered
tool life management data and register the tool life management data again.
Refer to 2-1-3 "Re-registration of Tool Life Data with All Group Deletion".
2. The correspondence between the "max. group number" and the "max. number of
tools/group" differs depending on the controllable number of tool life management
pairs.
2 SETTING THE TOOL LIFE DATA
This section describes the method of setting the tool life data.
2-1 Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation
The tool life data can be set manually using the TOOL LIFE screen, TOOL LIFE (DETAIL) screen,
etc. given below.
2-1-1 Tool Life Management Screen
OFFSET
(OFFSET) [TOOL LIFE]
<Type A>
<Type B>
<Contents of display>
On the TOOL LIFE screen, the information related with the tool life management function is
displayed for the registered tool groups. In one page of the TOOL LIFE screen, tool life
information is displayed for ten groups.
The display items are briefly explained below.
Item Contents
GROUP Display of tool group number
TYPE Display of the selected tool life counting condition for the individual groups
(TIMES, TIME)
SETTING Display of the initial setting of tool life data; setting is possible.
CURRENT Display of the current counted tool life data; setting is possible.
SELECT TOOL Display of the tool number of the tool presently used ("IN USE" status) in
each group, or the tool number of the tool to be called by the next T
command
REMAIN Display of the number of available tools ("USABLE" state) in each group,
excepting the tool assigned as "IN USE".
If "∗∗" is displayed in this column, it indicates that the number of remaining
available tools ("USABLE" state) in that group is "0".
GROUP NO. Display of a T command number that calls for a selected tool in the
(Type B) designated group; setting is possible. Setting is allowed in the range from
1 to 99999999.
REST CNT Display of the remaining tool life to output the life-expiration warning signal;
(Type B) setting is possible.
A value larger than the value set for "SETTING" cannot be set. If
NOTE
"0" is set, the life-expiration warning signal output function is
disabled.
<Key operation>
1. Cursor control keys
The cursor control keys are used to move the cursor. The vertical arrow
symbol keys move the cursor up and down within the selected column and the horizontal
arrow symbol keys move the cursor right and left across the columns in the range from
"SETTING" to "CURRENT" (Type A) or from "GROUP NO." to "REST CNT" (Type B).
Inputting of the data is possible at the field where the cursor exists.
2. Page selection keys
The page selection keys and are used to change the display page (range of
display tool groups).
The present page is displayed at the upper right area of the screen.
The function of the soft-keys are explained below.
Soft-keys Functions
[GROUP When this soft-key is pressed after inputting the group number to be
SEARCH] searched, the cursor moves to the specified group.
[GROUP When this soft-key is pressed, all data of the tool group on which the cursor
DELETE] is located is cleared.
This operation is not possible during automatic operation.

NOTE
[SKIP] To skip the "IN USE" tool, press this soft-key. The "IN USE" tool in the
cursor located group is skipped.
If the cursor is located at a group for which the "IN USE" tool is
NOTE
not displayed, the skip processing is not executed.
[TOOL DETAIL] When this soft-key is pressed, the TOOL LIFE (DETAIL) screen of the
present cursor located group is displayed.
For details of the TOOL LIFE (DETAIL) screen, refer to page
H-7 (2-1-2).
<Inputting and outputting the data>
1) Move the cursor to the data input field using the cursor control keys.
2) Input the data by data entry keys.
1. Data input range is:

NOTE
TIMES . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 9999 (Type A)/0 to 999999 (Type B)

TIME . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 4300 (Type A)/0 to 100000 (Type B)
REST CNT . . . . . . A value smaller than or equal to the value set for "SETTING".
GROUP NO. . . . . 1 to 99999999
2. It is not allowed to input the set tool life data or the present counted life data while
the machine is operating by the pressing the (ST) switch.
3. Data cannot be input for SELECT TOOL and REMAIN.
3) Press the INPUT (INPUT) key.

2-1-2 Tool Life Management Detail Screen
OFFSET
(OFFSET) [TOOL LIFE] [TOOL DETAIL]
<Type A>
<Type B>
<Contents of display>
On the TOOL LIFE (DETAIL) screen, tool number (SELECT TOOL), status (COND.) and H and D
codes (H, D) are displayed for the spare tools registered to the specified tool group. The tool life
related data, "TYPE", "SETTING", "CURRENT", "GROUP NO." (only for Type B) and "REST CNT"
(only for Type B), is also displayed for the displayed tool group.
On the TOOL LIFE (DETAIL) screen, one display page shows information of the tools for
the allowable maximum number of tools per group. For the maximum number of tools/
group, refer to <Max. number of tool groups and max. number of tools> on page H-1 (1).
<Key operation>
1. Cursor control keys
The cursor control keys are used to move the cursor. The cursor moves
vertically in the ENTRY column and horizontally in the SELECT TOOL, H, and D columns.
Data can be input at the cursor located data field.
2. Page selection keys
The display page (tool group) is changed by pressing the page selection keys and .
3. Soft-keys
The functions of soft-keys are explained below.
Soft-keys Functions
[GROUP When this soft-key is pressed after inputting the group number to be
SEARCH] searched, the tool life management detail data of the specified group is
displayed.
[TYPE SET] This soft-key is used to change the tool life conditions.
1. The registered tool number is not changed even if the tool

NOTE
life conditions are changed.
2. The type setting operation is not allowed unless all tools are
in the "USABLE" state.
3. Type setting is not allowed during automatic operation.
[COND. To change the state of a registered tool, press this soft-key.
ALTER] The state can be changed while the machine is operating by pressing the
(ST) switch.
For details of state changing procedure, refer to <Changing
the tool state> below.
[GROUP When this soft-key is pressed, the state of the tools registered to the
RESET] displayed tool group is all cleared to "USABLE" state.
During automatic operation, group resetting is not allowed (CAP

NOTE
parameter No. 168 = 0).
By setting the parameter as "CAP parameter No. 168 = 1", group
resetting is allowed even during automatic operation.
[EXIT] When this soft-key is pressed, the screen returns to the TOOL LIFE
screen.
[ALL CLEAR] When this soft-key is pressed, the data of all groups is cleared.
All clear is not allowed during automatic operation.

NOTE
[GROUP When this soft-key is pressed, the data of the group presently displayed is
DELETE] cleared.
Group delete is not allowed during automatic operation.

NOTE
[NEW GROUP] When this soft-key is pressed after inputting a new group number, the
specified group number is registered and tool number of the first tool is set.
New group registration is not allowed during automatic operation.

NOTE
To display the [ALL CLEAR], [GROUP DELETE], and [NEW GROUP] soft-keys, press
NOTE
the menu selection key [>].
<Inputting the data>
It is possible to input the data for SELECT TOOL, H, and D items.

1) Move the cursor to the required data input column (SELECT TOOL, H, or D) by pressing the
cursor control keys.
2) Input the data by data entry keys.
1. Data input range is:

NOTE
SELECT TOOL . . . 0 to 9899

H, D . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 200
2. It is not allowed to input a tool number while the machine is operating by pressing
the (ST) switch.
3. If a number in the range from 1 to 9899 is input for SELECT TOOL, the tool state is
changed to "USABLE".
4. If "0" is input for SELECT TOOL, the tool number is cleared.
3) Press the INPUT (INPUT) key.

<Changing the tool state>
1) Move the cursor to the SELECT TOOL, H, or D column of the tool for which the COND.
should be changed by pressing the cursor control keys.
2) Press the [COND. ALTER] soft-key. The soft-key display changes.
3) Press the soft-key of the required tool state ([USABLE], [LIFE], [SKIP]).
The state of the cursor specified tool state is changed to the selected state.
1. If the tool state is changed to "USABLE", the tool use data (TIMES or TIME) is
NOTE
initialized.
2. If the tool state is changed to "LIFE", the tool use data (TIMES or TIME) is changed
to the same value as the SETTING value.
4) Press the [CANCEL] soft-key.
The screen returns to the previously displayed screen.
When the state is changed, the screen automatically returns to the previous screen.
1. When changing the state, it is allowed to change the state only to "USABLE" or
NOTE
"LIFE". For the tool for which the state is "IN USE", it is not allowed to change the
state.
2. For the tool group in which all tools have been used to the set life, it is not allowed to
change the state. To restore the operation after changing the tools, press the
[GROUP RESET] soft-key to initialize the tool data.
2-1-3 Re-registration of Tool Life Data with All Group Deletion
Tool life data can be re-registered using a program after all the existing tool life data has been
deleted.
COMMAND
G10 L3;
P_ L_ ;
T_ H_ D_ ;
(T_ H_ D_ ;)
P_ L_ ;
T_ H_ D_ ;
G11;
• G10 . . . . . . . . Starts tool life data registration.
• L3 . . . . . . . . . . Selects initialization mode at tool registration (all groups).
• P. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool group number.
• L . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies tool life data.
• T . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies a tool number.
• H. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the tool offset designation code (H code).
• D. . . . . . . . . . . Specifies the tool offset designation code (D code).
• G11. . . . . . . . . Ends tool life data registration.
3 SPECIFICATION IN MACHINING PROGRAM
This section describes the method of specifying the tool life management function in the machine
program.
3-1 Group Command (T Commands)
In response to the tool group command (T command), the function calls one of the tools registered
to the specified tool group and manages the tool life data of the called tool.
WARNING
When the NC is reset by such as pressing the RESET (RESET) key, T codes
designating the tool life management groups are canceled.
If a program is executed although a tool life management group
designation T code has been canceled, interference occurs between the
tool and the workpiece since the tool length offset and tool radius offset
functions cannot be executed correctly, causing serious injuries or
After resetting the NC, always execute the T code that designates a tool
life management group.
In a tool group, tools are called in the order they were registered.
NOTE
COMMAND <Type A>

1. Technical memory random method with 4-digit tool number specification (No. 6810
= 9900)
T99 ;
• . . . . . . . . Specifies a group number.
Range: 01 - 99 (only registered groups)
2. Fixed address shorter route access method (No. 6810 = 1000)
Technical memory random method with 8-digit tool number specification (No. 6810
= 1000)
T1 ;
• . . . . . . . Specifies a group number.
Range: 001 - 999 (only registered groups)
1. NH5000 (30-, 40-, 50-tool specification) uses the technical memory random method
NOTE
for magazine operations, however, the format of T commands differs between 4-digit
and 8-digit specifications. T commands are specified as "T99 ;" for 4-digit
specification and as "T1 ;" for 8-digit specification. 8-digit specification is set
for NH5000 as the default.
2. T numbers larger than the value set for NC parameter No. 6810 are recognized as
NOTE
the group number of the tool life management function. If the setting for this
parameter is changed, specify a group number command (T command) according to
the expression shown below.
Group number command (T command)
= Setting at NC parameter No. 6810 + Group number
COMMAND <Type B>
T_ ;
• T . . . . . . . . . . . Arbitrary tool group numbers registered to the individual tool
groups.
Range: 1 - 99999999 (Max. 8 digits)
If a tool number, belonging to none of registered tool groups, is specified, the tool is not
NOTE
controlled by the tool life management function.
3-2 Tool Offset Command
Specify "H99;" to set the tool length offset data in the state the tool life management function is
used.
When "H99;" is executed, the H code registered as the tool life management data of the tool
mounted in the spindle presently is selected.
To set the cutter radius offset data, specify "D99;".
When "D99;" is executed, the D code registered as the tool life management data of the tool
mounted in the spindle presently is selected.
Specify "H99;" or "D99;" after the M06 command. If an H or a D number other than "H99;"
NOTE
or "D99;" is specified after M06, an H or a D code of the tool life management data is not
selected.
Specifying a tool group command and tool offset command

Ex.
O1;
T9901; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling a tool of group number 1 to the tool change
position
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the spindle tool with the tool at the tool change
position (the tool of group number 1)
N1;
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H99 S_ T9902; . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the H code registered as the tool life
management data of the tool in the spindle (the tool of
group number 1) and executing tool length offset using
the tool length offset data registered to the selected H
code
Calling a tool of group number 2 to the tool change
position
M03;
Z−30.0;
(G17) G41 G01 X_ Y_ D99 F_ ; . . . . . . Selecting the D code registered as the tool life
management data of the tool in the spindle (the tool of
group number 1) and executing cutter radius offset using
the cutter radius offset data registered to the selected D
code
Machining program
4 COUNTING THE TOOL LIFE
<Counting the tool life by the number of times the tool has been used for cutting (TIMES)>
1. The TIMES data is counted "1" for the tool groups that have been called during the
execution of a machining program (from the cycle start to the end of the program (NC is
reset)). Counter data increases "1" even if the same tool group has been called more than
one time during the execution of a machining program.
2. The function checks whether or not a tool group has been called and it does not check if the
called tool has been used for machining.
3. The maximum value for "SETTING" is 9999 times (Type A) or 999999 times (Type B).
<Counting the tool life by the length of time (TIME)>
1. In this mode, the length of time the tool has been used in the cutting mode (G01, G02, G03,
etc.) is counted in units of 4 seconds. Length of time less than 4 seconds, spent at changing
tool groups, etc., is not counted.
2. The length of time spent in single-block stop, feed hold, rapid traverse, dwell and waiting for
the completion of commands during tool use is disregarded.
3. Tool use time is not counted in the machine lock state, auxiliary function lock state, and dry
run state.
4. The length of time is set and displayed in units of minutes.
5. The maximum value for "SETTING" is 4300 minutes (Type A) or 100000 minutes (Type B).
5 SKIP COMMAND
The skip command skips the presently selected tool in the present group and updates the selected
tool to the next one.
COMMAND
M66; . . . . . . . . . . . Tool skip ON
Skips the presently selected tool in the present group.
6 NEW TOOL SELECTION FLAG, TOOL LIFE EXPIRED FLAG, AND

TOOL LIFE-EXPIRATION WARNING SIGNAL
This section describes the new tool selection flag and tool life expired flag.
6-1 New Tool Selection Flag
1. If a new tool is selected in the specified tool group, the new tool selection flag is set ("1" is
set) at the same time the tool group command (T command) is executed.
2. This flag can be used to execute the automatic measuring of the offset data of the newly
called tool, for example.
3. The new tool selection flag remains valid until the next T command is specified or the NC is
reset.
4. The new tool selection flag is output to system variable #1003 of the custom macro.
6-2 Tool Life Expired Flag
1. If all tools in the specified tool group have been used to the life, the tool life expired flag is set
("1" is set).
The tool life expired flag cannot be reset to "0" unless the tool life expired state of all the
NOTE
tools in that group is cleared by an operation at the screen.
2. The tool life expired flag is output to system variable #1002 of the custom macro.
3. The tool life expired flag is output to PMC, too. The PMC executes the following processing
when it receives the tool life expired flag.
• Displays the message, indicating that tool life has been expired.
• Prohibits cycle start of automatic operation (set for PC parameter "K12.3").
6-3 Tool Life-Expiration Warning Signal (Type B)
It is possible to set the timing at which the life-expiration warning signal is output for "REST CNT".
The value to be set for this item represents the remaining length of time before the presently used
tool is change to a new tool.
When the value of ["SETTING" - "CURRENT"] reaches the value set for "REST CNT", the
life-expiration warning signal is output to the PMC.
CHAPTER I
B FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the B function which controls the rotation of the table.
CONTENTS
I : B FUNCTIONS
1 B FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
2 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4
3 APC POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-5
4 ALARM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7

B FUNCTIONS I-1
1 B FUNCTION
The B function controls the table rotation in the automatic operation. When table rotation angle is
specified with address B, the corresponding axis (B) is unclamped, indexed to the specified
angular position and clamped.
COMMAND
B_.; . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies table rotation angle.
CAUTION Pay sufficient care when rotating the table so that the workpiece and the fixture on the
table will not cause interference. If the table is rotated carelessly, it will cause damage
to the machine.
1. The following conditions must be satisfied to execute a B-axis command.

NOTE
• The APC is at the home position.

• Not during the APC cycle
• The pallet is clamped.
• The operation-panel-side front door is closed.
2. The B-axis command must include a decimal point. A numeric value specified
without a decimal point is interpreted in units of 0.001°. If a value other than a
multiple of 1° is specified for the 1° index specification, the B-axis command
becomes invalid and an alarm message (MC3001) is displayed on the screen.
3. With the 1° index specification, designation of a B command is possible only in the
G00 mode. If a B command is designated in other than the G00 mode, an alarm
message (MC3008) is displayed on the screen.
4. With the 1° index specification, if a B command is designated with the G code calling
for a hole machining canned cycle in the same block, an alarm message (MC3005)
5. With the 1° index specification, only "0" or "1" can be specified for the number of
repetitions of a hole machining canned cycle which includes a B command. If a
value other than "0" or "1" is specified, an alarm message (MC3004) is displayed on
the screen.
I-2 B FUNCTIONS
6. With the 1° index specification, up to five G codes can be designated with a B

NOTE
command in the same block. The G codes that can be designated with a B
command are indicated below.
• G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning
• G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . Data setting
• G17, G18, G19. . . . Plane selection
• G27 . . . . . . . . . . . . Zero return check
• G28 . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic zero return
• G29 . . . . . . . . . . . . Return from zero point
• G30 . . . . . . . . . . . . Second/third, fourth zero return
• G30.1 . . . . . . . . . . . Floating zero return
• 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutter radius offset cancel
• G50.1 . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable mirror image cancel
• G51.1 . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable mirror image
• G52 . . . . . . . . . . . . Local coordinate system setting
• G54 to G59. . . . . . . Work coordinate system selection
• G60 . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-directional approach
• G80 . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole machining canned cycle
• G90 . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute command
• G91 . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental command
• G92 . . . . . . . . . . . . Work coordinate system change
• G92.1 . . . . . . . . . . . Work coordinate system preset
• G98 . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial point level return (hole machining canned cycle)
• G99 . . . . . . . . . . . . Point R level return (hole machining canned cycle)
If more than one G code belonging to the same G code group is specified in the
same block, the one specified last is valid.
7. With the 1° index specification, specifying of multiple M codes is not permitted in the
block that contains a B command even if the function of multiple M commands in a
block is optionally selected.
8. With the 1° index specification, if an M command is specified with a B command in
the same block in a hole machining canned cycle which contains a B command, an
alarm message (MC3003) is displayed on the screen.
9. A B-axis can be designated with other controlled axes in the same block.
10. While the B-axis is rotating, feed hold, reset, and emergency stop are all valid.
11. The B-axis does not rotate while the pallet is unclamped.
12. For the machine equipped with the arbitrary angle index type table (excludes the
HVM Series), B-axis clamp (M10) and unclamp (M11) commands must be
designated before and after the designation of a B command.
B FUNCTIONS I-3
13. With MH-503, 503/U, 633, and 633/U, an index command in units of 0.001° can be
NOTE
executed even when the arbitrary angle index specification is not selected. In this
case, however, index accuracy is not high since indexing is made in the simplified
positioning mode.
14. With the HVM series, the arbitrary angle index (0.001°) specification is standard and
simultaneous 4-axis control possible.
Using B function
Ex.
O0001;
N1;
G90 G00 G54 B0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing the B-axis at 0° position
X0 Y0;
G43 Z30.0 H1 S400 T2;
M03;
Machining program
B180.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing the B-axis at 180° position
Machining program
I-4 B FUNCTIONS
2 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL COMMANDS
For B-axis commands, absolute or incremental mode can

+ −
be specified using the G90 or G91 command.
In the absolute mode, the direction the table rotates in the
clockwise direction when it is viewed from the top is
defined as the positive direction and its rotation in the
counterclockwise direction is defined as the negative
direction.
In the incremental mode, the target position located in the
clockwise rotation direction is defined as the positive
value and that located in the counterclockwise rotation
direction is the negative value. In this case, the rotation
direction is also defined by viewing it from the top.
For the definition of positive (+) and negative
(−) directions, refer to page A-15 (7-1).
Absolute Command Incremental Command
Symbol G90 (B_ ;) G91 (B_ ;)

Meaning of sign Rotation direction
Meaning of value Angle of rotation
Reference point of command B0 Present angular position
1. In the absolute mode, the B-axis position reached by the machine zero return
NOTE
operation is taken as the 0° position if the work coordinate system is not set for the
B-axis.
2. In the absolute mode, no B-axis movement occurs if the same position is specified.
G90 B90.0; . . . . . Rotation of B-axis to 90° position
B90.0; . . . . . . . . . Since the specified position is the same position as specified in
the previous block, the B-axis does not move.
3. In the absolute mode, if a B-axis is first specified in the negative rotation range and
then if the same position is specified in the positive rotation range, the B-axis does
not move. Similarly, if the same position is specified in the positive rotation range
first and then in the negative rotation range, the B-axis does not move.
G90 B−270.0; . . . Rotation of B-axis to −270° position
B90.0; . . . . . . . . . Since the specified position is the same position as specified in
the previous block, the B-axis does not move.
4. With the 1° index specification, B-axis rotation is controlled so that the target position
is reached along the shorter path. Therefore, if "G90 B270.0;" is specified in the
absolute programming mode, the B-axis rotates 90° in the negative direction instead
of rotating 270° in the positive direction.
In the absolute mode, it is recommended to specify the B-axis position in the positive
rotation range to avoid errors.
B FUNCTIONS I-5
3 APC POSITION
Pallet change position (APC position) and the programming for positioning at the APC position are
described below.
<SH series, NH5000, NH4000>
Z-axis is at the second zero point and B-axis is at the machine zero point.
G91 G30 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Z-axis

G28 B0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of B-axis
M02(M30); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pallet change and work number search
<MH-403, 503, 503/U, 633, 633/U>
Z-axis is at the machine zero point or the second zero point, X-axis is at the third zero point, and
B-axis is at the machine zero point.
G91 G28(G30) Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return or second zero return of Z-axis
G30 P3 X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third zero return of X-axis
<HVM630>
Z-axis is at the machine zero point, X-axis is at the machine zero point or the second zero point,
and B-axis is at the machine zero point.
G91 G28 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of Z-axis

G28(G30) X0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return or second zero return of X-axis
<MH-1003 (A-pallet)>
Z-axis is at the machine zero point or the second zero point and both X- and B-axes are at the
machine zero point.
G28 X0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-axis
M62; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-pallet loading
G28 X0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-axis
M63; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-pallet unloading
M02(M30); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work number search
I-6 B FUNCTIONS
<MH-1003 (B-pallet)>
Z-axis is at the machine zero point or the second zero point, X-axis is at the third zero point, and
B-axis is at the machine zero point.
M60; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-pallet loading
M61; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-pallet unloading
M02(M30); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work number search
<ULTIMILL H3000>
Z-axis is at the second zero point.
G91 G30 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of Z-axis

B FUNCTIONS I-7
4 ALARM TABLE
If an alarm occurs with a B command for the rotary table of 1° index specification, a message is
displayed. When an alarm message is displayed, locate the cause of the alarm by using the alarm
table below.
Macro
Program
Message Description
Alarm
No.
3001 B COMMAND ERROR A B command value of other than an
integer (multiple of 1°) is specified.
3002 OTHER AXIS ARE COMMANDED A numerically controlled axis (X, Y, Z) is
specified with a B command in the same
block.
3003 M WAS COM WITH B When a B code is read during the execution
of a hole machining canned cycle, an M
code is specified with the B code in the
same block.
3004 COM ERR K OR L NOT 1 OR 0 When a B code is during the execution of a
hole machining canned cycle, other than
K1, K0, L1, or L0 is specified for the number
of repetitions.
3005 G-CODE COMMAND ERROR A G code other than those indicated below
is specified.
G00, G10 G17 - G19, G27 - G30, G30.1,
G40, G50.1, G51.1, G52, G54 - G59, G60,
G80, G90, G91, G92, G92.1, G98, G99
3006 IMPROPER ADDRESS An address that cannot be used is
specified.
Other than G, B, K, L, M, S, T, X, Y, Z, P, F
3007 B-COMMAND OUT OF RANGE The specified B-axis rotation target position
is outside the travel range.
3008 INDEX COM NOT IN G00 MODE A B-axis rotation command is specified in
other than the G00 mode.
3009 WORK OFFSET DATA ERROR The B-axis work offset data of the
coordinate system that is used or specified
is not a multiple of "1".
3010 PARAMETER ERROR There is an error in parameter setting.
Although the 4th-axis call is not prohibited
by the parameter, the setting of the index
parameter is on.
CHAPTER J
A FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the A function which specifies the tilting angle of the table.
The function is applicable only to AFM2400.

NOTE
CONTENTS
J : A FUNCTIONS
1 A FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
1-1 Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
2 M68, M69 A-AXIS CLAMP AND UNCLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

A FUNCTIONS J-1
1 A FUNCTION
Following explains the functions related to the tilting axis of the table.
1-1 Operation Commands
A function specify the tilting angle and the rotation angle of the table by addresses A.
COMMAND
(M69;) . . . . . . . . . A-axis unclamp.
G00 A_.; . . . . . . Specifies table tilting angle in the rapid feed mode.
(M68;) . . . . . . . . . A-axis clamp.

• F . . . . . . . . . . . Specifies tilting/rotating speed (°/min).
CAUTION Pay sufficient care when rotating or tilting the table so that the workpiece or the fixture
on the table will not cause interference. If interference occurs due to table rotation or
tilting, it will cause machine damage.
The least index angle of the A-axis is 0.001°.

NOTE
2 M68, M69 A-AXIS CLAMP AND UNCLAMP
The M68 and M69 commands are used to clamp and unclamp the A-axis.
By clamping the A-axis, rigidity during cutting can be increased for the operation to be preformed
without controlling the A-axis. To operate the A-axis, unclamp it before executing an A-axis
command.
COMMAND
M68; . . . . . . . . . . A-axis clamp
M69; . . . . . . . . . . A-axis unclamp
Before specifying an A-axis rotation command, unclamp the A-axis by specifying M69.
NOTE
When the power is switched on, the A-axis is automatically unclamped.

CHAPTER K
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
This chapter describes the programming procedure using several example programs.
CONTENTS
K : EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
1 PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
2 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
2-1 Hole Machining Canned Cycle Program (G81, G76, G84)

and Sub-program (M98, M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
2-2 Accurate Circle Cutting (Cutter Radius Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-11
2-3 Machining Multiple Workpieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-14
2-4 Facing, Side Cutting (G42),
Hole Machining Canned Cycle (G81, G73, G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-18
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS K-1
1 PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE
1) Drawing
a) Study the fixture and chucking method
b) Determine the machining method and tooling
c) Determine the workpiece zero point
2) Creating a process sheet

O0001 ;
N1 ; a) Consider the machining order
G90 G00 G54 X90.0 Y105.0 ; b) Determine the cutting conditions (spindle
G43 Z30.0 H1 S440 T2 ; speed, depth of cut, feedrate etc.) and create
M03 ; a process sheet following the rules.
G01 Z0 F2000 ; It is useful to organize the conditions
X–160.0 F211 ; beforehand as in the following process
sheet.
.
.
.
Offset Number
Spindle
Tool Feedrate Tool Length Cutter Radius
Speed
Process Number Tool Name (S) (F) Offset Offset
(T) (mm/min)
(min−1) Number Number
(H) (D)
N1 1 Center drill 1500 100 1
N2 2 6 mm dia. drill 1000 150 2
N3 3 20 mm dia. end mill 300 60 3 3

K-2 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
2 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
A variety of machining methods and programming methods are used when machining workpieces.
This section describes programs which will be used frequently in actual production.
Study these example programs and then create programs which better suit your actual production
requirements. Note that the programming methods and values shown in the example programs
may not apply to your specific needs.
WARNING 1. Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among machine users.
Mori Seiki cannot predict the workpiece clamping method, spindle
speed, feedrate, depth of cut, and width of cut, etc., that will be
required in each case and it is therefore the user's responsibility to
determine the appropriate settings.
If you have difficulty determining these conditions, consult the
fixture and tool manufacturers. Machining under inappropriate
machining conditions can cause the workpiece or cutting tool to fly
out during machining, causing serious injuries or damage to the
machine. It will also adversely affect machining accuracy.
2. The programs given in this section are not applicable to all types of
machining centers. Programs must be written while taking the
performance of the machine into consideration and be executed with
due consideration given to safety. If the machine's capacity is not
taken into account when writing the program, the workpiece or
cutting tool may fly out during machining, causing serious injuries
1. The program given below is for SH-503. For MH series (includes U-axis control
NOTE
specification), SH-403 and 633, since the tool change position differs from that of
SH-503, the tool change position should be changed when reading the programs.
Since technical random method is used for the 30 or 40-tool specification of SH
series and NH5000, tools should be classified into large-, medium-, and
small-diameter tools according to the diameter of the tools to be used; tool numbers
should be changed according to the tool classification.
For the tool change position, refer to page B-39 (11) and for the tool number,
refer to page F-4 (1-1).
2. In the case of U-axis control specification, tool No. 1 is specially used for the cap
tool. Therefore, "T1" cannot be used for the tool number in the examples of program
given below. Use a tool number other than T1.
2-1 Hole Machining Canned Cycle Program (G81, G76, G84) and Sub-program
(M98, M99)
+0.03
φ 20 0
6 − M10 P = 1.5
Through-hole
Prepared hole 8.5 dia.
50
200
50
50
(50) 100 100
300
1C 0.5C
30
Material: Cast iron (JIS FC25)
<Procedure>
1) Determine the workpiece zero point.
+Y
+X
(X0, Y0)
Z0
2) Determine the clamping method.
Fixture
Plate
Workpiece
Fixture
Reference block
4 clamping plates
Reference block
3) Determine the tooling.
Machining Tool
Tool Name Portions to Be Machined
Order Number
1 Center drill T1 Centering for M10 tapping and 20 mm dia. hole
2 8.5 mm dia. drill T2 Drilling prepared hole for M10 tapping
3 18 mm dia. drill T3 Rough drilling of 20 mm dia. hole
4 19.5 mm dia. end mill T4 Semi-finishing of 20 mm dia. hole
Chamfering for M10 tapping holes and 20 mm

5 25 mm dia. chamfering mill T5
dia. hole
6 M10 × P1.5 tap T6 Tapping
7 20 mm dia. boring bar T7 Finishing 20 mm dia. boring
4) Determine the cutting conditions.
Spindle Offset Number

Tool Speed Feedrate
Process Number Tool Name (F) Tool length Cutter radius
(S)
(T) (mm/min) offset offset
(min−1) number (H) number (D)
N1 T1 Center drill 2000 150 1
N2 T2 8.5 mm dia. drill 750 150 2
N3 T3 18 mm dia. drill 440 90 3
N4 T4 19.5 mm dia. end mill 400 80 4
25 mm dia. chamfering
N5 T5 400 80 5
mill
N6 T6 M10 × P1.5 tap 250 375 6
N7 T7 20 mm dia. boring bar 1600 150 7

5) Create the program.

O0001 (TEST PIECE); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number and title (test piece)
G00 G40 G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling cutter radius offset and hole machining canned
cycle
/G91 G30 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling second zero return of X- and Y-axes; zero return is
executed or not executed according to the setting of block
delete switch.
• Block delete switch ON . . . . . . . . . . .The block preceded by "/" is ignored.
• Block delete switch OFF . . . . . . . . . .The block preceded by "/" is executed.
/T1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T1 (center drill); T1 is called or not called
according to the setting of block delete switch.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
/M06;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing tool change cycle; tool change cycle is
delete switch
N1 T2 (CENTER DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with center drilling

Calling T2 (8.5 mm dia. drill)
G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G54
Positioning of X- and Y-axes at the workpiece zero point
B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing B-axis to 0° position
G43 Z50.0 H1 S2000;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z50.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
position is offset by offset data set for tool length offset
number 1
Specifying spindle speed of 2000 min−1
M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the spindle in the normal direction
(G98) G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F150; . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81)
• Z−5.0 . . . Z coordinate value of the point Z (hole
bottom)
Point Z (Z−5.0)
Point R
(Z3.0) Initial point
(Z50.0)
Z0

Spot drilling cycle (G81) is executed at the positions
specified in O0002.
G80 G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . Canceling hole machining canned cycle

Second zero return of X- and Y-axes and spindle stops
rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change between T1 in the spindle and T2
N2 T3 (8.5 DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 8.5 mm dia. drill

Calling T3 (18 mm dia. drill)
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G54
Positioning of X- and Y-axes at X100.0, Y50.0 at a rapid
traverse rate
G43 Z50.0 H2 S750;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z50.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 2
(G98) G81 Z−34.0 R3.0 F150 K0; . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81)

NOTE
2. In the F15 format, the number of repetitions
Point Z (Z−34.0)
is specified using address L.
Point R
(Z3.0) • Z−34.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z
Initial point
(Z50.0) • R3.0 . . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
Z0

specified in O0002.
rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N3 T4 (18 DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 18 mm dia. drill

Calling T4 (19.5 mm dia. end mill)
number 3
rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N4 T5 (19.5 ENDMILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 19.5 mm dia. end mill

Calling T5 (25 mm dia. chamfering mill)
number 4
Same movement • Z−32.0 . . Z coordinate value of the point Z

as a venter drill
Point Z
(Z−32.0)
Point R
(Z3.0)
Initial point
(Z50.0)
Z0

rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N5 T6 (25 MENTORI); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfering with 25 mm dia. chamfering mill

Calling T6 (M10 × P1.5 tap)
number 5
(G98) G81 Z−11.0 R−7.0 F80; . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81)
• R−7.0 . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
Z−5.5 R−2.0 K0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing cycle point Z and R

NOTE
• Z−5.5 . . . Position of the new point Z
• R−2.0 . . . Position of the new point R
specified in O0002.
rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N6 T7 (M10 P=1.5 TAP); . . . . . . . . . . . Tapping with M10 × P1.5 tap

Calling T7 (20 mm dia. boring bar)
G90 G00 G54 X100.0 Y50.0; . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G54
Positioning of X- and Y-axes at X100.0, Y50.0 at a rapid
traverse rate
number 6
(G98) G84 Z−32.0 R10.0 F375 K0; . . . Executing the tapping cycle (G84)

NOTE
• R10.0 . . . Z coordinate value of the point R
Feedrate
= Pitch (mm) × Spindle speed (min−1)
= 1.5 × 250 = 375 mm/min
Tapping cycle (G84) is executed at the positions specified
in O0002.
rotating.
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
N7 T1 (20 BORING); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boring with 20 mm dia. boring bar

Calling T1 (center drill)
G43 Z50.0 H7 S1600;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z50.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 7
/(G98) G76 Z−5.0 R3.0 Q0.5 F150; . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76)
• Q0.5 . . . . Shift amount of 0.5 mm (+X direction)
1. The tool shift direction is set for parameters

NOTE
No. 5101.4 and No. 5101.5. Before
shipping, the shift direction is set at "+X
direction".
2. In the F15 format, shift amount is specified
using address I and J.
To measure the diameter of the machined 20 mm
diameter hole, the hole is first machined to 5 mm
depth.
/G80 G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . Canceling hole machining canned cycle
rotating.
/M00;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program stop
Measure the machined 20 mm diameter hole.
/G90 G00 G54 X0 Y0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G54

/G43 Z50.0 H7 M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z50.0 while Z-axis position is offset by
offset data set for tool length offset number 7
Starting the spindle in the normal direction
Carrying out a hole size check with the block delete
switch, when required
(G98) G76 Z−32.0 R3.0 Q0.5 F150; . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76)
• Q0.5 . . . . Shift amount of 0.5 mm (+X direction)
1. The tool shift direction is set for parameters

NOTE
No. 5101.4 and No. 5101.5. Before
shipping, the shift direction is set at "+X
direction".
rotating.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end
Sub-program (O0002)
O0002; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number

X100.0 Y50.0;
Y0;
Y−50.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole position data
X−100.0;
Y0;
Y50.0;
M99; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub-program end (Returning to main program)
2-2 Accurate Circle Cutting (Cutter Radius Offset)
Cutting allowance is 5 mm
φ 90
200
200
φ 100
Material: Cast iron (JIS FC25)
20
<Procedure>
1) Determine the workpiece zero point and the workpiece clamping method.
110
10
Z0
4 clamping plates
Workpiece zero point (X0, Y0)
3 positioning pins
Machining Tool
Order Number
25 mm dia. end mill T1 100 mm dia. hole
3) Determine the cutting condition.
Spindle Offset Number

Tool Speed Feedrate
(S)
(T) (mm/min) offset offset
(min−1) number (H) number (D)
N1 T1 25 mm dia. end mill 330 66 1 1*
*
NOTE For the cutter radius offset amount, set 12.5 mm for (D) GEOMETRY of No. 1 on the
TOOL OFFSET screen.

O0010; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number
cycle
delete switch.
/T1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T1 (25 mm dia. end mill); T1 is called or not called
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
delete switch
When T1 tool is already mounted in the spindle, turn on
the block delete switch.
N1 (25 ENDMILL D1 = 12.5); . . . . . . . . Drilling with 25 mm dia. end mill

number 1
Z−25.0;
G41 G01 X20.0 Y−30.0 D1 F66;. . . 1 After offsetting the tool position to the left in reference to
the tool advance direction by the amount set to cutter
radius offset number 1, the cutting tool is moved to X20.0,
Y−30.0 at a cutting feedrate.
Specifying the feedrate of 66 mm/min
G03 X50.0 Y0 R30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Circular arc cutting (counterclockwise direction), radius
30.0 mm, circular arc end point coordinate X50.0 Y0
I−50.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Circle, radius 50.0 mm
X20.0 Y30.0 R30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Circular arc cutting (counterclockwise direction), radius
30.0 mm, circular arc end point coordinate X20.0 Y30.0
G40 G01 X0 Y0 F1000; . . . . . . . . . 5 Canceling cutter radius offset
Moving the cutting tool to the workpiece zero point at a
feedrate of 1000 mm/min
G00 Z50.0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning to Z50.0 at a rapid traverse rate and spindle
stops rotating.
G91 G30 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end
+Y
(0, 30.0)
4
5
+X
(0, 0) (20.0, 0) (50.0, 0)
2
1
(0, −30.0)
Approach radius is set to R30.0 with about 60% of radius R.
2-3 Machining Multiple Workpieces
Mount the workpiece shown in the previous section 2-2 on each face of the angle plate and create
the program as follows.
1) Determine the workpiece zero point and workpiece clamping method.
Angle plate
20
10
50
Z0 Clamping plates
X0, Y0

O0010; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number

cycle
G90 G10 L2 P1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;. . . . . . . . . . Inputting the offset data of X-, Y-, and Z-axes to define the
work coordinate system G54
G10 L2 P2 X_ Y_ Z_ ;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting the offset data of X-, Y-, and Z-axes to define the
delete switch.
/T1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling T1 (25 mm dia. end mill); T1 is called or not called
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
delete switch
When T1 tool is already mounted in the spindle, turn on
the block delete switch.
N1 (25 ENDMILL D1 = 12.5); . . . . . . . . Drilling with 25 mm dia. end mill

number 1
M98 P101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O0101
G55 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G55
(G90) B90.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing B-axis to 90° position
(G90) B180.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing B-axis to 180° position

(G90) B270.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indexing B-axis to 270° position
G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes and spindle stops
rotating.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end
Sub-program (O0101)
O0101; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number

G90 G00 Z−25.0;
G41 G01 X20.0 Y−30.0 D1 F66;. . . 1 After offsetting the tool position to the left in reference to
the tool advance direction by the amount set to cutter
radius offset number 1, the cutting tool is moved to X20.0,
Y−30.0 at a cutting feedrate.
Specifying the feedrate of 66 mm/min
G03 X50.0 Y0 R30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Circular arc cutting (counterclockwise direction), radius
30.0 mm, circular arc end point coordinate X50.0 Y0
I−50.0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Circle, radius 50.0 mm
X20.0 Y30.0 R30.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Circular arc cutting (counterclockwise direction), radius
30.0 mm, circular arc end point coordinate X20.0 Y30.0
G40 G01 X0 Y0 F1000; . . . . . . . . . 5 Canceling cutter radius offset
Moving the cutting tool to the workpiece zero point at a
feedrate of 1000 mm/min
G28 Z0;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of Z-axis
+Y
(0, 30.0)
4
5
+X
(0, 0) (20.0, 0) (50.0, 0)
2
1
(0, −30.0)
Approach radius is set to R30.0 with about 60% of radius R.

2-4 Facing, Side Cutting (G42), Hole Machining Canned Cycle (G81, G73, G76)
5 - φ 28.5
150 150 Depth 25 mm
100
300
100
400
25
35 Material: Cast iron (JIS FC25)
Mount two workpieces to the angle plate back to back.

<Procedure>
1) Determine the workpiece zero point.
Workpiece zero point (X0, Y0)
Z0
Machining Tool
Order Number
1 4" face mill T1 Facing (Milling)
2 Center drill T2 Centering for 28.5 mm dia. hole
3 27 mm dia. drill T3 Rough drilling of 28.5 mm dia. hole
4 28 mm dia. end mill T4 Semi-finishing of 28.5 mm dia. hole
5 28.5 mm dia. boring bar T5 Finishing of 28.5 mm dia. boring
6 40 mm dia. end mill T6 Side cutting (circumferential cutting)
3) Determine the cutting conditions.
Spindle Tool Offset Number

Tool Speed Feedrate
(S)
(T) (mm/min) offset number offset number
(min−1) (H) (D)
N10 T1 4" face mill 330 400 1
N20 T2 Center drill 2000 150 2
N30 T3 27 mm dia. drill 330 70 3
N40 T4 28 mm dia. end mil 330 70 4
N50 T5 28.5 mm dia. boring bar 1000 80 5
N60 T6 40 mm dia. end mil 250 50 6 32

O0050 (TEST PIECE); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number, title (test piece)

G00 G40 G80 T1; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling cutter radius offset and hole machining canned
cycle
Calling T1 (4" face mill)
G90 G10 L2 P1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;. . . . . . . . . . Inputting the offset data of X-, Y-, and Z-axes to the work
coordinate system G54
G10 L2 P2 X_ Y_ Z_ ;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting the offset data of X-, Y-, and Z-axes to the work
coordinate system G55
M98 P51; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O0051 (tool change)
N10 T2 (4 INCH FACE MILL); . . . . . . . Facing with 4" face mill

Calling T2 (center drill)
G90 G54 G00 B0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G54
Indexing B-axis to 0° position
M98 P52; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling sub-program O0052
N11;
G90 G55 G00 B180.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting work coordinate system G55
Tool change between T1 in the spindle and T2
N20 T3 (CENTER DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with center drill

Calling T3 (27 mm dia. drill)
N21;
N30 T4 (27 DRILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 27 mm dia. drill

Calling T4 (28 mm dia. end mill)
N31;
N40 T5 (28 ENDMILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 28 mm dia. end mill

Calling T5 (28.5 boring bar)
N41;
N50 T6 (28.5 BORING); . . . . . . . . . . . . Boring with 28.5 mm dia. boring bar

Calling T6 (40 mm dia. end mill)
N51;
N60 (40 ENDMILL); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling with 40 mm dia. end mill

N61;
G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . Machine zero return of X-, Y-, and Z-axes and spindle
stops rotating.
M30; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end
Sub-program 1 (O0051)
O0051 (ZRN.ATC); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program number

G91 G30 X0 Y0 M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second zero return of X- and Y-axes and spindle stops
rotating
M01; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change between spindle tool with the tool at tool
change position
O0052 (4 INCH FACE MILL SUB);

G90 G00 X280.0 Y120.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of X- and Y-axes at X280.0, Y120.0 at a rapid
traverse rate
G43 Z30.0 H1 S330.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 1
Z0;
G01 X−280.0 F400; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting up to X−280.0 at a feedrate of 400 mm/min
G00 Y40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Y40.0 at a rapid traverse rate
G01 X280.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting up to X280.0 at a feedrate of 400 mm/min
G00 Y−40.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Y−40.0 at a rapid traverse rate
G01 X−280.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting up to X−280.0 at a feedrate of 400 mm/min
G00 Y−120.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Y−120.0 at a rapid traverse rate
G01 X280.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting up to X280.0 at a feedrate of 400 mm/min
G00 Z200.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the cutting tool to Z200.0 at a rapid traverse rate
O0053 (CENTER DRILL SUB);

G90 G00 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of X- and Y-axes at the workpiece zero point
G43 Z30.0 H2 S2000 M08;. . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 2
Specifying spindle speed of 2000 min−1 and starting
coolant discharge
G99 G81 Z−5.0 R3.0 F150; . . . . . . . . . Executing the spot drilling cycle (G81)
X150.0 Y100.0;
Y−100.0;
X−150.0;
G98 Y100.0;
G80; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling hole machining canned cycle
G00 Z200.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant discharge
O0054 (27 DRILL SUB);

G43 Z30.0 H3 S330 M08;. . . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 3
coolant discharge
G99 G73 Z−33.1 R2.0 Q3.0 F70; . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G73)
X150.0 Y100.0;
Y−100.0;
X−150.0;
G98 Y100.0;
O0055 (28 ENDMILL SUB);

G90 G00 X0 Y0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of X- and Y-axes at the workpiece zero
point at a rapid traverse rate
number 4
coolant discharge
G99 G73 Z−25.0 R2.0 Q3.0 F70; . . . . . Executing the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle (G73)
X150.0 Y100.0;
Y−100.0;
X−150.0;
G98 Y100.0;
O0056 (28.5 BORING SUB);
G43 Z30.0 H5 S1000 M08;. . . . . . . . . . Positioning at Z30.0 at a rapid traverse rate while Z-axis
number 5
coolant discharge
G99 G76 Z−25.0 R2.0 Q0.5 F80; . . . . . Executing the fine boring cycle (G76)
Relief amount 0.5 mm in the +X direction
1. For the G76 cycle, the tool shift direction is

NOTE
set in the +X direction before the shipment
of the machine for parameters No. 5101.4
and No. 5101.5.
X150.0 Y100.0;
Y−100.0;
X−150.0;
G98 Y100.0;
O0057 (SUB);
G90 G00 X240.0 Y250.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning of X- and Y-axes at X240.0, Y250.0 at a rapid
traverse rate
number 6
coolant discharge
Z−40.0;
G42 Y150.0 D32; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the cutter radius offset number 32
G01 X−200.0 F50;
Y−150.0;
X200.0;
Y200.0;
G40 G00 X240.0 Y250.0; . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling cutter radius offset
Z200.0 M09; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping coolant discharge
INDEX
Page
A
A FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Absolute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4
Accurate Circle Cutting (Cutter Radius Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-11
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
ALARM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-7
APC POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-5
AXIS CONTROL AND DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
B
B FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
BASIC PATTERN OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
C
Calculating the feedrate (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
Calculating the feedrate (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
Calculating the spindle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
Calculating the wall direction (blank workpiece shape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Cancel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
CAUTIONS FOR CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
CHANGING OFFSET BY SWITCHING PRE-LOAD LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-1
Changing the Cutter Radius Offset Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Changing the Pre-load Level Switching Offset by G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-3
Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
COUNTING THE TOOL LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15
Cutter radius offset in the XY plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
D
D FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
E
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20, K-2
Expressing Axis Movement in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
-i-
INDEX
Page
F
F Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
Facing, Side Cutting (G42), Hole Machining Canned Cycle (G81, G73, G76) . . . . . . . . . . . K-18
Fixed Address Shorter Route Access Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
FLOW UNTIL THE PRODUCT IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
G
G CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
G00 POSITIONING THE TOOL AT A RAPID TRAVERSE RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
G01 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A STRAIGHT PATH AT A CUTTING FEEDRATE . . . . B-30
G02, G03 CUTTING HELIX (HELICAL INTERPOLATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
G02, G03 MOVING THE TOOL ALONG A CIRCULAR ARC
AT A CUTTING FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
G02.2, G03.2 CUTTING SPIRAL (INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55
G04 SUSPENDING PROGRAM EXECUTION (DWELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
G08 LOOK AHEAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
G09 ACCURATELY POSITIONING AT THE END POINT OF LINEAR MOVEMENT . . . . . B-59
G10 CHANGING THE TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT WITH PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . B-62
G10 CHANGING WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM BY PROGRAMMED COMMAND . . . . . B-16
G17, G18, G19 SELECTING PLANE FOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
G22, G23 SETTING THE TOOL ENTRY INHIBITED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63
G28, G30 RETURN THE AXES TO THE MACHINE ZERO POINT,
OR SECOND (THIRD OR FOURTH) ZERO POINT AUTOMATICALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
G31 SKIP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-66
G40, G41, G42 CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
G43, G44, G49 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
G45 - G48 TOOL POSITION OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
G50, G51 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-76
G50, G51 REDUCING AND ENLARGING THE SHAPE (SCALING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-73
G50.1, G51.1 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80
G52 SETTING THE LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
G53 SELECTING THE MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
G54 - G59 SETTING THE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
G54, G54.1 SETTING THE ADDITIONAL WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
G60 UNI-DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89
G65, G66, G66.1, G67 USING MACRO PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
G68, G69 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
G72.1 COPY BY ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105
G72.2 COPY BY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
-ii-
INDEX
Page
G
G73 - G89 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
G73 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-30
G74 REVERSE TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
G76 FINE BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-71
G80 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
G81 SPOT DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
G82 COUNTER BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
G83 DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32
G84 TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
G85 BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
G86 BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
G87 BACK BORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-76
G88 BORING CYCLE (MANUAL TOOL EXTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26
G89 BORING CYCLE (DWELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-28
G90, G91 DIMENSIONING MODES
(ABSOLUTE COMMANDS AND INCREMENTAL COMMANDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
G300 Arc (Equal Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-2
G301 Arc (Random Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-5
G302 Line-at-angle (Equal Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-8
G303 Line-at-angle (Random Intervals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-11
G304 Rectangle/Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-14
G305 Staggered Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-18
G306 Circle Cutting Inside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-23
G307 Circle Cutting Outside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-26
G308 Frame Cutting Inside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-29
G309 Frame Cutting Outside (Finishing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-33
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1, E-1, H-1
GENERAL CAUTIONS ON THE OFFSET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Group Command (T Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-12
H
H FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
Hole Machining Canned Cycle Program (G81, G76, G84) and Sub-program (M98, M99) . . . K-3
HVM630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
HVM630, AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
-iii-
INDEX
Page
I
If a Wall Lies at the End of Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Incremental Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Inputting a Decimal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
INPUTTING THE PROGRAM TO THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
M
M CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
M00, M01 PROGRAM STOP AND OPTIONAL STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
M02, M30 PROGRAM END, PROGRAM END AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
M03, M04, M05 SPINDLE START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
M06 TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
M07, M55, M09 OIL SHOT START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
M08, M09 COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
M20 AUTOMATIC POWER SHUTOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
M29 G74, G84.3 DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE
(LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66
M29 G74, G84.3 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE
(LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-62
M29 G74, G84.3 REVERSE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (LEFT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . D-58
M29 G84, G84.2 DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . D-53
M29 G84, G84.2 HIGH-SPEED DEEP HOLE RIGID TAPPING CYCLE
(RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49
M29 G84, G84.2 RIGID TAPPING CYCLE (RIGHT-HAND THREAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-45
M33 TOOL STORING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
M48, M49 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
M50, M09 OIL-HOLE DRILL COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
M51, M59 AIR BLOW START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
M52, M58 DUST COLLECTOR AIR BLOW START AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
M68, M69 A-AXIS CLAMP AND UNCLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
M72, M77 CHIP FLUSH-AWAY COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
M73, M74, M75, M76 MIRROR IMAGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
M80, M81 SHOWER COOLANT DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
M92, M09 OIL MIST DISCHARGE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
M98, M99 SUB-PROGRAM CALL AND RETURN FROM SUB-PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
M108, M109 IN-MACHINE FIXTURE CLAMP/UNCLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
M119 SPINDLE SPECIFIED-POSITION STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
M166, M167 Cs CONTOURING CONTROL (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
M237 G83 SMALL-DIAMETER DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
Machining Multiple Workpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-14
MAXIMUM SPINDLE SPEED DURING RIGID TAPPING OPERATION . . . . . . APPENDIX D-37
-iv-
INDEX
Page
M
MH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
MH Series (Includes U-axis Control Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
N
New Tool Selection Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
NEW TOOL SELECTION FLAG, TOOL LIFE EXPIRED FLAG,
AND TOOL LIFE-EXPIRATION WARNING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
O
Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Overcut in the Cutter Radius Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
P
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-4
Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
PATTERN CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-1
Positive (+) and Negative (−) Designation
for Cutter Radius Offset Amount and Tool Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
Precautions on Using G300 to G305 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-22
Pre-load Level Switching and Changing Offset by S Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B-2
PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11, A-32
Programming for the fixed address shorter route access method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Programming for the technical memory random method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Programming using G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Programming using G02 and G03 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Programming using G02 and G03 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
Programming using G02 or G03 (Helical interpolation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50
Programming using G02.2 or G03.2 (Involute interpolation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
Programming using G08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-114
Programming using G10 L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Programming using G10 L10 - L13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62
Programming using G17, G18, or G19 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Programming using G17, G18, or G19 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Programming using G22 and G23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-65
-v-
INDEX
Page
P
Programming using G40, G41, and G42 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20
Programming using G50 and G51 (scaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75
Programming using G50.1 and G51.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Programming using G54 or G54.1 (Additional work coordinate system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88
Programming using G54 to G59
(Workpiece zero point set at the center of table rotation) (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
(Workpiece zero point set at the center of table rotation) (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
(Workpiece zero point set at the end face of workpiece) (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
(Workpiece zero point set at the end face of workpiece) (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Programming using G65, G66 and G67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Programming using G68 and G69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104
Programming using G72.1 (Copy by rotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-108
Programming using G72.2 (Copy by shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111
Programming using G73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31
Programming using G76 <F15 format> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-75
Programming using G76 <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)> . . . . . . D-74
Programming using G84.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-48
Programming using G84.2 (Deep hole rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57
Programming using G84.2 (High-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-52
Programming using G84.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61
-vi-
INDEX
Page
P
Programming using G84.3 (Deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-70
Programming using G84.3 (High-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . D-65
Programming using G87 <F15 format> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-80
Programming using G87 <F16 format (setting made before shipping the machine)> . . . . . . D-79
Programming using G90 and G91 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Programming using G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-3
Programming using G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D-12
Programming using M00 or M01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Programming using M02 or M30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Programming using M03, M04, and M05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Programming using M06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Programming using M08 and M09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Programming using M29 G74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-60
Programming using M29 G74 (Deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-69
Programming using M29 G74 (High-speed deep hole reverse rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . D-64
Programming using M29 G84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-47
Programming using M29 G84 (Deep hole rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56
Programming using M29 G84 (High-speed deep hole rigid tapping cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51
Programming using M73, M74, M75 and M76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
-vii-
INDEX
Page
P
Programming using M98 or M99 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Programming using M237 G83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37
Programming using the counter boring cycle (G82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
R
REQUIREMENT FOR USING THE CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Re-registration of Tool Life Data with All Group Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-11
S
S FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
Setting the Tool Length Offset Data (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
SETTING THE TOOL LIFE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Setting the Tool Life Data by Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Center of Table Rotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Setting the Workpiece Zero Point (Workpiece End Face) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
SH Series, NH5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16, A-21
Signs and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
SKIP COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-16
Space between the Words in the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
SPECIFICATION IN MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-12
Specifying a tool group command and tool offset command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-14
Specifying the absolute commands (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Specifying the absolute commands (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
SPECIFYING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
SPECIFYING THE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Specifying the incremental commands (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Specifying the incremental commands (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14, A-28
-viii-
INDEX
Page
T
T FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Table of Rapid Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16
Technical Memory Random Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
TECHNICAL TERMS
USED IN THE EXPLANATION OF THE CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . E-4
TERMS FOR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Tool Life Expired Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
Tool Life Management Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7
Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Tool Life-Expiration Warning Signal (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-17
Tool Offset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-14
U
Using B function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3
Using D function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Using F function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-15
Using H function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Using S function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
Using the hole machining canned cycle (G82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
W
WHAT IS A PROGRAM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
WHAT IS "CREATING A PROGRAM"? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
WHAT IS REQUIRED OF PROGRAMMERS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
WORKPIECE ZERO POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
-ix-
Comment Form Date:
To improve this manual, we invite you to make comments on any insufficient description or errors in this
manual. We want to know how you think we can make this manual better. Please restrict your comments to
those concerning this manual only. Comments can also be submitted using the company website at
http://www.moriseiki.com.
Name of Manual PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Number of Revisions PM-MHMSG502-B3E (2005.5)
Name Company
Department Telephone
Address
Chapter Page Line Comments/Requests
For Mori Seiki's Use - Do not write below this line.
Description Reception No. Received by

http://www.moriseiki.com
MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. MORI SEIKI ESPAÑA S.A.

Nagoya 2-35-16 Meieki, Nakamura-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi 450-0002, Japan Head Office & Technical Center
Head Office Phone: (052) 587-1811 Fax.: (052) 587-1818 Calle de la Electrónica, Bloque B, Nave 9 Poligono Industrial "La Ferreria" 08110
Montcada I Reixac (Barcelona), Spain
Nara 362 Idono-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1183, Japan
Campus Phone: (34)-93-575-36-46 Fax.: (34)-93-575-08-47
Phone: (0743) 53-1121
106 Kita Koriyama-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1160, Japan
Phone: (0743) 53-1125 MORI SEIKI SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Iga Campus 201 Midai, Iga City, Mie 519-1414, Japan Head Office & Technical Center
Phone: (0595) 45-4151 3 Toh Guan Road East, Singapore 608835
Chiba 488-19 Suzumi-cho, Funabashi City, Chiba 274-0052, Japan Phone: (65)-6560-5011 Fax.: (65)-6567-6234
Campus Phone: (047) 410-8800
MORI SEIKI (MALAYSIA) CO., LTD.
MORI SEIKI U.S.A., INC. Head Office & Technical Center
Head Office 9001 Currency Street, Irving, Texas 75063 Suite C, 1st Floor, Wisma Maritim, No 4, Persiaran Sukan, Seksyen 13,40100
Phone: (1)-972-929-8321 Fax.: (1)-972-929-8226 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia
Technical Dallas: 9001 Currency Street, Irving, Texas 75063 Phone: 60-3-5519-4341 Fax.: 60-3-5512-3981
Centers Phone: (1)-972-929-8321 Fax.: (1)-972-929-8226
Los Angeles: 5740 Warland Drive Cypress, California 90630 MORI SEIKI (THAILAND) CO., LTD.
Phone: (1)-562-430-3800 Fax.: (1)-562-430-5570 Head Office & Technical Center
Chicago: 5655 Meadowbrook Drive, Rolling Meadows, Illinois 60008 119/2 Moo 8, Bangnathani Building 1st Floor A1, Bangna-Trad KM.3 Road
Phone: (1)-847-593-5400 Fax.: (1)-847-593-5433 Kwaeng Bangna, Khet Bangna, Bangkok 10260, Thailand
Detroit: 29234 Commerce Drive, Flat Rock, Michigan 48134 Phone: (66)-2-361-3700-5 Fax.: (66)-2-361-3706
Phone: (1)-734-379-7000 Fax.: (1)-734-379-8876
Cincinnati: 4920 Olympic Blvd., Erlanger, Kentucky 41018 MORI SEIKI (TAIWAN) CO., LTD.
Phone: (1)-513-874-2736 Fax.: (1)-513-874-3254 Head Office & Technical Center
Boston: 10 Bearfoot Road Northborough, Massachusetts 01532 No. 8, Kong 8th Road, Linkou No. 2 Industrial District, Linkou Hsiang,
Phone: (1)-508-351-8686 Fax.: (1)-508-351-8688 Taipei Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C.
New Jersey: 30 Abeel Road, Monroe Township, New Jersey 08831 Phone: (886)-2-2603-1701 Fax.: (886)-2-2603-1706
Phone: (1)-609-495-6246 Fax.: (1)-609-409-6870
DTL: 950 Riverside Parkway Suite 90 West Sacramento, California 95605 MORI SEIKI HONG KONG LIMITED
Phone: (1)-916-374-9400 Fax.: (1)-916-374-9300
Head Office & Technical Center
Representative Office
Unit 02, 8/F., Vicwood Plaza, 199 Des Voeux Road, Central, Hong Kong
Charlotte, Seattle
Phone: (852)-2757-8910 Fax.: (852)-2757-7839
MORI SEIKI MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. MORI SEIKI (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
Montecito 38 Piso 12-38 Col. Napoles 03810 México D.F.
No. 200, Fu Te Road (North) Wai Gao Qiao Free Duty Zone, Shanghai, China
Phone: (52)-55-5488-3276 Fax.: (52)-55-5488-3279
Phone: (86)-21-5868-0310 Fax.: (86)-21-5868-0282
Technical Beijing: Room 20D, Block B King Wing Hot Spring Hotel, No.17
MORI SEIKI BRASIL LTDA. Center Dong Sanhuan South Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing 100021
Head Office & Technical Center Phone: (86)-10-6768-3691 Fax.: (86)-10-6768-8635
Rua República do Iraque, 1432 2 and, Campo Belo 04611-002 São Paulo, Brasil Tianjin: Room 702B, Building Bohai Coastal Region Development Center, 9
Phone: (55)-11-5543-1762 Fax.: (55)-11-5543-1948 Added Binshui Road, Hexi District, Tianjin 300061
Phone: (86)-22-282-08410 Fax.: (86)-22-282-08255
MORI SEIKI GmbH Dalian: 1108 Shenegshi Building, 35 Luxun Rd, Three Eight squire, Zhongshan
District, Dalian, China.116001
Head Office Antoniusstrasse 14, 73249 Wernau, Germany
Phone: (86)-(0)411-8271-8611 Fax.: (86)-(0)411-8272-6562
Phone: (49)-7153-934-0 Fax.: (49)-7153-934-220
Shenzhen: 1/F Block 206, Honghua Road, Futian Free Trade Zone, Shenzhen
Technical Stuttgart: Antoniusstrasse 14, 73249 Wernau, Germany
City, Guangdong Province, China
Centers Phone: (49)-7153-934-0 Fax.: (49)-7153-934-220
Phone: (86)-755- 8359-1997 Fax.: (86)-755- 8359-1375
Istanbul: Abdi Ipekci Caddesi No: 129 Kat 5, Bayrampasa, Istanbul
Phone: (90)-212-613-4141 Fax.: (90)-212-612-4603
Hamburg: Merkurring 63-65 22143 Hamburg, Germany MORI SEIKI KOREA CO., LTD.
Phone: (49)-40-69-458-0 Fax.: (49)- 40-69 458-200 Head Office & Technical Center
A-101, 2 SK TWIN TECH TOWER, 345-9 Kasan-dong, Kumcheon-Ku, Seoul,
Korea
MORI SEIKI (UK) LTD. Phone: (82)-2-862-0925 Fax.: (82)-2-862-0928
202 Bedford Avenue, Slough SL1 4RY, England
Phone: (44)-1753 526518 Fax.: (44)-1753 524695
PT. MORI SEIKI INDONESIA
Komplek Gading Bukit Indah Blok M/01 J1. Bukit Gading Raya, Kalapa Gading,
MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A. Jakarta Utara, 14240 Indonesia
Rue des Châtaigniers, Zone Industrielle d'Ormes-Saran, 45140 ORMES, France
Phone: (33)-2-38-74-88-99 Fax.: (33)-2-38-74-72-56
MORI SEIKI AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L. 6/6 Garden Road Clayton VIC 3168, Australia
Via Riccardo Lombardi N. 10, 20153 Milano, Italy Technical Melbourne: 6/6 Garden Road Clayton VIC 3168, Australia
Phone: (39)-02-4894921 Fax.: (39)-02-48914448 Centers Phone: (61)-3-8545-0900 Fax.: (61)-3-9561-4999
Sydney: 6/287 Victoria Road Rydalmere NSW 2116, Australia
Phone: (61)-2-8844-9700 Fax.: (61)-2-9638-6111
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the government of the exporting country. Printed in Japan
Check with the government agency for authorization.
041116

PM MHMSG502 B3e - L12328a01 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PM MHMSG502 B3e - L12328a01 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

Description of machine: Machining center

Machine serial No.:

Business hours: 8:30 - 17:30

SIGNAL WORD DEFINITION

FOR SAFE OPERATION

BEFORE READING THIS PROGRAMMING

D: HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE

E: CUTTER RADIUS OFFSET

H: TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Indicates the items that must be taken into consideration.

Indicates useful guidance relating to operations.

Indicates the page number or manual to be referred to.

Indicates the procedure used for displaying the required screen.

Indicates the example of operations.

FOR SAFE OPERATION

1 CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE

DANGER 1. Never touch a switch, button, or key with wet hands.

2 SAFETY PRACTICES DURING PROGRAMMING

3 TO ENSURE HIGH ACCURACY

4 PRECAUTIONS ON THE MACHINE EQUIPPED WITH

CAUTION If abnormal vibration or chattering is generated during machining due to improper

5 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE RAPID TRAVERSE RATE

6 CAUTIONS RELATING TO G CODES

7 CAUTIONS RELATING TO THE HOLE MACHINING CANNED

8 CAUTIONS RELATING TO M CODES

9 CAUTIONS RELATING TO TOOL CHANGES

Machining workpieces in a machining center requires programs.

To machine a workpiece in a machining center, a program must be created. This manual

WARNING 1. The programmer is requested to read this manual carefully and

This chapter describes the basic considerations for creating a program.

1 WHAT IS A PROGRAM?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

2 WHAT IS REQUIRED OF PROGRAMMERS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

3 WHAT IS "CREATING A PROGRAM"? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

4 INPUTTING THE PROGRAM TO THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

5 FLOW UNTIL THE PRODUCT IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

5-1 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

6 TERMS FOR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

6-1 Program Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

7 AXIS CONTROL AND DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

7-1 Movement along the Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

7-1-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

7-1-3 ULTIMILL H3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

7-1-4 HVM630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

7-1-5 AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

7-2 Expressing Axis Movement in Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

7-2-2 SH Series, NH5000, NH4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21

7-2-3 ULTIMILL H3000, HVM630, AFM2400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

9 SPECIFYING THE DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

9-1 Absolute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

10 SPECIFYING THE CUTTING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29

12 BASIC PATTERN OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31

13 CAUTIONS FOR CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32

13-1 Program Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32

What do you think of when you hear the term "program"?

All operations of the machine, including "spindle rotation",

2 WHAT IS REQUIRED OF PROGRAMMERS?

3 WHAT IS "CREATING A PROGRAM"?

What kind of actions are required to create a program?